Part Number Hot Search : 
TDA72 AD625K GPFC125B 02201 GBU4J RN5001 1051A 60601B
Product Description
Full Text Search
 

To Download TMP86FS23UG Datasheet File

  If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader .  
 
 


  Datasheet File OCR Text:
  8 bit microcontroller tlcs-870/c series TMP86FS23UG
page 2 TMP86FS23UG the information contained herein is su bject to change without notice. 021023 _ d toshiba is continually working to improve the qual ity and reliability of its products. nevertheless, semiconductor devices in general can malfunction or fa il due to their inherent electrical sensitivity and vulnerability to physical stress. it is the responsibility of the buyer, when utilizing toshiba products , to comply with the standards of safety in making a safe design for the entire system, and to avoid situations in which a malfunction or failure of such toshiba products could cause loss of human life, bodily injury or damage to property. in developing your designs, please ensure that to shiba products are used within specified operating ranges as set forth in the most re cent toshiba products specifications. also, please keep in mind the precautio ns and conditions set forth in the ? handling guide for semiconductor devices, ? or ? toshiba semiconductor reliability handbook ? etc. 021023_a the toshiba products listed in this document are inte nded for usage in general electronics applications (computer, personal equipment, office equipment, measuring equipment, industrial robotics, domestic appliances, etc.). these toshiba products are neither intended nor warranted for usage in equipment that requires extraordinarily high quality and/or reliability or a malfunction or failure of which may cause loss of human life or bodily injury ( ? unintended usage ? ). unintended usage include atomic energy control instruments, airplane or spaceship instruments, tr ansportation instruments, traffic signal instruments, combustion control instruments, medical instrument s, all types of safety devices, etc. unintended usage of toshiba products listed in this document shall be made at the customer's own risk. 021023_b the products described in this document shall not be used or embedded to any downstream products of which manufacture, use and/or sale are prohib ited under any applicable laws and regulations. 060106_q the information contained he rein is presented only as a guide for the applications of our products. no responsibility is assumed by tosh iba for any infringements of patents or other rights of the third parties which may result from its use. no license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of toshiba or others. 021023_c the products described in this document may include products subject to the foreign exchange and foreign trade laws. 021023_f for a discussion of how the reliability of microcontro llers can be predicted, please refer to section 1.3 of the chapter entitled quality and reli ability assurance/hand ling precautions. 030619_s ? 2006 toshiba corporation all rights reserved
revision history date revision 2005/9/12 1 first release 2005/12/8 2 contents revised 2006/8/28 3 contents revised

i table of contents TMP86FS23UG 1.1 features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 pin assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.3 block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1.4 pin names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 2. operational description 2.1 cpu core functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.1.1 memory address map ............................................................................................................................... 9 2.1.2 program memory (flash) .......................................................................................................................... 9 2.1.3 data memory (ram) ............................................................................................................................... .. 9 2.2 system clock controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2.2.1 clock generator ............................................................................................................................... ....... 10 2.2.2 timing generator ............................................................................................................................... ..... 12 2.2.2.1 configuration of timing generator 2.2.2.2 machine cycle 2.2.3 operation mode control circuit .............................................................................................................. 13 2.2.3.1 single-clock mode 2.2.3.2 dual-clock mode 2.2.3.3 stop mode 2.2.4 operating mode control ......................................................................................................................... 18 2.2.4.1 stop mode 2.2.4.2 idle1/2 mode and sleep1/2 mode 2.2.4.3 idle0 and sleep0 modes (idle0, sleep0) 2.2.4.4 slow mode 2.3 reset circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 2.3.1 external reset input ............................................................................................................................... 31 2.3.2 address trap reset ............................................................................................................................... ... 32 2.3.3 watchdog timer reset .............................................................................................................................. 32 2.3.4 system clock reset ............................................................................................................................... ... 32 3. interrupt control circuit 3.1 interrupt latches (il19 to il2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 3.2 interrupt enable register (eir) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 3.2.1 interrupt master enable flag (imf) .......................................................................................................... 36 3.2.2 individual interrupt enable flags (ef19 to ef4) ...................................................................................... 37 note 3: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 3.3 interrupt sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 3.3.1 interrupt acceptance processing is packaged as follows. ....................................................................... 39 3.3.2 saving/restoring general-purpose registers ............................................................................................ 40 3.3.2.1 using push and pop instructions 3.3.2.2 using data transfer instructions 3.3.3 interrupt return ............................................................................................................................... ......... 41 3.4 software interrupt (intsw) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 3.4.1 address error detection .......................................................................................................................... 42 3.4.2 debugging ............................................................................................................................... ............... 42
ii 3.5 undefined instruction interrupt (intundef) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 3.6 address trap interrupt (intatrap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 3.7 external interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 4. special function r egister (sfr) 4.1 sfr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 4.2 dbr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 5. i/o ports 5.1 port p1 (p17 to p10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 5.2 port p2 (p22 to p20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 5.3 port p3 (p37 to p30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 5.4 port p5 (p57 to p50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 5.5 port p6 (p67 to p60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 5.6 port p7 (p77 to p70) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 5.7 port p8 (p87 to p80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 6. time base timer (tbt) 6.1 time base timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 6.1.1 configuration ............................................................................................................................... ........... 67 6.1.2 control ............................................................................................................................... ..................... 67 6.1.3 function ............................................................................................................................... ................... 68 6.2 divider output (dvo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 6.2.1 configuration ............................................................................................................................... ........... 69 6.2.2 control ............................................................................................................................... ..................... 69 7. watchdog timer (wdt) 7.1 watchdog timer configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 7.2 watchdog timer control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 7.2.1 malfunction detection methods using the watchdog timer ................................................................... 72 7.2.2 watchdog timer enable ......................................................................................................................... 73 7.2.3 watchdog timer disable ........................................................................................................................ 74 7.2.4 watchdog timer interrupt (intwdt) ...................................................................................................... 74 7.2.5 watchdog timer reset ........................................................................................................................... 75 7.3 address trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 7.3.1 selection of address trap in internal ram (atas) ................................................................................ 76 7.3.2 selection of operation at address trap (atout) .................................................................................. 76 7.3.3 address trap interrupt (intatrap) ....................................................................................................... 76 7.3.4 address trap reset ............................................................................................................................... . 77 8. 18-bit timer/counter (tc1) 8.1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 8.2 control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 8.3 function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
iii 8.3.1 timer mode ............................................................................................................................... .............. 83 8.3.2 event counter mode ............................................................................................................................... 84 8.3.3 pulse width measurement mode ............................................................................................................ 85 8.3.4 frequency measurement mode .............................................................................................................. 86 9. 8-bit timercounter (tc3, tc4) 9.1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 9.2 timercounter control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 9.3 function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 9.3.1 8-bit timer mode (tc3 and 4) ................................................................................................................ 95 9.3.2 8-bit event counter mode (tc3, 4) ........................................................................................................ 96 9.3.3 8-bit programmable divider ou tput (pdo) mode (tc3, 4) ..................................................................... 96 9.3.4 8-bit pulse width modulation (pwm) output mode (tc3, 4) .................................................................. 99 9.3.5 16-bit timer mode (tc3 and 4) ............................................................................................................ 101 9.3.6 16-bit event counter mode (tc3 and 4) .............................................................................................. 102 9.3.7 16-bit pulse width modulation (pwm) output mode (tc3 and 4) ........................................................ 102 9.3.8 16-bit programmable pulse generate (ppg) output mode (tc3 and 4) ............................................. 105 9.3.9 warm-up counter mode ....................................................................................................................... 107 9.3.9.1 low-frequency warm-up counter mode (normal1 normal2 slow2 slow1) 9.3.9.2 high-frequency warm-up counter mode (slow1 slow2 normal2 normal1) 10. 8-bit timercounter (tc5, tc6) 10.1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 10.2 timercounter control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 10.3 function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 10.3.1 8-bit timer mode (tc5 and 6) ............................................................................................................ 115 10.3.2 8-bit event counter mode (tc5, 6) .................................................................................................... 116 10.3.3 8-bit programmable divider output (pdo) mode (tc5, 6) ................................................................. 116 10.3.4 8-bit pulse width modulation (pwm) output mode (tc5, 6) .............................................................. 119 10.3.5 16-bit timer mode (tc5 and 6) .......................................................................................................... 121 10.3.6 16-bit event counter mode (tc5 and 6) ............................................................................................ 122 10.3.7 16-bit pulse width modulation (pwm) output mode (tc5 and 6) ...................................................... 122 10.3.8 16-bit programmable pulse generate (ppg) output mode (tc5 and 6) ........................................... 125 10.3.9 warm-up counter mode ..................................................................................................................... 127 10.3.9.1 low-frequency warm-up counter mode (normal1 normal2 slow2 slow1) 10.3.9.2 high-frequency warm-up counter mode (slow1 slow2 normal2 normal1) 11. asynchronous serial interface (uart ) 11.1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 11.2 control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 11.3 transfer data format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 11.4 transfer rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 11.5 data sampling method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 11.6 stop bit length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 11.7 parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 11.8 transmit/receive operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 11.8.1 data transmit operation .................................................................................................................... 134 11.8.2 data receive operation ..................................................................................................................... 134 11.9 status flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
iv 11.9.1 parity error ............................................................................................................................... ........... 135 11.9.2 framing error ............................................................................................................................... ....... 135 11.9.3 overrun error ............................................................................................................................... ....... 135 11.9.4 receive data buffer full ..................................................................................................................... 136 11.9.5 transmit data buffer empty ............................................................................................................... 136 11.9.6 transmit end flag .............................................................................................................................. 137 12. synchronous serial interface (sio) 12.1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 12.2 control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 12.3 serial clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 12.3.1 clock source ............................................................................................................................... ........ 141 12.3.1.1 internal clock 12.3.1.2 external clock 12.3.2 shift edge ............................................................................................................................... ............. 143 12.3.2.1 leading edge 12.3.2.2 trailing edge 12.4 number of bits to transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 12.5 number of words to transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 12.6 transfer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 12.6.1 4-bit and 8-bit transfer modes ............................................................................................................. 144 12.6.2 4-bit and 8-bit receive modes ............................................................................................................. 146 12.6.3 8-bit transfer / receive mode ............................................................................................................... 147 13. 10-bit ad converter (adc) 13.1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 13.2 register configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 13.3 function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 13.3.1 software start mode ........................................................................................................................... 153 13.3.2 repeat mode ............................................................................................................................... ....... 153 13.3.3 register setting ............................................................................................................................... . 154 13.4 stop/slow modes during ad conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 13.5 analog input voltage and ad conversion result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 13.6 precautions about ad converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 13.6.1 restrictions for ad conversion interrupt (intadc) usage ................................................................. 157 13.6.2 analog input pin voltage range ........................................................................................................... 157 13.6.3 analog input shared pins .................................................................................................................... 157 13.6.4 noise countermeasure ....................................................................................................................... 157 14. key-on wakeup (kwu) 14.1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 14.2 control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 14.3 function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 15. lcd driver 15.1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 15.2 control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 15.2.1 lcd driving methods .......................................................................................................................... 163 15.2.2 frame frequency ............................................................................................................................... .. 164
v 15.2.3 lcd drive voltage ............................................................................................................................... 165 15.2.4 adjusting the lcd panel drive capability ............................................................................................ 165 15.3 lcd display operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 15.3.1 display data setting ............................................................................................................................ 16 6 15.3.2 blanking ............................................................................................................................... ............... 166 15.4 control method of lcd driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 15.4.1 initial setting ............................................................................................................................... ......... 167 15.4.2 store of display data ........................................................................................................................... 167 15.4.3 example of lcd driver output ............................................................................................................. 169 16. real-time clock 16.1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 16.2 control of the rtc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 16.3 function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 17. multiply-accumulate (mac) unit 17.1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 17.2 registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 17.2.1 command register ............................................................................................................................. 1 77 17.2.2 status register ............................................................................................................................... .... 178 17.2.3 multiplier data register ....................................................................................................................... 178 17.2.4 multiplicand data register .................................................................................................................. 178 17.2.5 result register ............................................................................................................................... .... 178 17.2.6 addend register ............................................................................................................................... .. 178 17.3 control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 17.4 register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 17.4.1 emac ............................................................................................................................... .................. 180 17.4.2 cmod ............................................................................................................................... .................. 180 17.4.3 rclr ............................................................................................................................... ................... 180 17.5 arithmetic modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 17.5.1 unsigned multiply mode ..................................................................................................................... 181 17.5.2 signed multiply mode ......................................................................................................................... 181 17.5.3 unsigned multiply-accumulate mode ................................................................................................. 181 17.5.4 signed multiply-accumulate mode ..................................................................................................... 182 17.5.5 valid numerical ranges ..................................................................................................................... 182 17.6 status flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 17.6.1 operation status flag (calc) ............................................................................................................ 183 17.6.2 overflow flag (ovrf) ........................................................................................................................ 183 17.6.3 carry flag (carf) .............................................................................................................................. 183 17.6.4 sign flag (sign) ............................................................................................................................... . 183 17.6.5 zero flag (zerf) ............................................................................................................................... . 183 17.7 example of software processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 18. flash memory 18.1 flash memory control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 18.1.1 flash memory command sequence execution control (flscr) ..................................... 186 18.1.2 flash memory bank select control (flscr) ................................................................ 186 18.1.3 flash memory standby control (flsstb) ............................................................................ 187 18.2 command sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 18.2.1 byte program ............................................................................................................................... ....... 188 18.2.2 sector erase (4-kbyte erase) ............................................................................................................. 188 18.2.3 chip erase (all erase) ........................................................................................................................ 189
vi 18.2.4 product id entry ............................................................................................................................... .. 189 18.2.5 product id exit ............................................................................................................................... ..... 189 18.2.6 read protect ............................................................................................................................... ........ 189 18.3 toggle bit (d6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 18.4 access to the flash memory area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 18.4.1 flash memory control in the serial prom mode ............................................................................... 191 18.4.1.1 how to write to the flash memory by executing the contro l program in the ram area (in the ram loader mode within the serial prom mode) 18.4.2 flash memory control in the mcu mode ............................................................................................ 193 18.4.2.1 how to write to the flash memory by executing a user write control program in the ram area (in the mcu mode) 19. serial prom mode 19.1 outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 19.2 memory mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 19.3 serial prom mode setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 19.3.1 serial prom mode control pins ........................................................................................................ 196 19.3.2 pin function ............................................................................................................................... ......... 196 19.3.3 example connection for on-board writing ......................................................................................... 197 19.3.4 activating the serial prom mode ...................................................................................................... 198 19.4 interface specifications for uart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 19.5 operation command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 19.6 operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 19.6.1 flash memory erasing mode (operating command: f0h) ................................................................. 203 19.6.2 flash memory writing mode (operation command: 30h) .................................................................. 205 19.6.3 ram loader mode (operation command: 60h) ................................................................................ 208 19.6.4 flash memory sum output mode (operation command: 90h) ......................................................... 210 19.6.5 product id code output mode (operation command: c0h) .............................................................. 211 19.6.6 flash memory status output mode (operation command: c3h) ...................................................... 213 19.6.7 flash memory read protection setting mode (operation command: fah) ...................................... 214 19.7 error code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 19.8 checksum (sum) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 19.8.1 calculation method ............................................................................................................................. 2 16 19.8.2 calculation data ............................................................................................................................... ... 217 19.9 intel hex format (binary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 19.10 passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 19.10.1 password string ............................................................................................................................... . 219 19.10.2 handling of password error .............................................................................................................. 219 19.10.3 password management during program development .................................................................... 219 19.11 product id code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 19.12 flash memory status code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 19.13 specifying the erasure area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 19.14 port input control register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 19.15 flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 19.16 uart timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 20. input/output circuitry 20.1 control pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 20.2 input/output ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 21. electrical characteristics 21.1 absolute maximum ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
vii 21.2 recommended operating condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 21.2.1 when programming flash memory in mcu mode ............................................................................. 230 21.2.2 when not programming flash memory in mcu mode ....................................................................... 230 21.2.3 serial prom mode ............................................................................................................................. 2 31 21.3 dc characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 21.4 ad conversion characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 21.5 ac characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 21.6 timer counter 1 input (ecin) characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 21.7 flash characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 21.7.1 write/retention characteristics .......................................................................................................... 235 21.8 recommended oscillating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 21.9 handling precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 22. package dimension this is a technical docu ment that describes the operat ing functions and electrical specifications of the 8-bit microc ontroller series tlcs-870/c (lsi).
viii
page 1 060116ebp TMP86FS23UG cmos 8-bit microcontroller ? the information contained herein is subject to change without notice. 021023_d ? toshiba is continually working to improve the quality and reli ability of its products. neverthel ess, semiconductor devices in general can malfunction or fail due to their inherent el ectrical sensitivity and vul nerability to physical stre ss. it is the responsibility of the buyer, when utilizing toshiba products, to comply with the standards of sa fety in making a safe design for the entire system, and to avoid situations in which a malfunction or failure of such toshiba products could cause loss of human life, bodily injury or damage to property. in developing your designs, pleas e ensure that toshiba products are used within specified operating ranges as set forth in the most recent toshiba products specifications. also, please keep in mind the precautions and conditions set forth in the ?handling gui de for semiconductor devices,? or ?toshiba se miconductor reliability handbook? etc. 021023_a ? the toshiba products listed in this document are intended for usage in general electronics applic ations (computer, personal eq uip- ment, office equipment, measuring equipment, industrial robotics, domestic appliances, etc.). these toshiba products are neithe r intended nor warranted for usage in equipment that requires extr aordinarily high quality and/or re liability or a malfunctionor failure of which may cause loss of human life or bod ily injury (?unintended usage?). unintended us age include atomic energy control instru ments, airplane or spaceship instruments, transporta tion instruments, traffic signal instrume nts, combustion control instruments, medi cal instru- ments, all types of safety dev ices, etc. unintended usage of toshiba products li sted in this document shall be made at the cust omer's own risk. 021023_b ? the products described in this document shall not be used or embedded to any downstream products of which manufacture, use and /or sale are prohibited under any appl icable laws and regulations. 060106_q ? the information contained herein is present ed only as a guide for the applications of our products. no responsibility is assum ed by toshiba for any infringements of patents or other rights of the th ird parties which may result from its use. no license is gran ted by impli- cation or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of toshiba or others. 021023_c ? the products described in this document are subjec t to the foreign exchange and foreign trade laws. 021023_e ? for a discussion of how the reliability of microcontrollers c an be predicted, please refer to section 1.3 of the chapter entit led quality and reliability assurance/h andling precautions. 030619_s this product uses the super flash ? technology under the licence of silicon storage technology, inc. super flash ? is registered trademark of silicon storage technology, inc. TMP86FS23UG the TMP86FS23UG is a single-chip 8-bit high-speed a nd high-functionality microcomputer incorporating 61440 bytes of flash memory. it is pin-compatible wi th the tmp86cm23/cp23aug (mask rom version). the TMP86FS23UG can realize operations equivalent to th ose of the tmp86cm23/cp23aug by programming the on- chip flash memory. 1.1 features 1. 8-bit single chip microcomputer tlcs-870/c series - instruction execution time : 0.25 s (at 16 mhz) 122 s (at 32.768 khz) - 132 types & 731 basic instructions 2. 20interrupt sources (external : 5 internal : 15) 3. input / output ports (i/o : 48 pins output : 3 pins) large current output: 5pins (typ. 20ma), led direct drive 4. prescaler - time base timer - divider output function 5. watchdog timer 6. 18-bit timer/counter : 1ch - timer mode - event counter mode - pulse width measurement mode - frequency measurement mode product no. rom (flash) ram package mask rom mcu emulation chip TMP86FS23UG 61440 bytes 2048 bytes p-lqfp64-1010-0.50d tmp86cm23/cp23aug tmp86c923xb
page 2 1.1 features TMP86FS23UG 7. 8-bit timer counter : 4 ch - timer, event counter, programmable divider output (pdo), pulse width modulation (pwm) output, programmable pulse generation (ppg) modes 8. 8-bit uart : 1 ch 9. 8-bit sio: 1 ch 10. 10-bit successive approximation type ad converter - analog input: 8 ch 11. key-on wakeup : 4 ch 12. lcd driver/controller - lcd direct drive capability (max 32 seg 4 com) - 1/4,1/3,1/2duties or static drive are programmably selectable 13. multiply accumulate unit (mac) - multiply or mac mode are selectable - signed or unsigned operation are selectable 14. clock operation single clock mode dual clock mode 15. low power consumption operation stop mode: oscillation stops. (battery/capacitor back-up.) slow1 mode: low power consumption operation usin g low-frequency clock.(high-frequency clock stop.) slow2 mode: low power consumption operation usin g low-frequency clock.(high-frequency clock oscillate.) idle0 mode: cpu stops, and only the time-based-tim er(tbt) on peripherals operate using high fre- quency clock. release by falling edge of th e source clock which is set by tbtcr. idle1 mode: cpu stops and peripherals operate us ing high frequency clock. release by interru- puts(cpu restarts). idle2 mode: cpu stops and peripherals operate usin g high and low frequency clock. release by inter- ruputs. (cpu restarts). sleep0 mode: cpu stops, and only the time-based-t imer(tbt) on peripherals operate using low fre- quency clock.release by falling edge of th e source clock which is set by tbtcr. sleep1 mode: cpu stops, and peripherals operate using low frequency clock. release by interru- put.(cpu restarts). sleep2 mode: cpu stops and peripherals operate using high and low frequency clock. release by interruput. 16. wide operation voltage: 3.5 v to 5.5 v at 16 mhz /32.768 khz 2.7 v to 5.5 v at 8 mhz /32.768 khz
page 3 TMP86FS23UG 1.2 pin assignment figure 1-1 pin assignment vss xout test vdd (xtin) p21 (xtout) p22 reset ( int5 / stop ) p20 avdd (ain0) p60 (ecnt/ain2) p62 (ecin/ain1) p61 ( int0 /ain3) p63 (stop2/ain4) p64 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 p15(seg26) p17(seg24) p50(seg23) p52(seg21) p51(seg22) p54(seg19) p53(seg20) p16(seg25) p84 (seg3) p83 (seg4) p82 (seg5) p81 (seg6) p80 (seg7) p77 (seg8) p76 (seg9) p75 (seg10) varef xin p65(ain5/stop3) p67(ain7/stop5) p10(seg31/rxd/boot) p11(seg30/txd) p14(seg27/int3) p12(seg29/int1) p66(ain6/stop4) p13(seg28/int2) p74 (seg11) p73 (seg12) p72 (seg13) p71 (seg14) p70 (seg15) p57 (seg16) p56 (seg17) p55 (seg18) (seg2) p85 (seg1) p86 (seg0) p87 com3 com2 com1 com0 vlc (tc4/si) p30 (tc3/so) p31 ( sck ) p32 (tc6/ pdo6/pwm6/ppg6 ) p33 (tc5/ pdo5/pwm5 ) p34 ( pdo4/pwm4/ppg4 ) p35 ( pdo3/pwm3 ) p36 ( dvo ) p37
page 4 1.3 block diagram TMP86FS23UG 1.3 block diagram figure 1-2 block diagram
page 5 TMP86FS23UG 1.4 pin names and functions the TMP86FS23UG has mcu mode, parallel prom mode, and serial prom mode. table 1-1 shows the pin functions in mcu mode. the serial prom mode is explained later in a separate chapter. table 1-1 pin names and functions(1/3) pin name pin number input/output functions p17 seg24 27 io o port17 lcd segment output 24 p16 seg25 26 io o port16 lcd segment output 25 p15 seg26 25 io o port15 lcd segment output 26 p14 seg27 int3 24 io o i port14 lcd segment output 27 external interrupt 3 input p13 seg28 int2 23 io o i port13 lcd segment output 28 external interrupt 2 input p12 seg29 int1 22 io o i port12 lcd segment output 29 external interrupt 1 input p11 seg30 txd 21 io o o port11 lcd segment output 30 uart data output p10 seg31 rxd 20 io o i port10 lcd segment output 31 uart data input p22 xtout 7 io o port22 resonator connecting pins(32.768 khz) for inputting external clock p21 xtin 6 io i port21 resonator connecting pins(32.768 khz) for inputting external clock p20 stop int5 9 io i i port20 stop mode release signal input external interrupt 5 input p37 dvo 64 o o port37 divider output p36 pdo3/pwm3 63 o o port36 pdo3/pwm3 output p35 pdo4/pwm4/ppg4 62 o o port35 pdo4/pwm4/ppg4 output p34 pdo5/pwm5 tc5 61 io o i port34 pdo5/pwm5 output tc5 input p33 pdo6/pwm6/ppg6 tc6 60 io o i port33 pdo6/pwm6/ppg6 output tc6 input p32 sck 59 io io port32 serial clock i/o
page 6 1.4 pin names and functions TMP86FS23UG p31 so tc3 58 io o i port31 serial data output tc3 input p30 si tc4 57 io i i port30 serial data input tc4 input p57 seg16 35 io o port57 lcd segment output 16 p56 seg17 34 io o port56 lcd segment output 17 p55 seg18 33 io o port55 lcd segment output 18 p54 seg19 32 io o port54 lcd segment output 19 p53 seg20 31 io o port53 lcd segment output 20 p52 seg21 30 io o port52 lcd segment output 21 p51 seg22 29 io o port51 lcd segment output 22 p50 seg23 28 io o port50 lcd segment output 23 p67 ain7 stop5 19 io i i port67 analog input7 stop5 input p66 ain6 stop4 18 io i i port66 analog input6 stop4 input p65 ain5 stop3 17 io i i port65 analog input5 stop3 input p64 ain4 stop2 16 io i i port64 analog input4 stop2 input p63 ain3 int0 15 io i i port63 analog input3 external interrupt 0 input p62 ain2 ecnt 14 io i i port62 analog input2 ecnt input p61 ain1 ecin 13 io i i port61 analog input1 ecin input p60 ain0 12 io i port60 analog input0 p77 seg8 43 io o port77 lcd segment output 8 p76 seg9 42 io o port76 lcd segment output 9 table 1-1 pin names and functions(2/3) pin name pin number input/output functions
page 7 TMP86FS23UG p75 seg10 41 io o port75 lcd segment output 10 p74 seg11 40 io o port74 lcd segment output 11 p73 seg12 39 io o port73 lcd segment output 12 p72 seg13 38 io o port72 lcd segment output 13 p71 seg14 37 io o port71 lcd segment output 14 p70 seg15 36 io o port70 lcd segment output 15 p87 seg0 51 io o port87 lcd segment output 0 p86 seg1 50 io o port86 lcd segment output 1 p85 seg2 49 io o port85 lcd segment output 2 p84 seg3 48 io o port84 lcd segment output 3 p83 seg4 47 io o port83 lcd segment output 4 p82 seg5 46 io o port82 lcd segment output 5 p81 seg6 45 io o port81 lcd segment output 6 p80 seg7 44 io o port80 lcd segment output 7 com3 52 o lcd common output 3 com2 53 o lcd common output 2 com1 54 o lcd common output 1 com0 55 o lcd common output 0 xin 2 i resonator connecting pins for high-frequency clock xout 3 o resonator connecting pins for high-frequency clock reset 8 i reset signal test 4 i test pin for out-going test. normally, be fixed to low. varef 11 i analog base voltage input pin for a/d conversion avdd 10 i analog power supply vdd 5 i +5v vss 1 i 0(gnd) table 1-1 pin names and functions(3/3) pin name pin number input/output functions
page 8 1.4 pin names and functions TMP86FS23UG
page 9 TMP86FS23UG 2. operational description 2.1 cpu core functions the cpu core consists of a cpu, a system cl ock controller, and an interrupt controller. this section provides a description of the cpu core, the program memory, the data memory, and the reset circuit. 2.1.1 memory address map the TMP86FS23UG memory is composed flash, ram, dbr(data buffer register) and sfr(special func- tion register). they are all mapped in 64-kbyte address space. figure 2-1 shows the TMP86FS23UG memory address map. figure 2-1 memory address map 2.1.2 program memory (flash) the TMP86FS23UG has a 61440 bytes (address 1000h to ffffh) of program memory (flash ). 2.1.3 data memory (ram) the TMP86FS23UG has 2048 bytes (address 0040h to 083fh) of internal ram. the first 192 bytes (0040h to 00ffh) of the internal ra m are located in the direct area; inst ructions with shorten operations are available against such an area. sfr 0000 h 64 bytes sfr: ram: special function register includes: i/o ports peripheral control registers peripheral status registers system control registers program status word random access memory includes: data memory stack 003f h ram 0040 h 2048 bytes 083f h dbr 0f80 h 128 bytes dbr: data buffer register includes: peripheral control registers peripheral status registers lcd display memory 0fff h 1000 h flash: program memory flash 61440 bytes ffb0 h vector table for interrupts (16 bytes) ffbf h ffc0 h vector table for vector call instructions (32 bytes) ffdf h ffe0 h vector table for interrupts (32 bytes) ffff h
page 10 2. operational description 2.2 system clock controller TMP86FS23UG the data memory contents become un stable when the power supply is turned on; therefore, the data memory should be initialized by an initialization routine. 2.2 system clock controller the system clock controller consists of a clock generator, a timing generator, and a standby controller. figure 2-2 syst em colck control 2.2.1 clock generator the clock generator generates the basic clock which pr ovides the system clocks supplied to the cpu core and peripheral hardware. it contains two oscillation ci rcuits: one for the high-frequency clock and one for the low-frequency clock. power consumption can be reduced by switching of the standby controller to low-power operation based on the low-frequency clock. the high-frequency (fc) clock and low-frequency (fs) clock can easily be obtained by connecting a resonator between the xin/xout and xtin/xtout pins respectively. clock input from an exte rnal oscillator is also possible. in this case, external clock is applied to xin/xtin pin with xout/xtout pin not connected. example :clears ram to ?00h?. (TMP86FS23UG) ld hl, 0040h ; start address setup ld a, h ; initial value (00h) setup ld bc, 07ffh sramclr: ld (hl), a inc hl dec bc jrs f, sramclr tbtcr syscr2 syscr1 xin xout xtin xtout fc 0036 h 0038 h 0039 h fs timing generator control register timing generator standby controller system clocks clock generator control high-frequency clock oscillator low-frequency clock oscillator clock generator system control registers
page 11 TMP86FS23UG figure 2-3 examples of resonator connection note:the function to monitor the basic clock directly at external is not provided for hardware, however, with dis- abling all interrupts and watchdog timers, the oscillation frequency can be adjusted by monitoring the pulse which the fixed frequency is outputted to the port by the program. the system to require the adjustment of the oscilla tion frequency should create the program for the adjust- ment in advance. xout xin (open) xout xin xtout xtin (open) xtout xtin (a) crystal/ceramic resonator (b) external oscillator (c) crystal (d) external oscillator high-frequency clock low-frequency clock
page 12 2. operational description 2.2 system clock controller TMP86FS23UG 2.2.2 timing generator the timing generator generates the various system cloc ks supplied to the cpu core and peripheral hardware from the basic clock (fc or fs). the timing generator provides the following functions. 1. generation of main system clock 2. generation of divider output ( dvo ) pulses 3. generation of source clocks for time base timer 4. generation of source clocks for watchdog timer 5. generation of internal source clocks for timer/counters 6. generation of warm-up clocks for releasing stop mode 7. lcd 2.2.2.1 configuration of timing generator the timing generator consists of a 2-stage prescaler, a 21-stage divider, a main system clock generator, and machine cycle counters. an input clock to the 7th stage of the divider depends on the operating mode, syscr2 and tbtcr, that is shown in figure 2-4. as reset and stop mode star ted/canceled, the prescaler and the divider are cleared to ?0?. figure 2-4 configurat ion of timing generator multi- plexer high-frequency clock fc low-frequency clock fs divider sysck fc/4 fc or fs machine cycle counters main system clock generator 1 2 1 4 3 2 8 7 10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 dv7ck multiplexer warm-up controller watchdog timer a s b y s b0 a0 y0 b1 a1 y1 5 6 17 18 19 20 21 timer counter, serial interface, time-base-timer, divider output, etc. (peripheral functions)
page 13 TMP86FS23UG note 1: in single clock mode, do not set dv7ck to ?1?. note 2: do not set ?1? on dv7ck while the low-frequency clock is not operated stably. note 3: fc: high-frequency clock [hz], fs : low-frequency clock [hz], *: don?t care note 4: in slow1/2 and sleep1/2 modes, the dv7ck setting is ineffective, and fs is input to the 7th stage of the divider. note 5: when stop mode is entered from normal1/2 mode, the dv 7ck setting is ineffective during the warm-up period after release of stop mode, and the 6th stage of the divider is input to the 7th stage during this period. 2.2.2.2 machine cycle instruction execution and peripheral hardware operat ion are synchronized with the main system clock. the minimum instruction execution uni t is called an ?machine cycle?. th ere are a total of 10 different types of instructions for the tlcs-870/c series: ra nging from 1-cycle instructions which require one machine cycle for execution to 10-cyc le instructions which require 10 machine cycles fo r execution. a machine cycle consists of 4 states (s0 to s3), and each state consists of one main system clock. figure 2-5 machine cycle 2.2.3 operation mode control circuit the operation mode control circuit starts and stops th e oscillation circuits for the high-frequency and low- frequency clocks, and switches the main system clock. there are three operating modes: single clock mode, dual clock mode and stop mode. these modes are cont rolled by the system cont rol registers (syscr1 and syscr2). figure 2-6 shows the operating mode transition diagram. 2.2.3.1 single-clock mode only the oscillation circuit for the high-frequenc y clock is used, and p21 (xtin) and p22 (xtout) pins are used as input/output ports . the main-system clock is obtained from the high-frequency clock. in the single-clock mode, the machine cycle time is 4/fc [s]. (1) normal1 mode in this mode, both the cpu core and on-chip pe ripherals operate using the high-frequency clock. the TMP86FS23UG is placed in this mode after reset. timing generator control register tbtcr (0036h) 76543210 (dvoen) (dvock) dv7ck (tbten) (tbtck) (initial value: 0000 0000) dv7ck selection of input to the 7th stage of the divider 0: fc/2 8 [hz] 1: fs r/w main system clock state machine cycle s3 s2 s1 s0 s3 s2 s1 s0 1/fc or 1/fs [s]
page 14 2. operational description 2.2 system clock controller TMP86FS23UG (2) idle1 mode in this mode, the internal oscillation circuit remains active. the cpu and the watchdog timer are halted; however on-chip peripherals remain active (operate using the high-frequency clock). idle1 mode is started by syscr2 = "1", and idle1 mode is released to normal1 mode by an interrupt request from the on-chip peri pherals or external interrupt inputs. when the imf (interrupt master enable flag) is ?1? (interrupt enable), the execution will resume with the acceptance of the interrupt, and the operation will return to nor mal after the interrupt service is completed. when the imf is ?0? (interrupt disable), the execution will resume with the instruction which follows the idle1 mode start instruction. (3) idle0 mode in this mode, all the circuit, except oscillator an d the timer-base-timer, stops operation. this mode is enabled by syscr2 = "1". when idle0 mode starts, the cpu stops and the timing generator stops feeding the clock to the peripheral circuits other than tbt. then, upon de tecting the falling edge of the source clock selected with tbtcr, the timing generator starts feeding the clock to al l peripheral circuits. when returned from idle0 mode, the cpu rest arts operating, entering normal1 mode back again. idle0 mode is entered and returned regardless of how tbtcr is set. when imf = ?1?, ef6 (tbt interrupt individu al enable flag) = ?1?, and tb tcr = ?1?, interrupt pro- cessing is performed. when idle0 mode is entered while tbtcr = ?1?, the inttbt interrupt latch is set after returning to normal1 mode. 2.2.3.2 dual-clock mode both the high-frequency and low-frequency oscillatio n circuits are used in th is mode. p21 (xtin) and p22 (xtout) pins cannot be used as input/output ports. the main system clock is obtained from the high-frequency clock in normal2 and idle2 modes, and is obtained from the low-frequency clock in slow and sleep modes. th e machine cycle time is 4/fc [s] in the normal2 and idle2 modes, and 4/fs [s] (122 s at fs = 32.768 khz) in the slow and sleep modes. the tlcs-870/c is placed in the signal-clock mode during reset. to use the dual-clock mode, the low- frequency oscillator should be turned on at the start of a program. (1) normal2 mode in this mode, the cpu core operates with the high-frequency clock. on-chip peripherals operate using the high-frequency clock and/or low-frequency clock. (2) slow2 mode in this mode, the cpu core operates with the lo w-frequency clock, while both the high-frequency clock and the low-frequency clock are operated. as the syscr2 becomes "1", the hard- ware changes into slow2 mode. as the syscr2 becomes ?0?, the hardware changes into normal2 mode. as the syscr2 beco mes ?0?, the hardware changes into slow1 mode. do not clear syscr2 to ?0? during slow2 mode. (3) slow1 mode this mode can be used to reduce power-consu mption by turning off oscillation of the high-fre- quency clock. the cpu core and on-chip peri pherals operate using th e low-frequency clock.
page 15 TMP86FS23UG switching back and forth between slow1 and slow2 modes are performed by syscr2. in slow1 and sleep modes, the input clock to the 1st stage of the divider is stopped; output from the 1st to 6th stages is also stopped. (4) idle2 mode in this mode, the internal oscillation circuit remain active. the cpu and the watchdog timer are halted; however, on-chip peripherals remain activ e (operate using the high-frequency clock and/or the low-frequency clock). starting and releasing of idle2 mode are the same as for idle1 mode, except that operation re turns to normal2 mode. (5) sleep1 mode in this mode, the internal oscillation circuit of the low-frequency clock remains active. the cpu, the watchdog timer, and the internal oscillation circuit of the high-frequency clock are halted; how- ever, on-chip peripherals remain active (operate us ing the low-frequency clock). starting and releas- ing of sleep mode are the same as for idle1 mo de, except that operation returns to slow1 mode. in slow1 and sleep1 modes, the input clock to the 1st stage of the divider is stopped; output from the 1st to 6th stages is also stopped. (6) sleep2 mode the sleep2 mode is the idle mode corresponding to the slow2 mode. the status under the sleep2 mode is same as that under the sleep1 mo de, except for the oscilla tion circuit of the high- frequency clock. (7) sleep0 mode in this mode, all the circuit, except oscillator and the timer-base-timer, stops operation. this mode is enabled by setting ?1? on bit syscr2. when sleep0 mode starts, the cp u stops and the timing generator stops feeding the clock to the peripheral circuits other than tbt. then, upon de tecting the falling edge of the source clock selected with tbtcr, the timing generator starts feeding the clock to al l peripheral circuits. when returned from sleep0 mode, the cpu restarts operating, entering slow1 mode back again. sleep0 mode is entered and returned re gardless of how tbtcr is set. when imf = ?1?, ef6 (tbt interrupt individual enable flag ) = ?1?, and tbtcr = ?1?, interrupt pro- cessing is performed. when sleep0 mode is entered while tbtcr = ?1?, the inttbt interrupt latch is set after returning to slow1 mode. 2.2.3.3 stop mode in this mode, the internal oscillation circuit is turned off, causing all system operations to be halted. the internal status immediately prior to the halt is held with a lowest power consumption during stop mode. stop mode is started by the syst em control register 1 (syscr1), an d stop mode is released by a inputting (either level-sensitive or edge-sens itive can be programmably selected) to the stop pin. after the warm-up period is completed, the execution resumes with the instruction which follows the stop mode start instruction.
page 16 2. operational description 2.2 system clock controller TMP86FS23UG note 1: normal1 and normal2 modes are generically called no rmal; slow1 and slow2 are called slow; idle0, idle1 and idle2 are called idle; sleep0, sleep1 and sleep2 are called sleep. note 2: the mode is released by fa lling edge of tbtcr setting. figure 2-6 operating mode transition diagram table 2-1 operating mode and conditions operating mode oscillator cpu core tbt other peripherals machine cycle time high frequency low frequency single clock reset oscillation stop reset reset reset 4/fc [s] normal1 operate operate operate idle1 halt idle0 halt stop stop halt ? dual clock normal2 oscillation oscillation operate with high frequency operate operate 4/fc [s] idle2 halt slow2 operate with low frequency 4/fs [s] sleep2 halt slow1 stop operate with low frequency sleep1 halt sleep0 halt stop stop halt ? note 2 syscr2 = "1" stop pin input stop pin input stop pin input interrupt interrupt syscr2 = "0" syscr2 = "1" syscr2 = "0" syscr2 = "0" syscr1 = "1" syscr1 = "1" syscr1 = "1" syscr2 = "1" syscr2 = "1" interrupt syscr2 = "1" syscr2 = "1" interrupt syscr2 = "1" reset release normal1 mode idle0 mode (a) single-clock mode idle1 mode normal2 mode idle2 mode syscr2 = "1" slow2 mode sleep2 mode slow1 mode sleep1 mode sleep0 mode reset (b) dual-clock mode stop syscr2 = "1" note 2
page 17 TMP86FS23UG note 1: always set retm to ?0? when transiting from normal mode to stop mode. always set retm to ?1? when transiting from slow mode to stop mode. note 2: when stop mode is released with reset pin input, a return is made to normal1 regardless of the retm contents. note 3: fc: high-frequency clock [hz], fs : low-frequency clock [hz], *; don?t care note 4: bits 1 and 0 in syscr1 are read as undefined data when a read instruction is executed. note 5: as the hardware becomes stop mode under outen = ?0?, input value is fixed to ?0?; therefore it may cause external interrupt request on account of falling edge. note 6: when the key-on wakeup is used, relm should be set to "1". note 7: port p20 is used as stop pin. therefore, when stop mode is started, outen does not affect to p20, and p20 becomes high-z mode. note 8: the warmig-up time should be set correctly for using oscillator. note 1: a reset is applied if both xen and xten are cleared to ?0?, xen is cleared to ?0? when sysck = ?0?, or xten is cleared to ?0? when sysck = ?1?. note 2: *: don?t care, tg: timing generator, *; don?t care note 3: bits 3, 1 and 0 in syscr2 are always read as undefined value. note 4: do not set idle and tghalt to ?1? simultaneously. note 5: because returning from idle0/sleep0 to normal1/slow 1 is executed by the asynchronous internal clock, the period of idle0/sleep0 mode might be shorter than the period setting by tbtcr. note 6: when idle1/2 or sleep1/2 mode is rel eased, idle is automatically cleared to ?0?. note 7: when idle0 or sleep0 mode is released, tghalt is automatically cleared to ?0?. note 8: before setting tghalt to ?1?, be sure to stop peripheral s. if peripherals are not stopped, the interrupt latch of periph erals may be set after idle0 or sleep0 mode is released. system control register 1 syscr176543210 (0038h) stop relm retm outen wut (initial value: 0000 00**) stop stop mode start 0: cpu core and peripherals remain active 1: cpu core and peripherals are halted (start stop mode) r/w relm release method for stop mode 0: edge-sensitive release 1: level-sensitive release r/w retm operating mode after stop mode 0: return to normal1/2 mode 1: return to slow1 mode r/w outen port output during stop mode 0: high impedance 1: output kept r/w wut warm-up time at releasing stop mode return to normal mode return to slow mode r/w 00 01 10 11 3 x 2 16 /fc 2 16 /fc 3 x 2 14 /fc 2 14 /fc 3 x 2 13 /fs 2 13 /fs 3 x 2 6 /fs 2 6 /fs system control register 2 syscr2 (0039h) 76543210 xen xten sysck idle tghalt (initial value: 1000 *0**) xen high-frequency oscillator control 0: turn off oscillation 1: turn on oscillation r/w xten low-frequency oscillator control 0: turn off oscillation 1: turn on oscillation sysck main system clock select (write)/main system clock moni- tor (read) 0: high-frequency clock (normal1/normal2/idle1/idle2) 1: low-frequency clock (slow1/slow2/sleep1/sleep2) idle cpu and watchdog timer control (idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes) 0: cpu and watchdog timer remain active 1: cpu and watchdog timer are stopped (start idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes) r/w tghalt tg control (idle0 and sleep0 modes) 0: feeding clock to all peripherals from tg 1: stop feeding clock to peripherals except tbt from tg. (start idle0 and sleep0 modes)
page 18 2. operational description 2.2 system clock controller TMP86FS23UG 2.2.4 operating mode control 2.2.4.1 stop mode stop mode is controlled by the system control register 1, the stop pin input and key-on wakeup input (stop5 to stop2) which is controlled by the stop mode release control register (stopcr). the stop pin is also used both as a port p20 and an int5 (external interrupt input 5) pin. stop mode is started by setting syscr1 to ?1?. during stop mode, the following status is maintained. 1. oscillations are turned off, and all internal operations are halted. 2. the data memory, registers, the program status wo rd and port output latches are all held in the status in effect before stop mode was entered. 3. the prescaler and the divider of th e timing generator are cleared to ?0?. 4. the program counter holds the address 2 ahead of th e instruction (e.g., [set (syscr1).7]) which started stop mode. stop mode includes a level-sensitive mode and an edge-sensitive mode, either of which can be selected with the syscr1. do not use any key-on wakeup input (stop5 to stop2) for releas- ing stop mode in edge-sensitive mode. note 1: the stop mode can be released by either th e stop or key-on wakeup pin (stop5 to stop2). however, because the stop pin is different from the key-on wakeup and can not inhibit the release input, the stop pin must be used for releasing stop mode. note 2: during stop period (from start of stop mode to end of warm up), due to changes in the external interrupt pin signal, interrupt latches may be set to ?1? and interrupts may be accepted immediately after stop mode is released. before starting stop mode, therefore, disable interrupts. also, before enabling interrupts after stop mode is rel eased, clear unnecessary interrupt latches. (1) level-sensitive release mode (relm = ?1?) in this mode, stop mode is released by setting the stop pin high or setting the stop5 to stop2 pin input which is enabled by stopcr. this mo de is used for capacitor backup when the main power supply is cut off and long term battery backup. even if an instruction for starting stop mode is executed while stop pin input is high or stop5 to stop2 input is low, stop mode does not start but instead the warm-up sequence starts immedi- ately. thus, to start stop mode in the level-sensitive release mode, it is necessary for the program to first confirm that the stop pin input is low or stop5 to stop2 input is high. the following two methods can be used for confirmation. 1. testing a port. 2. using an external interrupt input int5 ( int5 is a falling edge-sensitive input). example 1 :starting stop mode from normal mode by testing a port p20. ld (syscr1), 01010000b ; sets up the level-sensitive release mode sstoph: test (p2prd). 0 ; wait until the stop pin input goes low level jrs f, sstoph di ; imf 0 set (syscr1). 7 ; starts stop mode
page 19 TMP86FS23UG figure 2-7 level-s ensitive release mode note 1: even if the stop pin input is low after warm-up start, the stop mode is not restarted. note 2: in this case of changing to the level-s ensitive mode from the edge-s ensitive mode, the release mode is not switched until a rising edge of the stop pin input is detected. (2) edge-sensitive release mode (relm = ?0?) in this mode, stop mode is released by a rising edge of the stop pin input. this is used in appli- cations where a relatively short pr ogram is executed repeat edly at periodic intervals. this periodic signal (for example, a clock from a low-power consumption oscillator) is input to the stop pin. in the edge-sensitive release mode, stop mode is started even when the stop pin input is high level. do not use any stop5 to stop2 pin input for releasing stop mode in edge-sensitive release mode. figure 2-8 edge-sensitive release mode example 2 :starting stop mode from normal mode with an int5 interrupt. pint5: test (p2prd). 0 ; to reject noise, stop mode does not start if jrs f, sint5 port p20 is at high ld (syscr1), 01010000b ; sets up the level-sensitive release mode. di ; imf 0 set (syscr1). 7 ; starts stop mode sint5: reti example :starting stop mode from normal mode di ; imf 0 ld (syscr1), 10010000b ; starts after specified to the edge-sensitive release mode v ih normal operation warm up stop operation confirm by program that the stop pin input is low and start stop mode. always released if the stop pin input is high. stop pin xout pin stop mode is released by the hardware. normal operation normal operation normal operation v ih stop mode is released by the hardware at the rising edge of stop pin input. warm up stop mode started by the program. stop operation stop operation stop pin xout pin
page 20 2. operational description 2.2 system clock controller TMP86FS23UG stop mode is released by the following sequence. 1. in the dual-clock mode, when returning to normal2, both the high-frequency and low- frequency clock oscillators are turned on; when returning to slow1 mode, only the low- frequency clock oscillator is turned on. in the single-clock mode, only the high-frequency clock oscillator is turned on. 2. a warm-up period is inserted to allow oscillation time to stabilize. during warm up, all internal operations remain halted. four differ ent warm-up times can be selected with the syscr1 in accordance with the resonator characteristics. 3. when the warm-up time has elapsed, normal operation resumes with the instruction follow- ing the stop mode start instruction. note 1: when the stop mode is released, the start is made after the prescaler and the divider of the timing generator are cleared to "0". note 2: stop mode can also be released by inputting low level on the reset pin, which immediately performs the normal reset operation. note 3: when stop mode is released with a low hold voltage, the following cautions must be observed. the power supply voltage must be at the operating voltage level before releasing stop mode. the reset pin input must also be ?h? level, rising together with the power supply voltage. in this case, if an external time const ant circuit has been connected, the reset pin input voltage will increase at a slower pace than the power supply vo ltage. at this time, there is a danger that a reset may occur if input voltage level of the reset pin drops below the non-inverting high-level input voltage (hysteresis input). note 1: the warm-up time is obtained by dividing the ba sic clock by the divider. therefore, the warm-up time may include a certain amount of error if ther e is any fluctuation of the oscillation frequency when stop mode is released. thus, the warm -up time must be considered as an approximate value. table 2-2 warm-up time example (at fc = 16.0 mhz, fs = 32.768 khz) wut warm-up time [ms] return to normal mode return to slow mode 00 01 10 11 12.288 4.096 3.072 1.024 750 250 5.85 1.95
page 21 TMP86FS23UG figure 2-9 stop mode start/release instruction address a + 4 0 instruction address a + 3 turn on turn on warm up 0 n halt set (syscr1). 7 turn off (a) stop mode start (example: start with set (syscr1). 7 instruction located at address a) a + 6 a + 5 a + 4 a + 3 a + 2 n + 2 n + 3 n + 4 a + 3 n + 1 instruction address a + 2 2 1 0 3 (b) stop mode release count up turn off halt oscillator circuit program counter instruction execution divider main system clock oscillator circuit stop pin input program counter instruction execution divider main system clock
page 22 2. operational description 2.2 system clock controller TMP86FS23UG 2.2.4.2 idle1/2 mode and sleep1/2 mode idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes are controlled by the system control register 2 (syscr2) and maskable interrupts. the following status is maintained during these modes. 1. operation of the cpu and watchdog timer (wdt) is halted. on-chip peripherals continue to operate. 2. the data memory, cpu registers, program status word and port output latches are all held in the status in effect before these modes were entered. 3. the program counter holds the address 2 ahead of th e instruction which starts these modes. figure 2-10 idle1/ 2 and sleep1/2 modes reset reset input ?0? ?1? (interrupt release mode) yes no no cpu and wdt are halted interrupt request imf interrupt processing normal release mode yes starting idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes by instruction execution of the instruc- tion which follows the idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes start instruction
page 23 TMP86FS23UG ? start the idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes after imf is set to "0", set the individual inte rrupt enable flag (ef) which releases idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes. to start idle1/2 and sl eep1/2 modes, set syscr2 to ?1?. ? release the idle1 /2 and sleep1/2 modes idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes include a normal release mode and an interrupt release mode. these modes are selected by interrupt master en able flag (imf). after releasing idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes, the syscr2 is automa tically cleared to ?0? and the operation mode is returned to the mode preced ing idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes. idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes can also be released by inputting low level on the reset pin. after releasing reset, the operation mode is started from normal1 mode. (1) normal release mode (imf = ?0?) idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes are released by any interrupt source enabled by the individual interrupt enable flag (ef). after the interrupt is ge nerated, the program operation is resumed from the instruction following the idle1/2 and sleep1/2 mo des start instruction. normally, the interrupt latches (il) of the interrupt source used for releas ing must be cleared to ?0? by load instructions. (2) interrupt release mode (imf = ?1?) idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes are released by any interrupt source enabled with the individual interrupt enable flag (ef) and the interrupt processi ng is started. after the interrupt is processed, the program operation is resumed from the instruction following the instruction, which starts idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes. note: when a watchdog timer interrupts is generated immediately before idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes are started, the watchdog timer interrupt will be processed but idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes will not be started.
page 24 2. operational description 2.2 system clock controller TMP86FS23UG figure 2-11 idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes start/release halt halt halt halt operate instruction address a + 2 a + 3 a + 2 a + 4 a + 3 a + 3 halt set (syscr2). 4 operate operate operate acceptance of interrupt ?r:w normal release mode ?s:w interrupt release mode main system clock interrupt request program counter instruction execution watchdog timer main system clock interrupt request program counter instruction execution watchdog timer main system clock interrupt request program counter instruction execution watchdog timer (a) idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes start (example: star ting with the set instruction located at address a) (b) idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes release
page 25 TMP86FS23UG 2.2.4.3 idle0 and sleep0 modes (idle0, sleep0) idle0 and sleep0 modes are controlled by the system control register 2 (syscr2) and the time base timer control register (tbtcr). the following stat us is maintained during idle0 and sleep0 modes. 1. timing generator stops feeding clock to peripherals except tbt. 2. the data memory, cpu registers, program status word and port output latches are all held in the status in effect before idle0 and sleep0 modes were entered. 3. the program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instru ction which starts idle0 and sleep0 modes. note: before starting idle0 or sleep0 mode, be sure to stop (disable) peripherals. figure 2-12 idle 0 and sleep0 modes yes (normal release mode) yes (interrupt release mode) no yes reset input cpu and wdt are halted reset tbt source clock falling edge tbtcr = "1" interrupt processing imf = "1" yes tbt interrupt enable no no no no stopping peripherals by instruction yes starting idle0, sleep0 modes by instruction execution of the instruction which follows the idle0, sleep0 modes start instruction
page 26 2. operational description 2.2 system clock controller TMP86FS23UG ? start the idle0 and sleep0 modes stop (disable) peripherals such as a timer counter. to start idle0 and sleep0 modes, set syscr2 to ?1?. ? release the idle0 and sleep0 modes idle0 and sleep0 modes include a normal re lease mode and an interrupt release mode. these modes are selected by inte rrupt master flag (imf), the i ndividual interrupt enable flag of tbt and tbtcr. after releasing idle0 and sleep0 modes, the syscr2 is automatically cleared to ?0? and the operatio n mode is returned to the mode preceding idle0 and sleep0 modes. before starting the idle0 or sleep0 mode, when the tbtcr is set to ?1?, inttbt interrupt latch is set to ?1?. idle0 and sleep0 modes can also be re leased by inputting low level on the reset pin. after releasing reset, the operation mode is started from normal1 mode. note: idle0 and sleep0 modes start/release wi thout reference to tbtcr setting. (1) normal release mode (imf ? ef6 ? tbtcr = ?0?) idle0 and sleep0 modes are released by the source clock falling edge, which is setting by the tbtcr. after the falling edge is detect ed, the program operation is resumed from the instruction following the idle0 and sleep0 modes start instruction. before starting the idle0 or sleep0 mode, when the tbtcr is set to ?1?, inttbt interrupt latch is set to ?1?. (2) interrupt release mode (imf ? ef6 ? tbtcr = ?1?) idle0 and sleep0 modes are released by the source clock falling edge, which is setting by the tbtcr and inttbt interrupt processing is started. note 1: because returning from idle0, sleep0 to normal1, slow1 is executed by the asynchro- nous internal clock, the period of idle0, sleep0 mode might be the shorter than the period set- ting by tbtcr. note 2: when a watchdog timer interrupt is generat ed immediately before idle0/sleep0 mode is started, the watchdog timer interrupt will be processed but idle0/sleep0 mode will not be started.
page 27 TMP86FS23UG figure 2-13 idle0 and slee p0 modes start/release halt halt operate instruction address a + 2 halt operate set (syscr2). 2 halt operate acceptance of interrupt halt ?r:w normal release mode ?s:w interrupt release mode main system clock interrupt request program counter instruction execution watchdog timer main system clock tbt clock tbt clock program counter instruction execution watchdog timer main system clock program counter instruction execution watchdog timer a + 3 a + 2 a + 4 a + 3 a + 3 (a) idle0 and sleep0 modes start (example: starting with the set instruction located at address a (b) idle and sleep0 modes release
page 28 2. operational description 2.2 system clock controller TMP86FS23UG 2.2.4.4 slow mode slow mode is controlled by the sy stem control register 2 (syscr2). the following is the methods to switch the mode with the warm-up counter. (1) switching from normal2 mode to slow1 mode first, set syscr2 to switch the main system clock to the low-frequency clock for slow2 mode. next, clear syscr2 to turn off high-frequency oscillation. note: the high-frequency clock can be co ntinued oscillation in order to return to normal2 mode from slow mode quickly. always turn off oscillat ion of high-frequency clock when switching from slow mode to stop mode. example 1 :switching from normal2 mode to slow1 mode. set (syscr2). 5 ; syscr2 1 (switches the main system clock to the low-frequency clock for slow2) clr (syscr2). 7 ; syscr2 0 (turns off high-frequency oscillation) example 2 :switching to the slow1 mode after low-frequency clock has stabilized. set (syscr2). 6 ; syscr2 1 ld (tc3cr), 43h ; sets mode for tc4, 3 (16-bit mode, fs for source) ld (tc4cr), 05h ; sets warming-up counter mode ldw (ttreg3), 8000h ; sets warm-up time (depend on oscillator accompanied) di ; imf 0 set (eirh). 4 ; enables inttc4 ei ; imf 1 set (tc4cr). 3 ; starts tc4, 3 : pinttc4: clr (tc4cr). 3 ; stops tc4, 3 set (syscr2). 5 ; syscr2 1 (switches the main system cl ock to the low-frequency clock) clr (syscr2). 7 ; syscr2 0 (turns off high-frequency oscillation) reti : vinttc4: dw pinttc4 ; inttc4 vector table
page 29 TMP86FS23UG (2) switching from slow1 mode to normal2 mode note: after sysck is cleared to ?0?, executing the in structions is continiued by the low-frequency clock for the period synchronized with low-frequency and high-frequency clocks. first, set syscr2 to turn on the high-fre quency oscillation. when time for stabilization (warm up) has been taken by the timer/counter (tc4,tc3), clear syscr2 to switch the main system clock to the high-frequency clock. slow mode can also be released by inputting low level on the reset pin. after releasing reset, the operation mode is started from normal1 mode. example :switching from the slow1 mode to the normal2 mode (fc = 16 mhz, warm-up time is 4.0 ms). set (syscr2). 7 ; syscr2 1 (starts high-frequency oscillation) ld (tc3cr), 63h ; sets mode for tc4, 3 (16-bit mode, fc for source) ld (tc4cr), 05h ; sets warming-up counter mode ld (ttreg4), 0f8h ; sets warm-up time di ; imf 0 set (eirh). 4 ; enables inttc4 ei ; imf 1 set (tc4cr). 3 ; starts tc4, 3 : pinttc4: clr (tc4cr). 3 ; stops tc4, 3 clr (syscr2). 5 ; syscr2 0 (switches the main system clock to the high-frequency clock) reti : vinttc4: dw pinttc4 ; inttc4 vector table high-frequency clock low-frequency clock main system clock sysck
page 30 2. operational description 2.2 system clock controller TMP86FS23UG figure 2-14 switching between the normal2 and slow modes set (syscr2). 7 normal2 mode clr (syscr2). 7 set (syscr2). 5 normal2 mode turn off (a) switching to the slow mode slow1 mode slow2 mode clr (syscr2). 5 (b) switching to the normal2 mode high- frequency clock low- frequency clock main system clock instruction execution sysck xen high- frequency clock low- frequency clock main system clock instruction execution sysck xen slow1 mode warm up during slow2 mode
page 31 TMP86FS23UG 2.3 reset circuit the TMP86FS23UG has four types of rese t generation procedures: an external re set input, an address trap reset, a watchdog timer reset and a system clock re set. of these reset, the address trap reset, the watchdog timer and the sys- tem clock reset are a malfunction reset. when the malfunction reset request is detected, reset occurs during the max- imum 24/fc[s]. the malfunction reset circuit such as watchdog timer reset, address trap reset and system clock reset is not initial- ized when power is turned on. therefore, reset may occur during maximum 24/fc[s] (1.5 s at 16.0 mhz) when power is turned on. table 2-3 shows on-chip hardware initialization by reset action. 2.3.1 external reset input the reset pin contains a schmitt trigger (hysteresis) with an internal pull-up resistor. when the reset pin is held at ?l? level for at least 3 machin e cycles (12/fc [s]) wi th the power supply volt- age within the operating voltage range and oscillation stab le, a reset is applied and the internal state is initial- ized. when the reset pin input goes high, the reset operation is rele ased and the program execution starts at the vector address stored at addresses fffeh to ffffh. figure 2-15 reset circuit table 2-3 initializing internal status by reset action on-chip hardware initial value on-chip hardware initial value program counter (pc) (fffeh) prescaler and divider of timing generator 0 stack pointer (sp) not initialized general-purpose registers (w, a, b, c, d, e, h, l, ix, iy) not initialized jump status flag (jf) not initialized watchdog timer enable zero flag (zf) not initialized output latches of i/o ports refer to i/o port circuitry carry flag (cf) not initialized half carry flag (hf) not initialized sign flag (sf) not initialized overflow flag (vf) not initialized interrupt master enable flag (imf) 0 interrupt individual enable flags (ef) 0 control registers refer to each of control register interrupt latches (il) 0 lcd data buffer not initialized ram not initialized internal reset reset vdd malfunction reset output circuit watchdog timer reset address trap reset system clock reset
page 32 2. operational description 2.3 reset circuit TMP86FS23UG 2.3.2 address trap reset if the cpu should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip ram (when wdtcr1 is set to ?1 ?), dbr or the sfr area, ad dress trap reset will be generated. the reset time is maximum 24/fc[s] (1.5 s at 16.0 mhz). note:the operating mode under address tr apped is alternative of reset or interrupt. the address trap area is alter- native. note 1: address ?a? is in the sfr, dbr or on-chip ram (wdtcr1 = ?1?) space. note 2: during reset release, reset vector ?r? is read out, and an instruction at address ?r? is fetched and decoded. figure 2-16 addr ess trap reset 2.3.3 watchdog timer reset refer to section ?watchdog timer?. 2.3.4 system clock reset if the condition as follows is detected, the system clock reset occurs automatically to prevent dead lock of the cpu. (the oscillation is continued without stopping.) - in case of clearing syscr2 an d syscr2 simultaneously to ? 0 ? . - in case of clearing syscr2 to ? 0 ? , when the syscr2 is ? 0 ? . - in case of clearing syscr2 to ? 0 ? , when the syscr2 is ? 1 ? . the reset time is maximum 24/fc (1.5 s at 16.0 mhz). instruction at address r 16/fc [s] maximum 24/fc [s] instruction execution internal reset jp a reset release address trap is occurred 4/fc to 12/fc [s]
page 33 TMP86FS23UG
page 34 2. operational description 2.3 reset circuit TMP86FS23UG
page 35 TMP86FS23UG 3. interrupt control circuit the TMP86FS23UG has a total of 20 interrupt sources excludi ng reset. interrupts can be nested with priorities. four of the internal interrupt sources ar e non-maskable while the rest are maskable. interrupt sources are provided with interrupt latches (il) , which hold interrupt requests, and independent vectors. the interrupt latch is set to ?1? by th e generation of its interrupt request wh ich requests the cpu to accept its inter- rupts. interrupts are enabled or disabled by software using the interrupt master enable fl ag (imf) and in terrupt enable flag (ef). if more than one interrupts are generated simultaneously, interrup ts are accepted in order which is domi- nated by hardware. however, there are no prioritized interrupt factors among non-maskable interrupts. note 1: to use the address trap interrupt (intatrap), clear wdtcr1 to ?0? (it is set for the ?reset request? after reset is cancelled). for details , see ?address trap?. note 2: to use the watchdog timer interrupt (intwdt), clear wdtcr1 to "0" (it is set for the "reset request" after reset is released). for details, see "watchdog timer". note 3: if an intadc interrupt request is generated while an interrupt with priority lower than the interrupt latch il15 (intadc ) is being accepted, the intadc interrupt latch may be cleared wi thout the intadc interrupt being processed. for details, refer to the corresponding notes in the chapter on the ad converter. 3.1 interrupt latches (il19 to il2) an interrupt latch is provided for eac h interrupt source, except for a software interrupt and an executed the unde- fined instruction interrupt. when interrupt request is genera ted, the latch is set to ?1?, and the cpu is requested to accept the interrupt if its interrupt is enabled. the interrupt latch is cleared to "0" immediately after accepting inter- rupt. all interrupt latches are initialized to ?0? during reset. interrupt factors enable condition interrupt latch vector address priority internal/external (reset) non-maskable ? fffe 1 internal intswi (software interrupt) non-maskable ? fffc 2 internal intundef (executed the undefined instruction interrupt) non-maskable ? fffc 2 internal intatrap (address trap interrupt) non-maskable il2 fffa 2 internal intwdt (watchdog timer interrupt) non-maskable il3 fff8 2 external int0 imf? ef4 = 1, int0en = 1 il4 fff6 5 external int1 imf? ef5 = 1 il5 fff4 6 internal inttbt imf? ef6 = 1 il6 fff2 7 internal inttc1 imf? ef7 = 1 il7 fff0 8 internal intsio imf? ef8 = 1 il8 ffee 9 external int2 imf? ef9 = 1 il9 ffec 10 internal intrxd imf? ef10 = 1 il10 ffea 11 internal inttxd imf? ef11 = 1 il11 ffe8 12 internal inttc4 imf? ef12 = 1 il12 ffe6 13 internal inttc6 imf? ef13 = 1 il13 ffe4 14 internal intrtc imf? ef14 = 1 il14 ffe2 15 internal intadc imf? ef15 = 1 il15 ffe0 16 internal inttc3 imf? ef16 = 1 il16 ffbe 17 external int3 imf? ef17 = 1 il17 ffbc 18 internal inttc5 imf? ef18 = 1 il18 ffba 19 external int5 imf? ef19 = 1 il19 ffb8 20 - reserved imf? ef20 = 1 il20 ffb6 21 - reserved imf? ef21 = 1 il21 ffb4 22 - reserved imf? ef22 = 1 il22 ffb2 23 - reserved imf? ef23 = 1 il23 ffb0 24
page 36 3. interrupt control circuit 3.2 interrupt enable register (eir) TMP86FS23UG the interrupt latches are located on address 002eh, 003ch and 003dh in sfr area. each latch can be cleared to "0" individually by instruction. however, il2 and il3 sh ould not be cleared to "0" by software. for clearing the interrupt latch, load instruction should be used and then il2 and il3 should be set to "1". if the read-modify-write instructions such as bit manipulation or operation instru ctions are used, interrupt re quest would be cleared inade- quately if interrupt is requested while such instructions are executed. interrupt latches are not set to ?1? by an instruction. since interrupt latches can be read, the status fo r interrupt requests can be monitored by software. note: in main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (ef) or the interrupt latch (il), be sure to clear imf to "0" (disable interrupt by di instruction). then set imf new ly again as required after operating on the ef or il (enable interrupt by ei instruction) in interrupt service routine, because the imf becomes "0 " automatically, clearing imf need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. however, if using multiple inte rrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating ef or il should be executed before setting imf="1". 3.2 interrupt enab le register (eir) the interrupt enable register (eir) enables and disables the acceptance of interrupts, except fo r the non-maskable interrupts (software interrupt, undefined instruction interr upt, address trap interrupt and watchdog interrupt). non- maskable interrupt is accepted regardless of the contents of the eir. the eir consists of an interrupt mast er enable flag (imf) and the individua l interrupt enable flags (ef). these registers are located on address 002ch, 003ah and 003bh in sfr area, and they can be read and written by an instructions (including read-modify-write instructions such as bit manipulation or operation instructions). 3.2.1 interrupt ma ster enable flag (imf) the interrupt enable register (imf ) enables and disables the acceptance of the whole maskable interrupt. while imf = ?0?, all maskable interrupts are not accepted regardless of the status on each individual interrupt enable flag (ef). by setting imf to ?1?, the interrupt becomes acceptable if the individuals are enabled. when an interrupt is accepted, imf is cleared to ?0? after the latest status on imf is stacked. thus the maskable inter- rupts which follow are disabled. by executing return interrupt instruction [reti/retn], the stacked data, which was the status before interrup t acceptance, is loaded on imf again. the imf is located on bit0 in eirl (address: 003ah in sfr), and can be read and written by an instruction. the imf is normally set and cl eared by [ei] and [di] instruction respectively. during reset, the imf is initial- ized to ?0?. example 1 :clears interrupt latches di ; imf 0 ldw (ill), 111010000011 1111b ; il12, il10 to il6 0 ei ; imf 1 example 2 :reads interrupt latchess ld wa, (ill) ; w ilh, a ill example 3 :tests interrupt latches test (ill). 7 ; if il7 = 1 then jump jr f, sset
page 37 TMP86FS23UG 3.2.2 individual interrupt enable flags (ef19 to ef4) each of these flags enables and disables the acceptan ce of its maskable interrupt . setting the corresponding bit of an individual interrupt enable flag to ?1? enables acceptan ce of its interrupt, and setting the bit to ?0? dis- ables acceptance. during reset, all the i ndividual interrupt enable flags (ef19 to ef4) ar e initialized to ?0? and all maskable interrupts are not accepted until they are set to ?1?. note:in main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (ef) or the interrupt latch (il), be sure to clear imf to "0" (disable interrupt by di instruction). then set imf newly again as required after operating on the ef or il (enable interrupt by ei instruction) in interrupt service routine, because the imf become s "0" automatically, clearing imf need not execute nor- mally on interrupt service routine. however, if using mult iple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulat- ing ef or il should be executed before setting imf="1". example 1 :enables interrupts individually and sets imf di ; imf 0 ldw : (eirl), 1110100010100000b ; ef15 to ef13, ef11, ef7, ef5 1 note: imf should not be set. : ei ; imf 1 example 2 :c compiler description example unsigned int _io (3ah) eirl; /* 3ah shows eirl address */ _di(); eirl = 10100000b; : _ei();
page 38 3. interrupt control circuit 3.2 interrupt enable register (eir) TMP86FS23UG note 1: to clear any one of bits il7 to il4, be sure to write "1" into il2 and il3. note 2: in main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable fl ag (ef) or the interrupt latch (il), be sure to clear imf to "0" (disable interrupt by di instruction). then set imf newly again as required after operating on the ef or il (enable interrupt by ei instruction) in interrupt service routine, because the imf becomes "0" automatically, clear ing imf need not execute normally on inter- rupt service routine. however, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, mani pulating ef or il should be exe- cuted before setting imf="1". note 3: do not clear il with read-modify-w rite instructions such as bit operations. note 1: *: don?t care note 2: do not set imf and the interrupt enable flag (ef15 to ef4) to ?1? at the same time. note 3: in main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable fl ag (ef) or the interrupt latch (il), be sure to clear imf to "0" (disable interrupt by di instruction). then set imf newly again as required after operating on the ef or il (enable interrupt by ei instruction) in interrupt service routine, because the imf becomes "0" automatically, clear ing imf need not execute normally on inter- rupt service routine. however, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, mani pulating ef or il should be exe- cuted before setting imf="1". interrupt latches (initial value: 00000000 000000**) ilh,ill (003dh, 003ch) 1514131211109876543210 il15 il14 il13 il12 il11 il10 il9 il8 il7 il6 il5 il4 il3 il2 ilh (003dh) ill (003ch) (initial value: ****0000) ile (002eh) 76543210 ???? il19 il18 il17 il16 ile (002eh) il19 to il2 interrupt latches at rd 0: no interrupt request 1: interrupt request at wr 0: clears the interrupt request 1: (interrupt latch is not set.) r/w interrupt enable registers (initial value: 00000000 0000***0) eirh,eirl (003bh, 003ah) 1514131211109876543210 ef15 ef14 ef13 ef12 ef11 ef10 ef9 ef8 ef7 ef6 ef5 ef4 imf eirh (003bh) eirl (003ah) (initial value: ****0000) eire (002ch) 76543210 ???? ef19 ef18 ef17 ef16 eire (002ch) ef19 to ef4 individual-interrupt enable flag (specified for each bit) 0: 1: disables the acceptance of each maskable interrupt. enables the acceptance of each maskable interrupt. r/w imf interrupt master enable flag 0: 1: disables the acceptance of all maskable interrupts enables the acceptance of all maskable interrupts
page 39 TMP86FS23UG 3.3 interrupt sequence an interrupt request, which raised inte rrupt latch, is held, until interrupt is accepted or interrupt latch is cleared to ?0? by resetting or an instruct ion. interrupt acceptance sequence requires 8 machine cycles (2 s @16 mhz) after the completion of the current instruction. the interrupt service task terminates upon execution of an interrupt return instruction [reti] (for maskable interrupts) or [retn] (for non-maskable interrupts). figure 3-1 shows the timing chart of interrupt acceptance processing. 3.3.1 interrupt acceptance proc essing is packaged as follows. a. the interrupt master enab le flag (imf) is cleared to ?0? in or der to disable the acceptance of any fol- lowing interrupt. b. the interrupt latch (il) for the interrupt source accepted is cleared to ?0?. c. the contents of the program coun ter (pc) and the program status word, including the interrupt master enable flag (imf), are saved (pushed) on the st ack in sequence of psw + imf, pch, pcl. mean- while, the stack pointer (s p) is decremented by 3. d. the entry address (interrupt vect or) of the corresponding interrupt service program, loaded on the vec- tor table, is transferred to the program counter. e. the instruction stored at the entry address of the inte rrupt service program is executed. note:when the contents of psw are saved on the stack, the contents of imf are also saved. note 1: a: return address entry address, b: entry address, c: address which reti instruction is stored note 2: on condition that interrupt is enabled, it takes 38/fc [s ] or 38/fs [s] at maximum (if the interrupt latch is set at the first machine cycle on 10 cycle instruction) to start interrupt acceptance processing since its interrupt latch is set. figure 3-1 timing chart of interrupt acceptance/return in terrupt instruction example: correspondence be tween vector table address for inttbt an d the entry address of the interrupt service program figure 3-2 vector table address,entry address a b a c + 1 execute instruction sp pc execute instruction n n ? 2 n - 3 n ? 2n ? 1 n ? 1 n a + 2 a + 1 c + 2 b + 3 b + 2 b + 1 a + 1 a a ? 1 execute reti instruction interrupt acceptance execute instruction interrupt service task 1-machine cycle interrupt request interrupt latch (il) imf d2h 03h d203h d204h 06h vector table address entry address 0fh vector interrupt service program fff2h fff3h
page 40 3. interrupt control circuit 3.3 interrupt sequence TMP86FS23UG a maskable interrupt is not accepted until the imf is set to ?1? even if th e maskable interrupt higher than the level of current servicing interrupt is requested. in order to utilize nested interrupt service, the imf is set to ?1? in the interrupt service program. in this case, acceptable interrupt sources are selectively en abled by the individual interrupt enable flags. to avoid overloaded nesting, clear the individual interrupt enable flag whose interrupt is currently serviced, before setting imf to ?1?. as for non-maskable interr upt, keep interrupt service shorten compared with length between interrupt requests; otherwise the status cannot be recovered as non-maskable interrupt would simply nested. 3.3.2 saving/restoring general-purpose registers during interrupt acceptance processing , the program counter (pc) and the program status word (psw, includes imf) are automati cally saved on the stack, but the accumulato r and others are not. these registers are saved by software if necessary. when multiple interrupt se rvices are nested, it is also necessary to avoid using the same data memory area for saving registers. the fo llowing methods are used to save/restore the general- purpose registers. 3.3.2.1 using push and pop instructions if only a specific register is saved or interrupts of the same source are nested , general-purpose registers can be saved/restored using the push/pop instructions. figure 3-3 save/store register using push and pop instructions 3.3.2.2 using data transfer instructions to save only a specific register wi thout nested interrupts, data tran sfer instructions are available. example :save/store register us ing push and pop instructions pintxx: push wa ; save wa register (interrupt processing) pop wa ; restore wa register reti ; return pcl pch psw at acceptance of an interrupt at execution of push instruction at execution of reti instruction at execution of pop instruction b-4 b-3 b-2 b-1 b pcl pch psw pcl pch psw sp address (example) sp sp sp a w b-5
page 41 TMP86FS23UG figure 3-4 saving/restoring general-purpose r egisters under interrupt processing 3.3.3 interrupt return interrupt return instructions [reti]/[retn] perform as follows. as for address trap interrupt (intatrap), it is requir ed to alter stacked data for program counter (pc) to restarting address, during interrupt service program. note:if [retn] is executed with the above data unaltered, the program returns to the address trap area and intatrap occurs again.when interrupt acceptance pr ocessing has completed, stacked data for pcl and pch are located on address (sp + 1) and (sp + 2) respectively. example :save/store register us ing data transfer instructions pintxx: ld (gsava), a ; save a register (interrupt processing) ld a, (gsava) ; restore a register reti ; return [reti]/[retn] interrupt return 1. program counter (pc) and program status word (psw, includes imf) are restored from the stack. 2. stack pointer (sp) is incremented by 3. example 1 :returning from address trap interrupt (intatrap) service program pintxx: pop wa ; recover sp by 2 ld wa, return address ; push wa ; alter stacked data (interrupt processing) retn ; return interrupt acceptance interrupt service task restoring registers saving registers interrupt return saving/restoring general-purpose registers using push/pop data transfer instruction main task
page 42 3. interrupt control circuit 3.4 software interrupt (intsw) TMP86FS23UG interrupt requests are sampled during the final cycle of the instruction being executed. thus, the next inter- rupt can be accepted immediat ely after the interrupt retu rn instruction is executed. note 1: it is recommended that stack pointer be return to rate before intatrap (increment 3 times), if return inter- rupt instruction [retn] is not utilized during inte rrupt service program under intatrap (such as example 2). note 2: when the interrupt processing time is longer than the interrupt request generation time, the interrupt service task is performed but not the main task. 3.4 software interrupt (intsw) executing the swi instruction generates a software interr upt and immediately starts interrupt processing (intsw is highest prioritized interrupt). use the swi instruction only for detection of the address error or for debugging. 3.4.1 address error detection ffh is read if for some cause such as noise the cpu attempts to fetch an instruction from a non-existent memory address during single chip mode. code ffh is th e swi instruction, so a software interrupt is gener- ated and an address error is detect ed. the address error detection range can be further expanded by writing ffh to unused areas of the program memory. address trap reset is generated in case that an instruction is fetched from ram, dbr or sfr areas. 3.4.2 debugging debugging efficiency can be increased by placing the swi instruction at the software break point setting address. 3.5 undefined instruct ion interrupt (intundef) taking code which is not defined as authorized instru ction for instruction causes intundef. intundef is gen- erated when the cpu fetches such a co de and tries to execute it. intundef is accepted even if non-maskable inter- rupt is in process. contemporary process is broken and intundef interrupt process starts, soon after it is requested. note: the undefined instruction interrupt (intundef) forces cpu to jump into vector address, as software interrupt (swi) does. 3.6 address trap interrupt (intatrap) fetching instruction from unauthorized area for instructio ns (address trapped area) cause s reset output or address trap interrupt (intatrap). intatrap is accepted even if non-maskable interrupt is in process. contemporary pro- cess is broken and intatrap interrupt pro cess starts, soon afte r it is requested. note: the operating mode under address trapped, whether to be reset output or interrupt processing, is selected on watchdog timer control register (wdtcr). example 2 :restarting without returning interrupt (in this case, psw (includes imf) befo re interrupt acceptance is discarded.) pintxx: inc sp ; recover sp by 3 inc sp ; inc sp ; (interrupt processing) ld eirl, data ; set imf to ?1? or clear it to ?0? jp restart address ; jump into restarting address
page 43 TMP86FS23UG 3.7 external interrupts the TMP86FS23UG has 5 external interrupt inputs. these inputs are equipped with digital noise reject circuits (pulse inputs of less than a certa in time are elimin ated as noise). edge selection is also possible with int1 to int3. the int0 /p63 pin can be configured as either an external inter- rupt input pin or an input/output port, and is configured as an input port during reset. edge selection, noise reject control and int0 /p63 pin function selection are performed by the external interrupt control register (eintcr). note 1: in normal1/2 or idle1/2 mode, if a signal with no noise is input on an external interrupt pin, it takes a maximum of "si g- nal establishment time + 6/fs[s]" from the input signal's edge to set the interrupt latch. note 2: when int0en = "0", il4 is not set even if a falling edge is detected on the int0 pin input. note 3: when a pin with more than one function is used as an out put and a change occurs in data or input/output status, an inter - rupt request signal is generated in a pseudo manner. in this ca se, it is necessary to perform appropriate processing such as disabling the interrupt enable flag. source pin enable conditions release edge digital noise reject int0 int0 imf ? ef4 ? int0en=1 falling edge pulses of less than 2/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. pulses of 7/fc [s ] or more are considered to be signals. in the slow or the sleep mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are consid- ered to be signals. int1 int1 imf ? ef5 = 1 falling edge or rising edge pulses of less than 15/fc or 63/fc [s] are elimi- nated as noise. pulses of 49/fc or 193/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. in the slow or the sleep mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. int2 int2 imf ? ef9 = 1 falling edge or rising edge pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. pulses of 25/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. in the slow or the sleep mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are consid- ered to be signals. int3 int3 imf ? ef17 = 1 falling edge or rising edge pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. pulses of 25/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. in the slow or the sleep mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are consid- ered to be signals. int5 int5 imf ? ef19 = 1 falling edge pulses of less than 2/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. pulses of 7/fc [s ] or more are considered to be signals. in the slow or the sleep mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are consid- ered to be signals.
page 44 3. interrupt control circuit 3.7 external interrupts TMP86FS23UG note 1: fc: high-frequency clock [hz], *: don?t care note 2: when the system clock frequency is switched between high and low or when the external interrupt control register (eintcr) is overwritten, the noise canceller may not operat e normally. it is recommended that external interrupts are dis- abled using the interrupt enable register (eir). note 3: the maximum time from modifying int1 nc until a noise reject time is changed is 2 6 /fc. external interrupt control register eintcr76543210 (0037h) int1nc int0en - - int3es int2es int1es (initial value: 00** 000*) int1nc noise reject time select 0: pulses of less than 63/fc [s] are eliminated as noise 1: pulses of less than 15/fc [s] are eliminated as noise r/w int0en p63/ int0 pin configuration 0: p63 input/output port 1: int0 pin (port p63 should be set to an input mode) r/w int3 es int3 edge select 0: rising edge 1: falling edge r/w int2 es int2 edge select 0: rising edge 1: falling edge r/w int1 es int1 edge select 0: rising edge 1: falling edge r/w
page 45 TMP86FS23UG 4. special function register (sfr) the TMP86FS23UG adopts the memory mapped i/o system, and all peripheral control and data transfers are per- formed through the special function register (sfr) or the data buffer register (dbr). the sfr is mapped on address 0000h to 003fh, dbr is mapped on address 0f80h to 0fffh. this chapter shows the arrangement of the special functi on register (sfr) and data buffer register (dbr) for TMP86FS23UG. 4.1 sfr address read write 0000h reserved 0001h p1dr 0002h p2dr 0003h p3dr 0004h p3outcr 0005h p5dr 0006h p6dr 0007h p7dr 0008h p8dr 0009h p1cr 000ah p5cr 000bh p6cr1 000ch p6cr2 000dh p7cr 000eh adccr1 000fh adccr2 0010h treg1al 0011h treg1am 0012h treg1ah 0013h treg1b 0014h tc1cr1 tc1cr 0015h tc1cr2 0016h tc1sr - 0017h rtccr 0018h tc3cr 0019h tc4cr 001ah tc5cr 001bh tc6cr 001ch ttreg3 001dh ttreg4 001eh ttreg5 001fh ttreg6 0020h adcdr2 - 0021h adcdr1 - 0022h reserved 0023h reserved 0024h p8cr 0025h uartsr uartcr1
page 46 4. special function register (sfr) 4.1 sfr TMP86FS23UG note 1: do not access reserved areas by the program. note 2: ? ; cannot be accessed. note 3: write-only registers and interrupt latches cannot use the read-modify-write instructions (bit manipulation instructions such as set, clr, etc. and logical operation instructions such as and, or, etc.). 0026h - uartcr2 0027h lcdcr 0028h pwreg3 0029h pwreg4 002ah pwreg5 002bh pwreg6 002ch eire 002dh reserved 002eh ile 002fh reserved 0030h reserved 0031h reserved 0032h reserved 0033h reserved 0034h - wdtcr1 0035h - wdtcr2 0036h tbtcr 0037h eintcr 0038h syscr1 0039h syscr2 003ah eirl 003bh eirh 003ch ill 003dh ilh 003eh reserved 003fh psw address read write
page 47 TMP86FS23UG 4.2 dbr address read write 0f80h seg1/0 0f81h seg3/2 0f82h seg5/4 0f83h seg7/6 0f84h seg9/8 0f85h seg11/10 0f86h seg13/12 0f87h seg15/14 0f88h seg17/16 0f89h seg19/18 0f8ah seg21/20 0f8bh seg23/22 0f8ch seg25/24 0f8dh seg27/26 0f8eh seg29/28 0f8fh seg31/30 0f90h siobr0 0f91h siobr1 0f92h siobr2 0f93h siobr3 0f94h siobr4 0f95h siobr5 0f96h siobr6 0f97h siobr7 0f98h - siocr1 0f99h siosr siocr2 0f9ah - stopcr 0f9bh rdbuf tdbuf 0f9ch p2prd - 0f9dh p3prd - 0f9eh p1lcr 0f9fh p5lcr
page 48 4. special function register (sfr) 4.2 dbr TMP86FS23UG address read write 0fa0h p7lcr 0fa1h p8lcr 0fa2h reserved 0fa3h reserved 0fa4h maccr 0fa5h macsr - 0fa6h mpldrl 0fa7h mpldrh 0fa8h mpcdrl 0fa9h mpcdrh 0faah rcaldr1 maddr1 0fabh rcaldr2 maddr2 0fach rcaldr3 maddr3 0fadh rcaldr4 maddr4 0faeh reserved 0fafh reserved 0fb0h reserved 0fb1h reserved 0fb2h reserved 0fb3h reserved 0fb4h reserved 0fb5h reserved 0fb6h reserved 0fb7h reserved 0fb8h reserved 0fb9h reserved 0fbah reserved 0fbbh reserved 0fbch reserved 0fbdh reserved 0fbeh reserved 0fbfh reserved address read write 0fc0h reserved : : : : 0fdfh reserved
page 49 TMP86FS23UG note 1: do not access reserved areas by the program. note 2: ? ; cannot be accessed. note 3: write-only registers and interrupt latches cannot use the read-modify-write instructions (bit manipulation instructions such as set, clr, etc. and logical operation instructions such as and, or, etc.). address read write 0fe0h reserved 0fe1h reserved 0fe2h reserved 0fe3h reserved 0fe4h reserved 0fe5h reserved 0fe6h reserved 0fe7h reserved 0fe8h reserved 0fe9h - flsstb 0feah spcr 0febh reserved 0fech reserved 0fedh reserved 0feeh reserved 0fefh reserved 0ff0h reserved 0ff1h reserved 0ff2h reserved 0ff3h reserved 0ff4h reserved 0ff5h reserved 0ff6h reserved 0ff7h reserved 0ff8h reserved 0ff9h reserved 0ffah reserved 0ffbh reserved 0ffch reserved 0ffdh reserved 0ffeh reserved 0fffh flscr
page 50 4. special function register (sfr) 4.2 dbr TMP86FS23UG
page 51 TMP86FS23UG 5. i/o ports the TMP86FS23UG has 7 parallel input/output ports (48 pins) and output ports (3 pins) as follows. each output port contains a latch, which holds the output data. all input ports do not have latches, so the external input data should be externally held until the input data is read from outside or reading should be performed several timer before processing. figure 5-1 shows input/output timing examples. external data is read from an i/o port in the s1 state of the read cycle during execution of the read instruction. this timing cannot be recognized from outside, so that transient input such as chattering must be processed by the pro- gram. output data changes in the s2 state of the write cycle du ring execution of the instruct ion which writes to an i/o port. note: the positions of the read and write c ycles may vary, depending on the instruction. figure 5-1 input/output timing (example) primary function secondary functions port p1 8-bit i/o port external interrupt input, uart input/output, serial prom mode control input and segment output. port p2 3-bit i/o port low-frequency resonator connections, external interrupt input, stop mode release signal input. port p3 5-bit i/o port timer/counter input/output serial interface input/output and divider output. 3-bit i/o port timer/counter input/output. port p5 8-bit i/o port lcd segment output. port p6 8-bit i/o port analog input, external interrupt input, timer/counter input and stop mode release signal input. port p7 8-bit i/o port lcd segment output. port p8 8-bit i/o port lcd segment output. 

  
 
        
  

  

  
   ! "    ! "    ! " 

  
# 
        
  

  
$
 
   ! "    ! "    ! "   %&  # %& #  '
(
page 52 5. i/o ports 5.1 port p1 (p17 to p10) TMP86FS23UG 5.1 port p1 (p17 to p10) port p1 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or an output in one-bit unit. port p1 is also used as a uart input/output, an external interrupt input, a serial prom mode control input and segment output of lcd. input/output mode is specified by the p1 control register (p1cr). when used as an input port or a secondary function input pins (uart input or external interrupt input), the corre- sponding bit of p1cr and p1lcr should be cleared to ?0?. when used as an output port, the corresponding bit of p1 cr should be set to ?1?, and the respective p1lcr bit should be cleared to ?0?. when used as an uart output pin, the corresponding bit of p1cr and the output latch (p1dr) should be set to ?1?, and the respec tive p1lcr bit should be cleared to ?0?. when used as a segment pins of lcd, the respective bit of p1lcr should be set to ?1?. during reset, the p1dr, p1cr an d p1lcr are initi alized to ?0?. when the bit of p1cr and p1lcr is ?0?, the corresponding bit data by read instruction is a terminal input data. when the bit of p1cr is ?0? and that of p1lcr is ?1?, the corresponding bit data by read instruction is always ?0?. when the bit of p1cr is ?1?, the corresponding bit data by read instruction is the value of p1dr. note: asterisk (*) indicates ?1? or ?0? either of which can be selected. table 5-1 register programming for multi-function ports function programmed value p1dr p1cr p1lcr port input, uart input, and external interrupt input *?0??0? port ?0? output ?0? ?1? ?0? port ?1? output and uart output ?1? ?1? ?0? lcd segment output * * ?1? table 5-2 values read from p1dr and register programming conditions values read from p1dr p1cr p1lcr ?0? ?0? terminal input data ?0? ?1? ?0? ?1? ?0? output latch contents ?1?
page 53 TMP86FS23UG figure 5-2 port p1 note: the port placed in input mode reads the pin input state. t herefore, when the input and output modes are used together, the output latch contents for the port in input mode migh t be changed by executing a bi t manipulation instruction. p1dr (0001h) r/w 76543210 p17 seg24 p16 seg25 p15 seg26 p14 seg27 int3 p13 seg28 int2 p12 seg29 int1 p11 seg30 txd p10 seg31 rxd boot (initial value: 0000 0000) p1lcr (0f9eh) 76543210 (initial value: 0000 0000) p1lcr port p1/segment output control (set for each bit individually) 0: p1 input/output port or secondary function (expect for segment) 1: lcd segment output r/w p1cr (0009h) 76543210 (initial value: 0000 0000) p1cr p1 port input/output control (set for each bit individually) 0: input mode 1: output mode r/w                                          !  !  !
page 54 5. i/o ports 5.2 port p2 (p22 to p20) TMP86FS23UG 5.2 port p2 (p22 to p20) port p2 is a 3-bit input/output port. it is also used as an external interr upt, a stop mode release signal input, and low-frequency crys tal oscillator con- nection pins. when used as an input port or a secondary function pins, respective output latch (p2dr) should be set to ?1?. during reset, the p2dr is initialized to ?1?. a low-frequency crystal osci llator (32.768 khz) is connected to pins p21 (xtin) and p22 (xtout) in the dual- clock mode. in the single-clock mode, pins p21 and p22 can be used as normal input/output ports. it is recommended that pin p20 should be used as an exte rnal interrupt input, a stop mode release signal input, or an input port. if it is used as an output port, the in terrupt latch is set on the falling edge of the output pulse. p2 port output latch (p2dr) and p2 port terminal input (p2prd) are located on their respective address. when read the output latch data, the p2dr should be r ead and when read the termin al input data, the p2prd reg- ister should be read. if a read instruction is execute d for port p2, read data of bits 7 to 3 are unstable. figure 5-3 port p2 note: port p20 is used as stop pin. therefore, when stop mode is started, outen does not affect to p20, and p20 becomes high-z mode. p2dr (0002h) r/w 76543210 p22 xtout p21 xtin p20 int5 stop (initial value: **** *111) p2prd (0f9ch) read only 76543210 p22 p21 p20       
              
   
 
        
                 !"   #  $ % & % & % &
page 55 TMP86FS23UG 5.3 port p3 (p37 to p30) port p3 is a 3-bit output and a 5-bit input/output port. it is also used as a timer/co unter input/output, serial interf ace input/output or divider output. when used as a timer/counter output, serial interface ou tput or divider output, respective output latch (p3dr) should be set to ?1?. it can be selected whether output circuit of p30 to p34 port is c-mos output or a sink open drain individually, by setting p3outcr. when a corresponding b it of p3outcr is ?0?, the output circu it is selected to a sink open drain and when a corresponding bit of p3outcr is ?1?, the output circuit is selected to a c-mos output. when used as an input port, serial interface input or timer/counter input, respective output co ntrol (p3outcr) should be set to ?0? after p3dr is set to ?1?. during reset, the p3dr is initialized to ?1?, and the p3outcr is initialized to ?0?. p3 port output latch (p3dr) and p3 port terminal input (p3prd) are located on their respective address. when read the output latch data, the p3dr should be r ead and when read the termin al input data, the p3prd reg- ister should be read. if a read instru ction is executed for the p3prd and the p3 outcr, read data of bits 7 to 5 are unstable. figure 5-4 port p3 table 5-3 register programming for multi-function ports (p34 to p30) function programmed value p3dr p3outcr port input, serial interface input, or timer counter input ?1? ?0? port ?0? output ?0? programming for each applications port ?1? output, serial interface output, or timer counter output ?1? table 5-4 register programming for multi-function (p37 to p35) function programmed value p3dr port ?0? output ?0? port ?1? output, timer counter output, or divider output ?1?   
               
     

           

 
             !  " # $ # $ # $
page 56 5. i/o ports 5.3 port p3 (p37 to p30) TMP86FS23UG p3dr (0003h) r/w 76543210 p37 dvo p36 pwm3 pdo3 p35 pwm4 pdo4 ppg4 p34 pwm5 pdo5 tc5 p33 pwm6 pdo6 ppg6 tc6 p32 sck p31 so tc3 p30 si tc4 (initial value: 1111 111) p3outcr (0004h) 76543210 (initial value: ***0 0000) p3outcr port p3 output circuit control (set for each bit individually) 0: sink open-drain output 1: c-mos output r/w p3prd (0f9dh) read only 76543210 p34p33p32p31p30
page 57 TMP86FS23UG 5.4 port p5 (p57 to p50) port p5 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or an output in one-bit unit. port p5 is also used as a segment output of lcd. input/output mode is specified by the p5 control register (p5cr). when used as an input port, the corresponding bit of p5cr and p5lcr should be cleared to ?0?. when used as an output port, the corresponding bit of p5cr should be set to ?1?, and the respective p5lcr bit should be cleared to ?0?. when used as a segment pins of lcd, the respective bit of p5lcr should be set to ?1?. during reset, the output latch (p5dr) , p5cr and p5lcr are initialized to ?0?. when the bit of p5cr and p5lcr is ?0?, the corresponding bit data by read instruction is a terminal input data. when the bit of p5cr is ?0? and that of p5lcr is ?1?, the corresponding bit da ta by read instruction is always ?0?. when the bit of p5cr is ?1?, the corresponding bit data by read instruction is the value of p5dr. note: asterisk (*) indicates ?1? or ?0? either of which can be selected. figure 5-5 port p5 table 5-5 register programming for multi-function ports function programmed value p5dr p5cr p5lcr port input * ?0? ?0? port ?0? output ?0? ?1? ?0? port ?1? output ?1? ?1? ?0? lcd segment output * * ?1? table 5-6 values read from p5dr and register programming conditions values read from p5dr p5cr p5lcr ?0? ?0? terminal input data ?0? ?1? ?0? ?1? ?0? output latch contents ?1?                                     
page 58 5. i/o ports 5.4 port p5 (p57 to p50) TMP86FS23UG note: the port placed in input mode reads the pin input state. t herefore, when the input and output modes are used together, the output latch contents for the port in input mode migh t be changed by executing a bi t manipulation instruction. p5dr (0005h) r/w 76543210 p57 seg16 p56 seg17 p55 seg18 p54 seg19 p53 seg20 p52 seg21 p51 seg22 p50 seg23 (initial value: 0000 0000) p5lcr (0f9fh) 76543210 (initial value: 0000 0000) p5lcr port p5/segment output control (set for each bit individually) 0: p5 input/output port 1: lcd segment output r/w p5cr (000ah) 76543210 (initial value: 0000 0000) p5cr p5 port input/output control (set for each bit individually) 0: input mode 1: output mode r/w
page 59 TMP86FS23UG 5.5 port p6 (p67 to p60) port p6 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or an output in one-bit unit. port p6 is also used as an analog input, key on wake up input, timer/counter input and external interrupt input. input/output mode is specified by the p6 cont rol register (p6cr1) and inpu t control register (p6cr2). when used as an output port, the corresponding bit of p6cr1 should be set to ?1?. when used as an input port, timer/counter input or an external interrupt input, the corresponding bit of p6cr1 should be cleared to ?0?, and then, the corresponding bit of p6cr2 should be set to ?1?. when used as an analog input or key on wake up input, the corresponding bit of p6cr1 should be cleared to ?0?, and then, the corresponding bit of p6cr2 should be cleared to ?0? . the output latch of each digital input port with multiple f unctions should be set to ?0? to prevent flow-through cur- rent. therefore, the output la tch of each port to be used for analog inpu t should be preprogra mmed to ?0?. the con- version input channel to be used is actually selected by adccr1. during reset, the output latch (p6dr) and p6cr1 are initialized to 0?, p6cr2 is initialized to ?1?. when the bit of p6cr1 and p6cr2 is ?0?, the corresponding bit data by read instruction is always ?0?. when the bit of p6cr1 is ?0? and that of p6cr2 is ?1?, th e corresponding bit data by r ead instruction is a terminal input data. when the bit of p6cr1 is ?1?, the corresponding bi t data by read instruction is the value of p6dr. note: asterisk (*) indicates ?1? or ?0? either of which can be selected. table 5-7 register programmi ng for multi-function ports function programmed value p6dr p6cr1 p6cr2 port input external interrupt input or timer counter input * ?0? ?1? analog input or key-on wake-up input * ?0? ?0? port ?0? output ?0? ?1? * port ?1? output ?1? ?1? * table 5-8 values read from p6dr and register programming conditions values read from p6dr p6cr1 p6cr2 ?0? ?0? ?0? ?0? ?1? terminal input data ?1? ?0? output latch contents ?1?
page 60 5. i/o ports 5.5 port p6 (p67 to p60) TMP86FS23UG figure 5-6 port p6 note 1: the port placed in input mode reads the pin input state. therefore, when the input and output modes are used together, the output latch contents for the port in input mode might be changed by ex ecuting a bit manipulation instruction. note 2: when used as an analog inport, be sure to clear the corresponding bit of p6cr2 to disable the port input. note 3: do not set the output mode (p6cr1 = ?1? ) for the pin used as a analog input pin. note 4: pins not used for analog input can be used as i/o ports. during ad conversi on, output instructions should not be executed to keep a precision. in addition, a variable signal should not be input to a port adjacent to the analog input during ad conversion. control input analog input data output (p6dr) data input (p6dr) stop outen ainds sain p6cr2i input p6cr1i input p6cr2i p6cr1i p6i note 1: i = 0 to 3, j = 4 to 7, k = 2 to 5 note 2: stop is bit 7 in syscr1 note 3: sain is ad input select signal. note 4: stopk is input select signal in a key on wake up. analog input key on wake up data output (p6dr) data input (p6dr) stop stopk outen ainds sain p6cr2j input p6cr1j input p6cr2j p6cr1j p6j d q d q d q d q d q d q
page 61 TMP86FS23UG p6dr (0006h) r/w 76543210 p67 ain7 stop5 p66 ain6 stop4 p65 ain5 stop3 p64 ain4 stop2 p63 ain3 int0 p62 ain2 ecnt p61 ain1 ecin p60 ain0 (initial value: 0000 0000) p6cr1 (000bh) 76543210 (initial value: 0000 0000) p6cr1 i/o control for port p6 (specified for each bit) 0: port input, key on wake up input, analog input, external interrupt input or timer counter input 1: port output r/w p6cr2 (000ch) 76543210 (initial value: 1111 1111) p6cr2 p6 port input control (specified for each bit) 0: analog input or key on wake up input 1: port input , external interrupt input or timer counter input r/w
page 62 5. i/o ports 5.6 port p7 (p77 to p70) TMP86FS23UG 5.6 port p7 (p77 to p70) port p7 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or an output in one-bit unit. port p7 is also used as a segment output of lcd. input/output mode is specified by the p7 control register (p7cr). when used as an input port, the corresponding bi t of p7cr and p7lcr should be cleared to ?0?. when used as an output port, the corresponding bit of p7 cr should be set to ?1?, and the respective p7lcr bit should be cleared to ?0?. when used as a segment pins of lcd, the respective bit of p7lcr should be set to ?1?. during reset, the output latch (p7dr), p7cr and p7lcr are initialized to ?0?. when the bit of p7cr and p7lcr is ?0?, the corresponding bit data by read instruction is a terminal input data. when the bit of p7cr is ?0? and that of p7lcr is ?1?, the corresponding bit data by read instruction is always ?0?. when the bit of p7cr is ?1?, the corresponding bit data by read instruction is the value of p7dr. note: asterisk (*) indicates ?1? or ?0? either of which can be selected. figure 5-7 port p7 table 5-9 register programming for multi-function ports function programmed value p7dr p7cr p7lcr port input * ?0? ?0? port ?0? output ?0? ?1? ?0? port ?1? output ?1? ?1? ?0? lcd segment output * * ?1? table 5-10 values read from p7dr and register programming conditions values read from p7dr p7cr p7lcr ?0? ?0? terminal input data ?0? ?1? ?0? ?1? ?0? output latch contents ?1?                                        
page 63 TMP86FS23UG note: the port placed in input mode reads the pin input state. t herefore, when the input and output modes are used together, the output latch contents for the port in input mode migh t be changed by executing a bi t manipulation instruction. p7dr (0007h) r/w 76543210 p77 seg8 p76 seg9 p75 seg10 p74 seg11 p73 seg12 p72 seg13 p71 seg14 p70 seg15 (initial value: 0000 0000) p7lcr (0fa0h) 76543210 (initial value: 0000 0000) p7lcr port p7/segment output control (set for each bit individually) 0: p7 input/output port 1: segment output r/w p7cr (000dh) 76543210 (initial value: 0000 0000) p7cr p7 port input/output control (set for each bit individually) 0: input mode 1: output mode r/w
page 64 5. i/o ports 5.7 port p8 (p87 to p80) TMP86FS23UG 5.7 port p8 (p87 to p80) port p8 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or an output in one-bit unit. port p8 is also used as a segment output of lcd. input/output mode is specified by the p8 control register (p8cr). when used as an input port, the corresponding bi t of p8cr and p8lcr should be cleared to ?0?. when used as an output port, the corresponding bit of p8 cr should be set to ?1?, and the respective p8lcr bit should be cleared to ?0?. when used as a segment pins of lcd, the respective bit of p8lcr should be set to ?1?. during reset, the output latch (p8dr), p8cr and p8lcr are initialized to ?0?. when the bit of p8cr and p8lcr is ?0?, the corresponding bit data by read instruction is a terminal input data. when the bit of p8cr is ?0? and that of p8lcr is ?1?, the corresponding bit data by read instruction is always ?0?. when the bit of p8cr is ?1?, the corresponding bit data by read instruction is the value of p8dr. note: asterisk (*) indicates ?1? or ?0? either of which can be selected. figure 5-8 port p8 table 5-11 register programming for multi-function ports function port input p8dr p8cr p8lcr port input * ?0? ?0? port ?0? output ?0? ?1? ?0? port ?1? output ?1? ?1? ?0? lcd segment output * * ?1? table 5-12 values read from p8dr and register programming conditions values read from p8dr p8cr p8lcr ?0? ?0? terminal input data ?0? ?1? ?0? ?1? ?0? output latch contents ?1?                                     
page 65 TMP86FS23UG note: the port placed in input mode reads the pin input state. t herefore, when the input and output modes are used together, the output latch contents for the port in input mode migh t be changed by executing a bi t manipulation instruction. p8dr (0008h) r/w 76543210 p87 seg0 p86 seg1 p85 seg2 p84 seg3 p83 seg4 p82 seg5 p81 seg6 p80 seg7 (initial value: 0000 0000) p8lcr (0fa1h) 76543210 (initial value: 0000 0000) p8lcr p8 port segment output control (specified for each bit) 0: input/output port 1: lcd segment output r/w p8cr (0024h) 76543210 (initial value: 0000 0000) p8cr p8 port input/output control (specified for each bit) 0: input mode 1: output mode r/w
page 66 5. i/o ports 5.7 port p8 (p87 to p80) TMP86FS23UG
page 67 TMP86FS23UG 6. time base timer (tbt) the time base timer generates time base for key scanning, dynamic displaying, etc. it also provides a time base timer interrupt (inttbt). 6.1 time base timer 6.1.1 configuration figure 6-1 time base timer configuration 6.1.2 control time base timer is controled by time base timer control register (tbtcr). note 1: fc; high-frequency clock [hz], fs ; low-frequency clock [hz], *; don't care time base timer control register 7 6543210 tbtcr (0036h) (dvoen) (dvock) (dv7ck) tbten tbtck (initial value: 0000 0000) tbten time base timer enable / disable 0: disable 1: enable tbtck time base timer interrupt frequency select : [hz] normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2 sleep1/2 mode r/w dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 000 fc/2 23 fs/2 15 fs/2 15 001 fc/2 21 fs/2 13 fs/2 13 010 fc/2 16 fs/2 8 ? 011 fc/2 14 fs/2 6 ? 100 fc/2 13 fs/2 5 ? 101 fc/2 12 fs/2 4 ? 110 fc/2 11 fs/2 3 ? 111 fc/2 9 fs/2 ? fc/2 23 or fs/2 15 fc/2 21 or fs/2 13 fc/2 16 or fs/2 8 fc/2 14 or fs/2 6 fc/2 13 or fs/2 5 fc/2 12 or fs/2 4 fc/2 11 or fs/2 3 fc/2 9 or fs/2 tbtcr tbten tbtck 3 mpx source clock falling edge detector time base timer control register inttbt interrupt request idle0, sleep0 release request
page 68 6. time base timer (tbt) 6.1 time base timer TMP86FS23UG note 2: the interrupt frequency (tbtck) must be selected with t he time base timer disabled (tbten="0"). (the interrupt fre- quency must not be changed with the disable from the enable state.) both frequency selection and enabling can be per- formed simultaneously. 6.1.3 function an inttbt ( time base timer interrupt ) is generated on the first falling edge of source clock ( the divider output of the timing generato which is selected by tbtck. ) after time base timer has been enabled. the divider is not cleared by the progra m; therefore, only the first interrupt may be generated ahead of the set interrupt period ( figure 6-2 ). figure 6-2 time base timer interrupt example :set the time base timer frequency to fc/2 16 [hz] and enable an inttbt interrupt. ld (tbtcr) , 00000010b ; tbtck 010 ld (tbtcr) , 00001010b ; tbten 1 di ; imf 0 set (eirl) . 6 table 6-1 time base timer interrupt frequency ( example : fc = 16.0 mhz, fs = 32.768 khz ) tbtck time base timer interrupt frequency [hz] normal1/2, idle1/2 mode normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2, sleep1/2 mode dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 000 1.91 1 1 001 7.63 4 4 010 244.14 128 ? 011 976.56 512 ? 100 1953.13 1024 ? 101 3906.25 2048 ? 110 7812.5 4096 ? 111 31250 16384 ? source clock enable tbt interrupt period tbtcr inttbt
page 69 TMP86FS23UG 6.2 divider output ( dvo ) approximately 50% duty pulse can be output using the divider output circuit, which is useful for piezoelectric buzzer drive. divider output is from dvo pin. 6.2.1 configuration figure 6-3 divider output 6.2.2 control the divider output is controlled by the time base timer control register. note: selection of divider output frequency (dvock) must be made whil e divider output is disabled (dvoen="0"). also, in other words, when changing the state of the divider output frequen cy from enabled (dvoen="1") to disable(dvoen="0"), do not change the setting of the divider output frequency. time base timer control register 7654 321 0 tbtcr (0036h) dvoen dvock (dv7ck) (tbten) (tbtck) (initial value: 0000 0000) dvoen divider output enable / disable 0: disable 1: enable r/w dvock divider output ( dvo ) frequency selection: [hz] normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2 sleep1/2 mode r/w dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 00 fc/2 13 fs/2 5 fs/2 5 01 fc/2 12 fs/2 4 fs/2 4 10 fc/2 11 fs/2 3 fs/2 3 11 fc/2 10 fs/2 2 fs/2 2 tbtcr output latch port output latch mpx dvoen tbtcr dvo pin output dvock divider output control register (a) configuration (b) timing chart data output 2 a b c y d s d q dvo pin fc/2 13 or fs/2 5 fc/2 12 or fs/2 4 fc/2 11 or fs/2 3 fc/2 10 or fs/2 2
page 70 6. time base timer (tbt) 6.2 divider output (dvo) TMP86FS23UG example :1.95 khz pulse output (fc = 16.0 mhz) ld (tbtcr) , 00000000b ; dvock "00" ld (tbtcr) , 10000000b ; dvoen "1" table 6-2 divider output frequency ( exam ple : fc = 16.0 mhz, fs = 32.768 khz ) dvock divider output frequency [hz] normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2, sleep1/2 mode dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 00 1.953 k 1.024 k 1.024 k 01 3.906 k 2.048 k 2.048 k 10 7.813 k 4.096 k 4.096 k 11 15.625 k 8.192 k 8.192 k
page 71 TMP86FS23UG 7. watchdog timer (wdt) the watchdog timer is a fail-safe system to detect rapidl y the cpu malfunctions such as endless loops due to spu- rious noises or the deadlock conditions, and return the cpu to a sy stem recovery routine. the watchdog timer signal for detecting malfunctions can be programmed only once as ?reset request? or ?inter- rupt request?. upon the reset release, this signal is initialized to ?reset request?. when the watchdog timer is not used to detect malfunctions, it can be used as the timer to provide a periodic inter- rupt. note: care must be taken in system des ign since the watchdog timer functions are not be operated completely due to effect of disturbing noise. 7.1 watchdog timer configuration figure 7-1 watchdog timer configuration 0034 h overflow wdt output internal reset binary counters wdtout writing clear code writing disable code wdten wdtt 2 0035 h watchdog timer control registers wdtcr1 wdtcr2 intwdt interrupt request interrupt request reset request reset release clock clear 1 2 controller q sr s r q selector fc/2 23 or fs/2 15 fc/2 21 or fs/2 13 fc/2 19 or fs/2 11 fc/2 17 or fs/2 9
page 72 7. watchdog timer (wdt) 7.2 watchdog timer control TMP86FS23UG 7.2 watchdog timer control the watchdog timer is controlled by the watchdog timer control registers (wdtcr1 and wdtcr2). the watch- dog timer is automatically enabled after the reset release. 7.2.1 malfunction detection me thods using the watchdog timer the cpu malfunction is detected, as shown below. 1. set the detection time, select the output, and clear the binary counter. 2. clear the binary counter repeatedly within the specified detection time. if the cpu malfunctions such as en dless loops or the deadlock condition s occur for some reason, the watch- dog timer output is activated by the binary-counter overflow unless the binary counters are cleared. when wdtcr1 is set to ?1? at this time, the reset request is generated and then internal hardware is initialized. when wdtcr1 is set to ?0?, a watchdog timer interrupt (intwdt) is generated. the watchdog timer temporarily stops counting in th e stop mode including the warm-up or idle/sleep mode, and automatically restarts (continues counting) when the stop/idle/sleep mode is inactivated. note:the watchdog timer consists of an internal divider and a two-stage binary counter. when the clear code 4eh is written, only the binary counter is cleared, but not the internal divider . the minimum binary-counter overflow time, that depends on the timing at which the clear code (4eh) is written to the wdtcr2 register, may be 3/ 4 of the time set in wdtcr1. therefore, writ e the clear code using a cycle shorter than 3/4 of the time set to wdtcr1. example :setting the watchdog timer detection time to 2 21 /fc [s], and resetting the cpu malfunction detection ld (wdtcr2), 4eh : clears the binary counters. ld (wdtcr1), 00001101b : wdtt 10, wdtout 1 ld (wdtcr2), 4eh : clears the binary counters (always clears immediately before and after changing wdtt). within 3/4 of wdt detection time : : ld (wdtcr2), 4eh : clears the binary counters. within 3/4 of wdt detection time : : ld (wdtcr2), 4eh : clears the binary counters.
page 73 TMP86FS23UG note 1: after clearing wdtout to ?0?, the program cannot set it to ?1?. note 2: fc: high-frequency clock [hz], fs : low-frequency clock [hz], *: don?t care note 3: wdtcr1 is a write-only register and must not be used with any of read-modify-write instructions. if wdtcr1 is read, a don?t care is read. note 4: to activate the stop mode, disable the watchdog timer or clear the counter immediately before entering the stop mode. after clearing the counter, clear the counter again immediately after the stop mode is inactivated. note 5: to clear wdten, set the register in accordance wi th the procedures shown in ?1.2.3 watchdog timer disable?. note 1: the disable code is valid only when wdtcr1 = 0. note 2: *: don?t care note 3: the binary counter of the watchdog timer must not be cleared by the interrupt task. note 4: write the clear code 4eh using a cycle shor ter than 3/4 of the time set in wdtcr1. 7.2.2 watchdog timer enable setting wdtcr1 to ?1? enables the watc hdog timer. since wdtcr1 is initialized to ?1? during reset, the watchdog timer is enabled automatically after the reset release. watchdog timer control register 1 wdtcr1 (0034h) 76543210 (atas) (atout) wdten wdtt wdtout (initial value: **11 1001) wdten watchdog timer enable/disable 0: disable (writing the disable code to wdtcr2 is required.) 1: enable write only wdtt watchdog timer detection time [s] normal1/2 mode slow1/2 mode write only dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 00 2 25 /fc 2 17 /fs 2 17 /fs 01 2 23 /fc 2 15 /fs 2 15 fs 10 2 21 fc 2 13 /fs 2 13 fs 11 2 19 /fc 2 11 /fs 2 11 /fs wdtout watchdog timer output select 0: interrupt request 1: reset request write only watchdog timer control register 2 wdtcr2 (0035h) 76543210 (initial value: **** ****) wdtcr2 write watchdog timer control code 4eh: clear the watchdog timer binary counter (clear code) b1h: disable the watchdog timer (disable code) d2h: enable assigning address trap area others: invalid write only
page 74 7. watchdog timer (wdt) 7.2 watchdog timer control TMP86FS23UG 7.2.3 watchdog timer disable to disable the watchdog timer, set the register in accordance with the fo llowing procedures . setting the reg- ister in other procedures causes a malfunction of the microcontroller. 1. set the interrupt master flag (imf) to ?0?. 2. set wdtcr2 to the clear code (4eh). 3. set wdtcr1 to ?0?. 4. set wdtcr2 to the disable code (b1h). note:while the watchdog timer is disabled, the binary counters of the watchdog timer are cleared. 7.2.4 watchdog time r interrupt (intwdt) when wdtcr1 is cleared to ?0?, a watchdog timer interrupt request (intwdt) is generated by the binary-counter overflow. a watchdog timer interrupt is the non-maskable interr upt which can be accepted regardless of the interrupt master flag (imf). when a watchdog timer interrupt is generated while the other interrupt including a watchdog timer interrupt is already accepted, the new watchdog timer interrupt is processed immediately and the previous interrupt is held pending. therefore, if watchdog timer interrupts are generated continuously without execution of the retn instruction, too many levels of nesting may cause a malfunction of the microcontroller. to generate a watchdog timer interrupt, set the stack pointer before setting wdtcr1. example :disabling the watchdog timer di : imf 0 ld (wdtcr2), 04eh : clears the binary coutner ldw (wdtcr1), 0b101h : wdten 0, wdtcr2 disable code table 7-1 watchdog timer detection time (example: fc = 16.0 mhz, fs = 32.768 khz) wdtt watchdog timer detection time[s] normal1/2 mode slow mode dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 00 2.097 4 4 01 524.288 m 1 1 10 131.072 m 250 m 250 m 11 32.768 m 62.5 m 62.5 m example :setting watchdog timer interrupt ld sp, 083fh : sets the stack pointer ld (wdtcr1), 00001000b : wdtout 0
page 75 TMP86FS23UG 7.2.5 watchdog timer reset when a binary-counter overflow occurs while wdt cr1 is set to ?1?, a watchdog timer reset request is generated. when a watchdog timer reset request is generated, the internal hardware is reset. the reset time is maximum 24/fc [s] (1.5 s @ fc = 16.0 mhz). note:when a watchdog timer reset is generated in the sl ow1 mode, the reset time is maximum 24/fc (high-fre- quency clock) since the high-frequency cl ock oscillator is restarted. however, when crystals have inaccura- cies upon start of the high-frequency clock oscillator, the reset time should be considered as an approximate value because it has slight errors. figure 7-2 watchdog timer interrupt clock binary counter overflow intwdt interrupt request (wdtcr1= "0") 2 17 /fc 2 19 /fc [s] (wdtt=11) write 4e h to wdtcr2 1 2 30 1 2 3 0 internal reset (wdtcr1= "1") a reset occurs
page 76 7. watchdog timer (wdt) 7.3 address trap TMP86FS23UG 7.3 address trap the watchdog timer control register 1 and 2 share the a ddresses with the control regi sters to generate address traps. 7.3.1 selection of address tr ap in internal ram (atas) wdtcr1 specifies whether or not to generate address traps in the inte rnal ram area. to execute an instruction in the internal ram area, clear wdtcr1 to ?0?. to enable the wdtcr1 set- ting, set wdtcr1 and then write d2h to wdtcr2. executing an instruction in the sfr or dbr area generates an address trap unconditionally regardless of the setting in wdtcr1. 7.3.2 selection of operati on at address trap (atout) when an address trap is generated, either the inte rrupt request or the reset request can be selected by wdtcr1. 7.3.3 address trap interrupt (intatrap) while wdtcr1 is ?0?, if the cpu should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip ram (while wdtcr1 is ?1?), dbr or the sfr area, address trap interrupt (intatrap) will be generated. an address trap interrupt is a non-maskable interrupt which can be accepted regardless of the interrupt mas- ter flag (imf). when an address trap interrupt is generated while th e other interrupt including a watchdog timer interrupt is already accepted, the new address trap is processed immediately and the previous interrupt is held pending. therefore, if address trap interrupts are generated continuously without execution of the retn instruction, too many levels of nesting may cause a malfunction of the microcontroller. to generate address trap interrupts, set the stack pointer beforehand. watchdog timer control register 1 wdtcr1 (0034h) 7654 3 21 0 atas atout (wdten) (wdtt) (wdtout) (initial value: **11 1001) atas select address trap generation in the internal ram area 0: generate no address trap 1: generate address traps (after setting atas to ?1?, writing the control code d2h to wdtcr2 is reguired) write only atout select opertion at address trap 0: interrupt request 1: reset request watchdog timer control register 2 wdtcr2 (0035h) 76543210 (initial value: **** ****) wdtcr2 write watchdog timer control code and address trap area control code d2h: enable address trap area selection (atrap control code) 4eh: clear the watchdog timer binary counter (wdt clear code) b1h: disable the watchdog timer (wdt disable code) others: invalid write only
page 77 TMP86FS23UG 7.3.4 address trap reset while wdtcr1 is ?1?, if the cpu should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip ram (while wdtcr1 is ?1?), dbr or the sfr area, address trap reset will be generated. when an address trap reset request is generated, the in ternal hardware is reset. the reset time is maximum 24/fc [s] (1.5 s @ fc = 16.0 mhz). note:when an address trap reset is generated in the slow1 mode, the reset time is maximum 24/fc (high-fre- quency clock) since the high-frequency cl ock oscillator is restarted. however, when crystals have inaccura- cies upon start of the high-frequency clock oscillator, the reset time should be considered as an approximate value because it has slight errors.
page 78 7. watchdog timer (wdt) 7.3 address trap TMP86FS23UG
page 79 TMP86FS23UG 8. 18-bit timer/counter (tc1) 8.1 configuration figure 8-1 timer/counter1 tc1cr1 treg1b f/f tc1sr cmp tc1cr2 c b y a s h c d e f g b a a b y c s treg1a l treg1a m treg1a h window pulse generator edge detector 18- bit up-counter edge detector 10 11 00 s y y pin ecnt pin clear signal ecin pin wgpsck tc1m sgedg inttc1 2 3 22 1 12121 wgpsck sgedg sgp seg tc1c tc1s tc1m tc1ck 2 1 1 11 seg 1 pulse width measurement mode frequency measurement mode timer/event count modes p33 tc6out tc6out fc/2 12 or fs/2 4 fc/2 13 or fs/2 5 fc/2 14 or fs/2 6 fs/2 15 or fc/2 23 fs/2 5 or fc/2 13 fs/2 3 or fc/2 11 fc/2 7 fc/2 3 fs fc pwm6 /pdo6 /ppg6
page 80 8. 18-bit timer/counter (tc1) 8.2 control TMP86FS23UG 8.2 control the timer/counter 1 is controlled by timer/counter 1 control registers (tc1cr1/tc1cr2), an 18-bit timer register (treg1a), and an 8-bit inte rnal window gate pulse setting register (treg1b). timer register 76543210 treg1ah (0012h) r/w ?????? treg1ah (initial value: ???? ?? 00) 76543210 treg1am (0011h) r/w treg1am (initial value: 0000 0000) 76543210 treg1al (0010h) r/w treg1al (initial value: 0000 0000) 76543210 treg1b (0013h) ta tb (initial value: 0000 0000) wgpsck normal1/2,idle1/2 modes slow1/2, sleep1/2 modes r/w dv7ck=0 dv7ck=1 ta setting "h" level period of the window gate pulse 00 01 10 (16 - ta) 2 12 /fc (16 - ta) 2 13 /fc (16 - ta) 2 14 /fc (16 - ta) 2 4 /fs (16 - ta) 2 5 /fs (16 - ta) 2 6 /fs (16 - ta) 2 4 /fs (16 - ta) 2 5 /fs (16 - ta) 2 6 /fs tb setting "l" level period of the window gate pulse 00 01 10 (16 - tb) 2 12 /fc (16 - tb) 2 13 /fc (16 - tb) 2 14 /fc (16 - tb) 2 4 /fs (16 - tb) 2 5 /fs (16 - tb) 2 6 /fs (16 - tb) 2 4 /fs (16 - tb) 2 5 /fs (16 - tb) 2 6 /fs
page 81 TMP86FS23UG note 1: fc; high-frequency clock [hz] fs; low-frequency clock [hz] * ; don?t care note 2: writing to the low-byte of the timer register 1a (tre g1al, treg1am), the compare func tion is inhibited until the high- byte (treg1ah) is written. note 3: set the mode and source clock, and edge (selection) when the tc1 stops (tc1s=00). note 4: ?fc? can be selected as the source clock only in the timer mode during slow mode and in the pulse width measurement mode during normal 1/2 or idle 1/2 mode. note 5: when a read instruction is executed to the timer register (treg1a), the counter immediate value, not the register set value, is read out. therefore it is impossible to read out the written value of treg1a. to read the counter value, the read instruction should be executed when the coun ter stops to avoid reading unstable value. note 6: set the timer r egister (treg1a) to 1. note 7: when using the timer mode and pulse width measurement m ode, set tc1ck (tc1 source clock select) to internal clock. note 8: when using the event counter mode, set tc1c k (tc1 source clock select) to external clock. note 9: because the read value is different from the written va lue, do not use read-modify-wri te instructions to treg1a. note 10:fc/2 7 , fc/2 3 can not be used as source clock in slow/sleep mode. note 11:the read data of bits 7 to 2 in treg1ah are always ?0?. (data ?1? can not be written.) timer/counter 1 control register 1 7 6543210 tc1cr1 (0014h) tc1c tc1s tc1ck tc1m (initial value: 1000 1000) tc1c counter/overfow flag controll 0: 1: clear counter/overflow flag ( ?1? is automatically set after clearing.) not clear counter/overflow flag r/w tc1s tc1 start control 00: 10: *1: stop and counter clear and overflow flag clear start reserved r/w tc1ck tc1 source clock select normal1/2,idle1/2 modes slow1/2 mode sleep1/2 mode r/w dv7ck="0" dv7ck="1" 000 : 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: fc fs fc/2 23 fc/2 13 fc/2 11 fc/2 7 fc/2 3 fc fs fs/2 15 fs/2 5 fs/2 3 fc/2 7 fc/2 3 fc - fs/2 15 fs/2 5 fs/2 3 - - fc - fs/2 15 fs/2 5 fs/2 3 - - 111: external clock (ecin pin input) tc1m tc1 mode select 00: 01: 10: 11: timer/event counter mode reserved pulse width measurement mode frequency measurement mode r/w
page 82 8. 18-bit timer/counter (tc1) 8.2 control TMP86FS23UG note 1: fc; high-frequency clock [hz] fs; low-frequency clock [hz] *; don't care note 2: set the mode, source clock, and edge (selection) when the tc1 stops (tc1s = 00). note 3: if there is no need to use pwm6 / pdo6 / ppg6 as window gate pulse of tc1 always write "0" to tc6out. note 4: make sure to write tc1cr2 "0" to bit 0 in tc1cr2. note 5: when using the event counter mode or pulse width measurement mode, set seg to "0". timer/counter 1 control register 2 76543210 tc1cr2 (0015h) seg sgp sgedg wgpsck tc6out "0" (initial value: 0000 000*) seg external input clock (ecin) edge select 0: 1: counts at the falling edge counts at the both (falling/rising) edges r/w sgp window gate pulse select 00: 01: 10: 11: ecnt input internal window gate pulse (treg1b) pwm6 / pdo6 / ppg6 (tc6)output reserved r/w sgedg window gate pulse interrupt edge select 0: 1: interrupts at the falling edge interrupts at the falling/rising edges wgpsck window gate pulse source clock select normal1/2,idle1/2 modes slow1/2 mode sleep1/2 mode r/w dv7ck="0" dv7ck="1" 00: 01: 10: 11: 2 12 /fc 2 13 /fc 2 14 /fc reserved 2 4 /fs 2 5 /fs 2 6 /fs reserved 2 4 /fs 2 5 /fs 2 6 /fs reserved 2 4 /fs 2 5 /fs 2 6 /fs reserved tc6out tc6 output ( pwm6 / pdo6 / ppg6 ) external output select 0: 1: output to p33 no output to p33 r/w
page 83 TMP86FS23UG 8.3 function tc1 has four operating modes. the timer mode of the tc 1 is used at warm-up when switching form slow mode to normal2 mode. 8.3.1 timer mode in this mode, counting up is perfor med using the internal clock. the c ontents of tregia are compared with the contents of up-counter. if a match is found, an in ttc1 interrupt is generated, and the counter is cleared. counting up resumes after the counter is cleared. note: when fc is selected for the source clock in slow mode, the lower bits 11 of treg1a is invalid, and a match of the upper bits 7 makes interrupts. tc1 status register tc1sr (0016h) 7 6 543210 hecf heovf "0" "0" "0" "0" "0" "0" (initial value: 0000 0000) hecf operating status monitor 0: 1: stop (during tb) or disable under counting (during ta) read only heovf counter overflow monitor 0: 1: no overflow overflow status table 8-1 source clock (internal clock) of timer/counter 1 source clock resolution maximum time setting normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow mode sleep mode fc = 16 mhz fs =32.768 khz fc = 16 mhz fs =32.768 khz dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 fc/2 23 [hz] fs/2 15 [hz] fs/2 15 [hz] fs/2 15 [hz] 0.52 s 1 s 38.2 h 72.8 h fc/2 13 fs/2 5 fs/2 5 fs/2 5 512 ms 0.98 ms 2.2 min 4.3 min fc/2 11 fs/2 3 fs/2 3 fs/2 3 128 ms 244 ms 0.6 min 1.07 min fc/2 7 fc/2 7 --8 ms-2.1 s- fc/2 3 fc/2 3 - - 0.5 ms - 131.1 ms - fc fc fc (note) - 62.5 ns - 16.4 ms - fs fs - - - 30.5 ms - 8 s
page 84 8. 18-bit timer/counter (tc1) 8.3 function TMP86FS23UG figure 8-2 timing chart for timer mode 8.3.2 event counter mode it is a mode to count up at the falling edge of the ecin pin input. when using this mode, set tc1cr1 to the external clock and then set tc1cr2 to ?0? (both edges can not be used). the countents of treg1a are compared with the cont ents of up-counter. if a match is found, an inttc1 interrupt is generated, and the counter is cleared. count ing up resumes for ecin pin input edge each after the counter is cleared. the maximum applied frequency is fc/2 4 [hz] in normal 1/2 or idle 1/2 mode and fs/2 4 [hz] in slow or sleep mode . two or more machine cycles are requi red for both the ?h? and ?l? levels of the pulse width. figure 8-3 event count er mode timing chart 1 0 2 3 4 n 0 1 n-1 2 3 4 5 6 n treg1a internal clock up counter command start match detect counter clear inttc1 interrupt 1 0 2 2 n-1 n 0 1 n treg1a ecin pin input up counter start match detect counter clear inttc1 interrupt
page 85 TMP86FS23UG 8.3.3 pulse width measurement mode in this mode, pulse widths are coun ted on the falling edge of logical and-ed pulse between ecin pin input (window pulse) and the internal clock. when using this mode, set tc1cr1 to suitable internal clock and then set tc1cr2 to ?0? (both edges can not be used). an inttc1 interrupt is generated when the ecin inpu t detects the falling edge of the window pulse or both rising and falling edges of the window pulse, that can be selected by tc1cr2. the contents of treg1a should be read while the c ount is stopped (ecin pin is low), then clear the counter using tc1cr1 (normally, execute these process in the interrupt program). when the counter is not cleared by tc1cr1, counting-up resumes from previous stopping value. when up counter is counted up from 3ffffh to 00000 h, an overflow occurs. at that time, tc1sr is set to ?1?. tc1sr remains the previous data until the counter is required to be cleared by tc1cr1. note:in pulse width measurement mode, if tc1cr1 is written to "00" while ecin input is "1", inttc1 inter- rupt occurs. according to the following step, when ti mer counter is stopped, inttc1 interrupt latch should be cleared to "0". note 1: when sgedg (window gate pulse interrupt edge select ) is set to both edges and ecin pin input is "1" in the pulse width measurement mode, an inttc1 interrupt is generated by setting tc1s (tc1 start control) to "10" (start). note 2: in the pulse width measurement mode, hecf (operating status monitor) cannot used. note 3: because the up counter is counted on the falling e dge of logical and-ed pulse (between ecin pin input and the internal clock), if ecin input becomes falling edge while internal source clock is "h" level, the up counter stops plus "1". figure 8-4 pulse width me asurement mode timing chart example : tc1stop : | | di ; clear imf clr (eirl). 7 ; clear bit7 of eirl ld (tc1cr1), 00011010b ; stop timer couter 1 ld (ill), 01111111b ; clear bit7 of ill set (eirl). 7 ; set bit7 of eirl ei ; set imf | | 1 0 2 3 n-2 n-1 n n+1 0 12 ecin pin input inttc1 interrupt internal clock and-ed pulse (internal signal) up counter tc1cr1 interrupt read clear count start count start count stop
page 86 8. 18-bit timer/counter (tc1) 8.3 function TMP86FS23UG 8.3.4 frequency measurement mode in this mode, the frequency of ecin pin input pulse is measured. when using this mode, set tc1cr1 to the external clock. the edge of the ecin input pulse is counted during ?h? level of the window gate pulse selected by tc1cr2. to use ecnt input as a window ga te pulse, tc1cr2 should be set to ?00?. an inttc1 interrupt is generated on the falling edge or both the rising/falling edges of the window gate pulse, that can be selected by tc1cr2. in the interrupt service progr am, read the contents of treg1a while the count is stopped (window gate pulse is low), then clear the counter using tc1cr1. when the counter is not cleared, counting up resumes from previous stopping value. the window pulse status can be monitored by tc1sr. when up counter is counted up from 3ffffh to 00000h, an overflow occurs. at that time, tc1sr is set to ?1?. tc1sr remains the previous data until the counter is required to be cleared by tc1cr1. using tc6 output ( pwm6 / pdo6 / ppg6 ) for the window gate pulse, external output of pwm6 / pdo6 / ppg6 to p33 can be controlled using tc1cr2. zero-clearing tc1cr2 outputs pwm6 / pdo6 / ppg6 to p33; setting 1 in tc1cr2 does not output pwm6 / pdo6 / ppg6 to p33. (tc1cr2 is used to control output to p33 on ly. thus, use the timer count er 6 control register to operate/stop pwm6 / pdo6 / ppg6 .) when the internal window gate pulse is selected, the window gate pulse is set as follows. the internal window gate pulse consists of ?h? level period (ta) that is counting time and ?l? level period (tb) that is counting stop time. ta or tb can be individually set by treg1b. one cycle contains ta + tb. note 1: because the internal window gate pulse is generat ed in synchronization with the internal divider, it may be delayed for a maximum of one cycle of the source cloc k (wgpsck) immediately after start of the timer. note 2: set the internal window gate pulse when the timer counter is not operating or during the tb period. when tb is overwritten during the tb period, t he update is valid from the next tb period. note 3: in case of tc1cr2 = "1", if window gate pulse becomes falling edge, the up counter stops plus "1" regardless of ecin input level. therefore, if ecin is always "h" or "l" leve l, count value becomes "1". note 4: in case of tc1cr2 = "0", because the up counter is counted on the fa lling edge of logical and-ed pulse (between ecin pin input and window gate pulse ), if window gate pulse becomes falling edge while ecin input is "h" level, the up counter stops plus "1". therefore, if ecin input is always "h" level, count value becomes "1". table 8-2 internal window gate pulse setting time wgpsck normal1/2,idle1/2 modes slow1/2, sleep1/2 modes r/w dv7ck=0 dv7ck=1 ta setting "h" level period of the window gate pulse 00 01 10 (16 - ta) 2 12 /fc (16 - ta) 2 13 /fc (16 - ta) 2 14 /fc (16 - ta) 2 4 /fs (16 - ta) 2 5 /fs (16 - ta) 2 6 /fs (16 - ta) 2 4 /fs (16 - ta) 2 5 /fs (16 - ta) 2 6 /fs tb setting "l" level period of the window gate pulse 00 01 10 (16 - tb) 2 12 /fc (16 - tb) 2 13 /fc (16 - tb) 2 14 /fc (16 - tb) 2 4 /fs (16 - tb) 2 5 /fs (16 - tb) 2 6 /fs (16 - tb) 2 4 /fs (16 - tb) 2 5 /fs (16 - tb) 2 6 /fs
page 87 TMP86FS23UG table 8-3 table setting ta and tb (wgpsck = 10, fc = 16 mhz) setting value setting time setting value setting time 0 16.38ms 8 8.19ms 1 15.36ms 9 7.17ms 2 14.34ms a 6.14ms 3 13.31ms b 5.12ms 4 12.29ms c 4.10ms 5 11.26ms d 3.07ms 6 10.24ms e 2.05ms 7 9.22ms f 1.02ms table 8-4 table setting ta and tb (wgpsck = 10, fs = 32.768 khz) setting valuen setting time setting value setting time 0 31.25ms 8 15.63ms 1 29.30ms 9 13.67ms 2 27.34ms a 11.72ms 3 25.39ms b 9.77ms 4 23.44ms c 7.81ms 5 21.48ms d 5.86ms 6 19.53ms e 3.91ms 7 17.58ms f 1.95ms
page 88 8. 18-bit timer/counter (tc1) 8.3 function TMP86FS23UG figure 8-5 timing chart for the frequency measurement mode (window gate pulse falling interrupt) 1 0 2 3 5 4 1 2 3 56 4 6 0 ecin pin input and-ed pulse (internal signal) inttc1 interrupt window gate pulse up counter tc1cr1 read clear ta tb ta 0 13 12 11 0 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ecin pin input inttc1 interrupt window gate pulse up counter tc1cr1 tc1cr2 a) tc1cr2 = "0" a) tc1cr2 = "1" read clear ta tb ta
page 89 TMP86FS23UG 9. 8-bit timercounter (tc3, tc4) 9.1 configuration figure 9-1 8-bit timercouter 3, 4 8-bit up-counter decode en a y b s a b y c d e f g h s a y b s s a y b toggle q set clear 8-bit up-counter a b y c d e f g h s decode en toggle q set clear pwm mode pdo, ppg mode pdo mode pwm, ppg mode pwm mode pwm mode 16-bit mode 16-bit mode 16-bit mode 16-bit mode timer, event counter mode overflow overflow timer, event couter mode 16-bit mode clear clear fc/2 7 fc/2 5 fc/2 3 fc/2 fc fc/2 7 fc/2 5 fc/2 3 fc/2 fc pdo, pwm, ppg mode pdo, pwm mode 16-bit mode fc/2 11 or fs/2 3 fc/2 11 or fs/2 3 fs fs tc4cr tc3cr ttreg4 pwreg4 ttreg3 pwreg3 tc3 pin tc4 pin tc4s tc3s inttc3 interrupt request inttc4 interrupt request tff4 tff3 pdo 4/pwm 4/ ppg 4 pin pdo 3/pwm 3/ pin tc3ck tc4ck tc3m tc3s tff3 tc4m tc4s tff4 timer f/f4 timer f/f3
page 90 9. 8-bit timercounter (tc3, tc4) 9.1 configuration TMP86FS23UG 9.2 timercounter control the timercounter 3 is controlled by the timercounter 3 control register (tc3cr) and two 8-bit timer registers (ttreg3, pwreg3). note 1: do not change the timer register (t treg3) setting while the timer is running. note 2: do not change the timer register (pwreg3) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit pwm modes while the timer is running. note 1: fc: high-frequency clock [hz] fs: low-frequency clock[hz] note 2: do not change the tc3m, tc3ck and tff3 settings while the timer is running. note 3: to stop the timer operation (tc3s= 1 0), do not change the tc3m, tc3ck and tff3 settings. to start the timer opera- tion (tc3s= 0 1), tc3m, tc3ck and tff3 can be programmed. note 4: to use the timercounter in the 16-bit mode, set th e operating mode by programming tc4cr, where tc3m must be fixed to 011. note 5: to use the timercounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming tc3ck. set the timer start control and timer f/f control by programming tc4 cr and tc4cr, respectively. note 6: the operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. for the detailed descriptions, see table 9-1 and table 9-2. timercounter 3 timer register ttreg3 (001ch) r/w 76543210 (initial value: 1111 1111) pwreg3 (0028h) r/w 76543210 (initial value: 1111 1111) timercounter 3 control register tc3cr (0018h) 76543210 tff3 tc3ck tc3s tc3m (initial value: 0000 0000) tff3 time f/f3 control 0: 1: clear set r/w tc3ck operating clock selection [hz] normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2 sleep1/2 mode r/w dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 000 fc/2 11 fs/2 3 fs/2 3 001 fc/2 7 fc/2 7 ? 010 fc/2 5 fc/2 5 ? 011 fc/2 3 fc/2 3 ? 100 fs fs fs 101 fc/2 fc/2 ? 110 fc fc fc (note 8) 111 tc3 pin input tc3s tc3 start control 0: 1: operation stop and counter clear operation start r/w tc3m tc3m operating mode select 000: 001: 010: 011: 1**: 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (pdo) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (pwm) output mode 16-bit mode (each mode is selectable with tc4m.) reserved r/w
page 91 TMP86FS23UG note 7: the timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. for the detailed descriptions, see table 9- 3. note 8: the operating clock fc in t he slow or sleep mode can be used only as the high-frequency warm-up mode.
page 92 9. 8-bit timercounter (tc3, tc4) 9.1 configuration TMP86FS23UG the timercounter 4 is controlled by the timercounter 4 control register (tc4cr) and two 8-bit timer registers (ttreg4 and pwreg4). note 1: do not change the timer register (t treg4) setting while the timer is running. note 2: do not change the timer register (pwreg4) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit pwm modes while the timer is running. note 1: fc: high-frequency clock [hz] fs: low-frequency clock [hz] note 2: do not change the tc4m, tc4ck and tff4 settings while the timer is running. note 3: to stop the timer operation (tc4s= 1 0), do not change the tc4m, tc4ck and tff4 settings. to start the timer operation (tc4s= 0 1), tc4m, tc4ck and tff4 can be programmed. note 4: when tc4m= 1** (upper byte in the 16-bit mode), the sour ce clock becomes the tc4 over flow signal regardless of the tc3ck setting. note 5: to use the timercounter in the 16-bit mode, select the operating mode by programming tc4m, where tc3cr must be set to 011. timercounter 4 timer register ttreg4 (001dh) r/w 76543210 (initial value: 1111 1111) pwreg4 (0029h) r/ w 76543210 (initial value: 1111 1111) timercounter 4 control register tc4cr (0019h) 76543210 tff4 tc4ck tc4s tc4m (initial value: 0000 0000) tff4 timer f/f4 control 0: 1: clear set r/w tc4ck operating clock selection [hz] normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2 sleep1/2 mode r/w dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 000 fc/2 11 fs/2 3 fs/2 3 001 fc/2 7 fc/2 7 ? 010 fc/2 5 fc/2 5 ? 011 fc/2 3 fc/2 3 ? 100 fs fs fs 101 fc/2 fc/2 ? 110 fc fc ? 111 tc4 pin input tc4s tc4 start control 0: 1: operation stop and counter clear operation start r/w tc4m tc4m operating mode select 000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111: 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (pdo) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (pwm) output mode reserved 16-bit timer/event counter mode warm-up counter mode 16-bit pulse width modulation (pwm) output mode 16-bit ppg mode r/w
page 93 TMP86FS23UG note 6: to the timercounter in the 16-bit mode, select the so urce clock by programming tc3cr. set the timer start control and timer f/f control by prog ramming tc4s and tff4, respectively. note 7: the operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. for the detailed descriptions, see table 9-1 and table 9-2. note 8: the timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. for the detailed descriptions, see table 9- 3. note 1: for 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm- up counter, 16-bit pwm and 16-bit ppg), set its source clock on lower bit (tc3ck). note 2: : available source clock table 9-1 operating mode and selectable source clock (normal1/2 and idle1/2 modes) operating mode fc/2 11 or fs/2 3 fc/2 7 fc/2 5 fc/2 3 fs fc/2 fc tc3 pin input tc4 pin input 8-bit timer ??? ????? 8-bit event counter ??????? 8-bit pdo ??? ????? 8-bit pwm ?????? ?? 16-bit timer ??? ????? 16-bit event counter ??????? ? warm-up counter ???? ???? 16-bit pwm ??????? ? 16-bit ppg ??? ??? ? table 9-2 operating mode an d selectable source clock (slow1/2 and sleep1/2 modes) operating mode fc/2 11 or fs/2 3 fc/2 7 fc/2 5 fc/2 3 fs fc/2 fc tc3 pin input tc4 pin input 8-bit timer ???????? 8-bit event counter ??????? ? 8-bit pdo ???????? 8-bit pwm ??? ???? 16-bit timer ???????? 16-bit event counter ??????? ? warm-up counter ?????? ?? 16-bit pwm ??? ?? ? 16-bit ppg ?????? ? note1: note2: for 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit pwm and 16-bit ppg), set its source clock on lower bit (tc3ck). : available source clock
page 94 9. 8-bit timercounter (tc3, tc4) 9.1 configuration TMP86FS23UG note: n = 3 to 4 table 9-3 constraints on register values being compared operating mode register value 8-bit timer/event counter 1 (ttregn) 255 8-bit pdo 1 (ttregn) 255 8-bit pwm 2 (pwregn) 254 16-bit timer/event counter 1 (ttreg4, 3) 65535 warm-up counter 256 (ttreg4, 3) 65535 16-bit pwm 2 (pwreg4, 3) 65534 16-bit ppg 1 (pwreg4, 3) < (ttreg4, 3) 65535 and (pwreg4, 3) + 1 < (ttreg4, 3)
page 95 TMP86FS23UG 9.3 function the timercounter 3 and 4 have the 8-bit timer, 8-bit ev ent counter, 8-bit programmable divider output (pdo), 8- bit pulse width modulation (pwm) output modes. the time rcounter 3 and 4 (tc3, 4) are cascadable to form a 16- bit timer. the 16-bit timer has the operat ing modes such as the 16-bit timer, 16-bit event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit pulse width modulation (pwm) output and 16-bit programmable pulse generation (ppg) modes. 9.3.1 8-bit timer mode (tc3 and 4) in the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. when a match between the up-counter and the timer register j (ttregj) value is detected, an inttcj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. after being cl eared, the up-counter restarts counting. note 1: in the timer mode, fix tcjcr to 0. if not fixed, the pdoj, pwmj and ppgj pins may output pulses. note 2: in the timer mode, do not change the ttregj setting while the timer is running. si nce ttregj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in ttregj is in effect immediately after the programming. therefore, if ttregi is changed while the timer is r unning, an expected operation may not be obtained. note 3: j = 3, 4 table 9-4 source clock for timercounter 3, 4 (internal clock) source clock resolution repeated cycle normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2, sleep1/2 mode fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 fc/2 11 [hz] fs/2 3 [hz] fs/2 3 [hz] 128 s244.14 s 32.6 ms 62.3 ms fc/2 7 fc/2 7 ?8 s ? 2.0 ms ? fc/2 5 fc/2 5 ?2 s ? 510 s? fc/2 3 fc/2 3 ? 500 ns ? 127.5 s? example :setting the timer mode with source clock fc/2 7 hz and generating an interrupt 80 s later (timercounter4, fc = 16.0 mhz) ld (ttreg4), 0ah : sets the timer register (80 s 2 7 /fc = 0ah). di set (eirh). 4 : enables inttc4 interrupt. ei ld (tc4cr), 00010000b : sets the operating cock to fc/2 7 , and 8-bit timer mode. ld (tc4cr), 00011000b : starts tc4.
page 96 9. 8-bit timercounter (tc3, tc4) 9.1 configuration TMP86FS23UG figure 9-2 8-bit timer mode timing chart (tc4) 9.3.2 8-bit event counter mode (tc3, 4) in the 8-bit event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge of the input pulse to the tcj pin. when a match between the up-counter and the ttregj valu e is detected, an inttcj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. after being cleared, the up-counter restarts counti ng at the falling edge of the input pulse to the tcj pin. two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the tcj pin. therefore, a maximum freque ncy to be supplied is fc/2 4 hz in the normal1/2 or idle1/2 mode, and fs/2 4 hz in the slow1/2 or sleep1/2 mode. note 1: in the event counter mode, fix tcjcr to 0. if not fixed, the pdoj, pwmj and ppgj pins may output pulses. note 2: in the event counter mode, do not change the ttre gj setting while the timer is running. since ttregj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in ttregj is in effect immediately after the programming. therefore, if ttregi is changed whil e the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. note 3: j = 3, 4 figure 9-3 8-bit event count er mode timing chart (tc4) 9.3.3 8-bit programmable divi der output (pdo) mode (tc3, 4) this mode is used to generate a pu lse with a 50% duty cycle from the pdoj pin. in the pdo mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. when a match between the up-counter and the ttregj value is detected , the logic level output from the pdoj pin is switched to the opposite state and the up-counter is cleared. the inttcj interrupt request is generated at the time. the logic state opposite to the timer f/fj logic level is output from the pdoj pin. an arbitrary value can be set to the timer f/fj by tcjcr. upon reset, the timer f/fj value is initialized to 0. to use the programmable divider output, set the output latch of the i/o port to 1. 1 2 3 n-1 n 0 1 n-1 n 2 0 1 2 0 n ? internal source clock counter match detect counter clear match detect counter clear tc4cr ttreg4 inttc4 interrupt request 1 0 2 n-1 n 0 1 2 0 n ? counter match detect counter clear n-1 n 2 0 1 match detect counter clear tc4cr ttreg4 inttc4 interrupt request tc4 pin input
page 97 TMP86FS23UG note 1: in the programmable divider output mode, do not change the ttregj setting while the timer is running. since ttregj is not in the shift register configur ation in the programmable divider output mode, the new value programmed in ttregj is in effect immediatel y after programming. therefore, if ttregi is changed while the timer is running, an ex pected operation may not be obtained. note 2: when the timer is stopped during pdo output, the pdoj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. to change the output status, program tcjcr after the timer is stopped. do not change the tcjcr setting upon stopping of the timer. example: fixing the pdoj pin to the high level when the timercounter is stopped clr (tcjcr).3: stops the timer. clr (tcjcr).7: sets the pdoj pin to the high level. note 3: j = 3, 4 example :generating 1024 hz pulse using tc4 (fc = 16.0 mhz) setting port ld (ttreg4), 3dh : 1/1024 2 7 /fc 2 = 3dh ld (tc4cr), 00010001b : sets the operating clock to fc/2 7 , and 8-bit pdo mode. ld (tc4cr), 00011001b : starts tc4.
page 98 9. 8-bit timercounter (tc3, tc4) 9.1 configuration TMP86FS23UG figure 9-4 8-bit pdo mode timing chart (tc4) 12 0 n 0 n 0 n 0 n 0 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 0 n ? internal source clock counter match detect match detect match detect match detect held at the level when the timer is stopped set f/f write of "1" tc4cr tc4cr ttreg4 timer f/f4 pdo 4 pin inttc4 interrupt request
page 99 TMP86FS23UG 9.3.4 8-bit pulse wi dth modulation (pwm) output mode (tc3, 4) this mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (pwm) signals with up to 8 bits of resolution. the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. when a match between the up-counter and the pwregj value is detected, the logic level output from the timer f/fj is switched to the opposite state. the counter continues counting. the logic level output from the timer f/fj is switched to the opposite state again by the up-co unter overflow, and the counter is cleared. the inttcj interrupt request is generated at this time. since the initial value can be set to the timer f/fj by tcjcr, positive and negative pulses can be gen- erated. upon reset, the tim er f/fj is cleared to 0. (the logic level output from the pwmj pin is the opposite to the timer f/fj logic level.) since pwregj in the pwm mode is se rially connected to the shift regist er, the value set to pwregj can be changed while the timer is running. the value set to pwregj during a run of the timer is shifted by the inttcj interrupt request and loaded into pwregj. while the timer is stopped, the value is shifted immedi- ately after the programming of pwre gj. if executing the read instruction to pwregj during pwm output, the value in the shift register is read, but not the valu e set in pwregj. therefore, after writing to pwregj, the reading data of pwregj is previo us value until inttcj is generated. for the pin used for pwm output, the output latch of the i/o port must be set to 1. note 1: in the pwm mode, program the timer register pw regj immediately after the inttcj interrupt request is generated (normally in the inttcj interrupt service r outine.) if the programming of pwregj and the inter- rupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of the pulse different from the programmed value until the next inttcj interrupt request is generated. note 2: when the timer is stopped during pwm output, the pwmj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. to change the output status, program tcjcr after the timer is stopped. do not change the tcjcr upon stopping of the timer. example: fixing the pwmj pin to the high level when the timercounter is stopped clr (tcjcr).3: stops the timer. clr (tcjcr).7: sets the pwmj pin to the high level. note 3: to enter the stop mode during pwm output, stop the timer and then enter the stop mode. if the stop mode is entered without stopping the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is out- put from the pwmj pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the stop mode. note 4: j = 3, 4 table 9-5 pwm output mode source clock resolution repeated cycle normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2, sleep1/2 mode fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 fc/2 11 [hz] fs/2 3 [hz] fs/2 3 [hz] 128 s244.14 s 32.8 ms 62.5 ms fc/2 7 fc/2 7 ?8 s?2.05 ms? fc/2 5 fc/2 5 ?2 s ? 512 s? fc/2 3 fc/2 3 ? 500 ns ? 128 s? fs fs fs 30.5 s30.5 s 7.81 ms 7.81 ms fc/2 fc/2 ? 125 ns ? 32 s? fc fc ? 62.5 ns ? 16 s?
page 100 9. 8-bit timercounter (tc3, tc4) 9.1 configuration TMP86FS23UG figure 9-5 8-bit pwm mo de timing chart (tc4) 1 0 n n+1 ff 0 n n+1 ff 0 1 m m+1 ff 0 1 1 p n ? internal source clock counter write to pwreg4 write to pwreg4 m p m p n ? shift registar shift shift shift shift match detect match detect one cycle period match detect match detect n m p n tc4cr tc4cr pwreg4 timer f/f4 pwm 4 pin inttc4 interrupt request
page 101 TMP86FS23UG 9.3.5 16-bit timer mode (tc3 and 4) in the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. the timercounter 3 and 4 are cascad- able to form a 16-bit timer. when a match between the up-counter and the timer regi ster (ttreg3, ttreg4) valu e is detected after the timer is started by setting tc4cr to 1, an inttc 4 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. after being cleared, the up-counter continues counting. pr ogram the upper byte and lower byte in this order in the timer register. (programming only the uppe r or lower byte should not be attempted.) note 1: in the timer mode, fix tcjcr to 0. if not fixed, the pdoj , pwmj , and ppgj pins may output a pulse. note 2: in the timer mode, do not change the ttregj setting while the timer is running. si nce ttregj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in ttregj is in effect immediately after programming of ttregj. therefore, if ttreg j is changed while the time r is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. note 3: j = 3, 4 figure 9-6 16-bit timer m ode timing chart (tc3 and tc4) table 9-6 source clock for 16-bit timer mode source clock resolution repeated cycle normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2, sleep1/2 mode fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 fc/2 11 fs/2 3 fs/2 3 128 s244.14 s 8.39 s 16 s fc/2 7 fc/2 7 ?8 s ? 524.3 ms ? fc/2 5 fc/2 5 ?2 s ? 131.1 ms ? fc/2 3 fc/2 3 ? 500 ns ? 32.8 ms ? example :setting the timer mode with source clock fc/2 7 hz, and generating an interrupt 300 ms later (fc = 16.0 mhz) ldw (ttreg3), 927ch : sets the timer register (300 ms 2 7 /fc = 927ch). di set (eirh). 4 : enables inttc4 interrupt. ei ld (tc3cr), 13h :sets the operating cock to fc/2 7 , and 16-bit timer mode (lower byte). ld (tc4cr), 04h : sets the 16-bit timer mode (upper byte). ld (tc4cr), 0ch : starts the timer. 1 0 2 3 mn-1 mn 0 1 mn-1 mn 2 0 1 2 0 n ? m ? internal source clock counter match detect counter clear match detect counter clear tc4cr ttreg3 (lower byte) inttc4 interrupt request ttreg4 (upper byte)
page 102 9. 8-bit timercounter (tc3, tc4) 9.1 configuration TMP86FS23UG 9.3.6 16-bit event c ounter mode (tc3 and 4) 9.3.7 16-bit pulse width modulatio n (pwm) output mode (tc3 and 4) this mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (pwm) signals with up to 16 bits of resolution. the timercounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form the 16-bit pwm signal generator. the counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. when a match between the up-counter and the timer register (pwreg3, pwreg4) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer f/f4 is switched to the opposite state. the counter continues counting. the logic level output from the timer f/f4 is switched to the opposite state again by the counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. the inttc4 interrupt is generated at this time. two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the tc3 pin. therefore, a maxi- mum frequency to be supplied is fc/2 4 hz in the normal1 or idle1 mode, and fs/2 4 to in the slow1/2 or sleep1/2 mode. since the initial value can be set to the timer f/f4 by tc4cr, positive and negative pulses can be generated. upon reset, the timer f/f4 is cleared to 0. (the logic level output from the pwm 4 pin is the opposite to the timer f/f4 logic level.) since pwreg4 and 3 in the pwm mode are serially connected to the shift register, the values set to pwreg4 and 3 can be changed while the timer is runni ng. the values set to pwreg4 and 3 during a run of the timer are shifted by the inttcj interrupt request and loaded into pwreg4 and 3. while the timer is stopped, the values are shifted i mmediately after the programming of pwreg4 and 3. set the lower byte (pwreg3) and upper byte (pwreg3) in this order to program pwreg4 and 3. (programming only the lower or upper byte of the register should not be attempted.) if executing the read instruction to pwreg4 and 3 during pwm output, the values set in the shift register is read, but not the values set in pwreg4 and 3. therefore, after writing to the pwreg4 and 3, reading data of pwreg4 and 3 is previous value until inttc4 is generated. for the pin used for pwm output, the output latch of the i/o port must be set to 1. note 1: in the pwm mode, program the timer register pwreg4 and 3 immediately after the inttc4 interrupt request is generated (normally in the inttc4 interrupt service routine.) if the programming of pwregj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of pulse different from the programmed value until the next inttc4 interrupt request is generated. note 2: when the timer is stopped during pwm output, the pwm 4 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. to change the output status, program tc4cr after the timer is stopped. do not program tc4cr upon stopping of the timer. example: fixing the pwm 4 pin to the high level when the timercounter is stopped in the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge to the tc3 pin. the timercounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to fo rm a 16-bit event counter. when a match between the up-counter and the timer register (ttreg3, ttreg4) value is detected after the timer is started by setting tc4cr to 1, an inttc4 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. after being cleared, the up-counter rest arts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the tc3 pin. two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the tc3 pin. therefore, a maximum freque ncy to be supplied is fc/2 4 hz in the normal1 or idle1 mode, and fs/2 4 in the slow1/2 or sleep1/2 mode. program the lower by te (ttreg3), and upper byte (ttreg4) in this order in the timer register. (programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.) note 1: note 2: note 3: in the event counter mode, fix tcjcr to 0. if not fixed, the pdoj, pwmj and ppgj pins may output pulses. in the event counter mode, do not change the ttregj setti ng while the timer is running. since ttregj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in ttregj is in effect imme- diately after the programming. therefore, if ttregj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. j = 3, 4
page 103 TMP86FS23UG clr (tc4cr).3: stops the timer. clr (tc4cr).7 : sets the pwm 4 pin to the high level. note 3: to enter the stop mode, stop the timer and then enter the stop mode. if the stop mode is entered with- out stopping of the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is select ed as the source clock, a pulse is output from the pwm 4 pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the stop mode. table 9-7 16-bit pwm output mode source clock resolution repeated cycle normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2, sleep1/2 mode fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 fc/2 11 fs/2 3 [hz] fs/2 3 [hz] 128 s244.14 s 8.39 s 16 s fc/2 7 fc/2 7 ?8 s ? 524.3 ms ? fc/2 5 fc/2 5 ?2 s ? 131.1 ms ? fc/2 3 fc/2 3 ? 500ns ? 32.8 ms ? fs fs fs 30.5 s30.5 s2 s 2 s fc/2 fc/2 ? 125 ns ? 8.2 ms ? fc fc ? 62.5 ns ? 4.1 ms ? example :generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 32.768 ms (fc = 16.0 mhz) setting ports ldw (pwreg3), 07d0h : sets the pulse width. ld (tc3cr), 33h : sets the operating clock to fc/2 3 , and 16-bit pwm output mode (lower byte). ld (tc4cr), 056h : sets tff4 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit pwm signal generation mode (upper byte). ld (tc4cr), 05eh : starts the timer.
page 104 9. 8-bit timercounter (tc3, tc4) 9.1 configuration TMP86FS23UG figure 9-7 16-bit pwm m ode timing chart (tc3 and tc4) 1 0 an an+1 ffff 0 an an+1 ffff 0 1 bm bm+1 ffff 0 bm cp b c 1 1 cp n a an ? ? ? internal source clock 16-bit shift register shift shift shift shift counter match detect match detect one cycle period match detect match detect an bm cp an m p tc4cr tc4cr pwreg3 (lower byte) timer f/f4 pwm 4 pin inttc4 interrupt request pwreg4 (upper byte) write to pwreg4 write to pwreg4 write to pwreg3 write to pwreg3
page 105 TMP86FS23UG 9.3.8 16-bit programmable pulse generate (ppg) ou tput mode (tc3 and 4) this mode is used to generate pulses with up to 16- bits of resolution. the timer counter 3 and 4 are cascad- able to enter the 16-bit ppg mode. the counter counts up using the inte rnal clock or external clock. when a match between the up-counter and the timer register (pwreg3, pwreg4 ) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer f/f4 is switched to the opposite state. the counter continues counting. the logic level output from the timer f/f4 is switched to the opposite state again when a match betw een the up-counter and th e timer register (ttreg3, ttreg4) value is detected, and the counter is cleared. the inttc4 interrupt is generated at this time. since the initial value can be set to the timer f/f4 by tc4cr, positive and negative pulses can be generated. upon reset, the timer f/f4 is cleared to 0. (the logic level output from the ppg 4 pin is the opposite to the timer f/f4.) set the lower byte and upper byte in this order to program the timer register. (ttreg3 ttreg4, pwreg3 pwreg4) (programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.) for ppg output, set the output latch of the i/o port to 1. note 1: in the ppg mode, do not change the pwregi and ttregi settings while the timer is running. since pwregi and ttregi are not in the shift register c onfiguration in the ppg mode, the new values pro- grammed in pwregi and ttregi are in effect immediately after progra mming pwregi and ttregi. therefore, if pwregi and ttregi are changed whil e the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. note 2: when the timer is stopped during ppg output, the ppg 4 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. to change the output status, program tc4cr after the timer is stopped. do not change tc4cr upon stopping of the timer. example: fixing the ppg 4 pin to the high level when the timercounter is stopped clr (tc4cr).3: stops the timer clr (tc4cr).7: sets the ppg 4 pin to the high level note 3: i = 3, 4 two machine cycles are required for the high- or low- level pulse input to the tc3 pin. therefore, a maxi- mum frequency to be supplied is fc/2 4 hz in the normal1 or idle1 mode, and fc/2 4 to in the slow1/2 or sleep1/2 mode. example :generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 16.385 ms (fc = 16.0 mhz) setting ports ldw (pwreg3), 07d0h : sets the pulse width. ldw (ttreg3), 8002h : sets the cycle period. ld (tc3cr), 33h : sets the operating clock to fc/2 3 , and16-bit ppg mode (lower byte). ld (tc4cr), 057h : sets tff4 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit ppg mode (upper byte). ld (tc4cr), 05fh : starts the timer.
page 106 9. 8-bit timercounter (tc3, tc4) 9.1 configuration TMP86FS23UG figure 9-8 16-bit ppg mode timing chart (tc3 and tc40) 1 0 mn mn+1 qr-1 mn qr-1 1 mn mn+1 mn+1 0 qr 0 qr 1 0 internal source clock counter write of "0" match detect match detect match detect mn mn mn match detect match detect ? n m ? ? r q ? held at the level when the timer stops f/f clear tc4cr tc4cr pwreg3 (lower byte) timer f/f4 ppg 4 pin inttc4 interrupt request pwreg4 (upper byte) ttreg3 (lower byte) ttreg4 (upper byte)
page 107 TMP86FS23UG 9.3.9 warm-up counter mode in this mode, the warm-up period time is obtained to assure oscillation stability when the system clocking is switched between the high-frequency and low-frequency. the timer counter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form a 16-bit timercouter. the warm-up counter mode has two types of mode; switching from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and vice-versa. note 1: in the warm-up counter mode, fi x tcicr to 0. if not fixed, the pdoi , pwmi and ppgi pins may output pulses. note 2: in the warm-up counter mode, only upper 8 bits of the timer register ttreg4 and 3 are used for match detection and lower 8 bits are not used. note 3: i = 3, 4 9.3.9.1 low-frequency warm-up counter mode (normal1 normal2 slow2 slow1) in this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the low-frequency clock fs to oscillation stability is obtained. before starting the timer, set syscr2 to 1 to oscillate the low-frequency clock. when a match between the up-counter and the timer regist er (ttreg4, 3) value is detected after the timer is started by setting tc4cr to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the inttc4 interrupt request. after stopping the timer in the inttc4 inte rrupt service routine, set syscr2 to 1 to switch the system clock fr om the high-frequency to low-frequenc y, and then clear of syscr2 to 0 to stop the high-frequency clock. table 9-8 setting time of low-frequen cy warm-up counter mode (fs = 32.768 khz) maximum time setting (ttreg4, 3 = 0100h) maximum time setting (ttreg4, 3 = ff00h) 7.81 ms 1.99 s example :after check ing low-frequency clock oscillation stability with tc4 and 3, switching to the slow1 mode set (syscr2).6 : syscr2 1 ld (tc3cr), 43h : sets tff3=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode. ld (tc4cr), 05h : sets tff4=0, and warm-up counter mode. ld (ttreg3), 8000h : sets the warm-up time. (the warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) di : imf 0 set (eirh). 4 : enables the inttc4. ei : imf 1 set (tc4cr).3 : starts tc4 and 3. : : pinttc4: clr (tc4cr).3 : stops tc4 and 3. set (syscr2).5 : syscr2 1 (switches the system clock to the low-frequency clock.) clr (syscr2).7 : syscr2 0 (stops the high-frequency clock.) reti : : vinttc4: dw pinttc4 : inttc4 vector table
page 108 9. 8-bit timercounter (tc3, tc4) 9.1 configuration TMP86FS23UG 9.3.9.2 high-frequency warm-up counter mode (slow1 slow2 normal2 normal1) in this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the high-frequency clock fc to the oscillation sta- bility is obtained. before starting the timer, set sy scr2 to 1 to oscillat e the high-frequency clock. when a match between the up-counter and the timer regist er (ttreg4, 3) value is detected after the timer is started by setting tc4cr to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the inttc4 interrupt request. after stopping the timer in the inttc4 inte rrupt service routine, clear syscr2 to 0 to switch the system clock from the low-frequency to high-frequency, and then syscr2 to 0 to stop the low-frequency clock. table 9-9 setting time in high-frequency warm-up counter mode minimum time (ttreg4, 3 = 0100h) maximum time (ttreg4, 3 = ff00h) 16 s 4.08 ms example :after check ing high-frequency clock oscillation stability with tc4 and 3, switching to the normal1 mode set (syscr2).7 : syscr2 1 ld (tc3cr), 63h : sets tff3=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode. ld (tc4cr), 05h : sets tff4=0, and warm-up counter mode. ld (ttreg3), 0f800h : sets the warm-up time. (the warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) di : imf 0 set (eirh). 4 : enables the inttc4. ei : imf 1 set (tc4cr).3 : starts the tc4 and 3. : : pinttc4: clr (tc4cr).3 : stops the tc4 and 3. clr (syscr2).5 : syscr2 0 (switches the system clock to the high-frequency clock.) clr (syscr2).6 : syscr2 0 (stops the low-frequency clock.) reti : : vinttc4: dw pinttc4 : inttc4 vector table
page 109 TMP86FS23UG 10. 8-bit timercounter (tc5, tc6) 10.1 configuration figure 10-1 8-bit timercouter 5, 6 8-bit up-counter decode en a y b s a b y c d e f g h s a y b s s a y b toggle q set clear 8-bit up-counter a b y c d e f g h s decode en toggle q set clear pwm mode pdo, ppg mode pdo mode pwm, ppg mode pwm mode pwm mode 16-bit mode 16-bit mode 16-bit mode 16-bit mode timer, event counter mode overflow overflow timer, event couter mode 16-bit mode clear clear fc/2 7 fc/2 5 fc/2 3 fc/2 fc fc/2 7 fc/2 5 fc/2 3 fc/2 fc pdo, pwm, ppg mode pdo, pwm mode 16-bit mode fc/2 11 or fs/2 3 fc/2 11 or fs/2 3 fs fs tc6cr tc5cr ttreg6 pwreg6 ttreg5 pwreg5 tc5 pin tc6 pin tc6s tc5s inttc5 interrupt request inttc6 interrupt request tff6 tff5 pdo 6/pwm 6/ ppg 6 pin pdo 5/pwm 5/ pin tc5ck tc6ck tc5m tc5s tff5 tc6m tc6s tff6 timer f/f6 timer f/f5
page 110 10. 8-bit timercounter (tc5, tc6) 10.1 configuration TMP86FS23UG 10.2 timercounter control the timercounter 5 is controlled by the timercounter 5 control register (tc5cr) and two 8-bit timer registers (ttreg5, pwreg5). note 1: do not change the timer register (t treg5) setting while the timer is running. note 2: do not change the timer register (pwreg5) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit pwm modes while the timer is running. note 1: fc: high-frequency clock [hz] fs: low-frequency clock[hz] note 2: do not change the tc5m, tc5ck and tff5 settings while the timer is running. note 3: to stop the timer operation (tc5s= 1 0), do not change the tc5m, tc5ck and tff5 settings. to start the timer opera- tion (tc5s= 0 1), tc5m, tc5ck and tff5 can be programmed. note 4: to use the timercounter in the 16-bit mode, set th e operating mode by programming tc6cr, where tc5m must be fixed to 011. note 5: to use the timercounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming tc5ck. set the timer start control and timer f/f control by programming tc6 cr and tc6cr, respectively. note 6: the operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. for the detailed descriptions, see table 10-1 and table 10-2. timercounter 5 timer register ttreg5 (001eh) r/w 76543210 (initial value: 1111 1111) pwreg5 (002ah) r/w 76543210 (initial value: 1111 1111) timercounter 5 control register tc5cr (001ah) 76543210 tff5 tc5ck tc5s tc5m (initial value: 0000 0000) tff5 time f/f5 control 0: 1: clear set r/w tc5ck operating clock selection [hz] normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2 sleep1/2 mode r/w dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 000 fc/2 11 fs/2 3 fs/2 3 001 fc/2 7 fc/2 7 ? 010 fc/2 5 fc/2 5 ? 011 fc/2 3 fc/2 3 ? 100 fs fs fs 101 fc/2 fc/2 ? 110 fc fc fc (note 8) 111 tc5 pin input tc5s tc5 start control 0: 1: operation stop and counter clear operation start r/w tc5m tc5m operating mode select 000: 001: 010: 011: 1**: 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (pdo) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (pwm) output mode 16-bit mode (each mode is selectable with tc6m.) reserved r/w
page 111 TMP86FS23UG note 7: the timer register settings are limited depending on t he timer operating mode. for the detailed descriptions, see table 10- 3. note 8: the operating clock fc in t he slow or sleep mode can be used only as the high-frequency warm-up mode.
page 112 10. 8-bit timercounter (tc5, tc6) 10.1 configuration TMP86FS23UG the timercounter 6 is controlled by the timercounter 6 control register (tc6cr) and two 8-bit timer registers (ttreg6 and pwreg6). note 1: do not change the timer register (t treg6) setting while the timer is running. note 2: do not change the timer register (pwreg6) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit pwm modes while the timer is running. note 1: fc: high-frequency clock [hz] fs: low-frequency clock [hz] note 2: do not change the tc6m, tc6ck and tff6 settings while the timer is running. note 3: to stop the timer operation (tc6s= 1 0), do not change the tc6m, tc6ck and tff6 settings. to start the timer operation (tc6s= 0 1), tc6m, tc6ck and tff6 can be programmed. note 4: when tc6m= 1** (upper byte in the 16-bit mode), the sour ce clock becomes the tc6 over flow signal regardless of the tc5ck setting. note 5: to use the timercounter in the 16-bit mode, select the operating mode by programming tc6m, where tc5cr must be set to 011. timercounter 6 timer register ttreg6 (001fh) r/w 76543210 (initial value: 1111 1111) pwreg6 (002bh) r/w 76543210 (initial value: 1111 1111) timercounter 6 control register tc6cr (001bh) 76543210 tff6 tc6ck tc6s tc6m (initial value: 0000 0000) tff6 timer f/f6 control 0: 1: clear set r/w tc6ck operating clock selection [hz] normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2 sleep1/2 mode r/w dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 000 fc/2 11 fs/2 3 fs/2 3 001 fc/2 7 fc/2 7 ? 010 fc/2 5 fc/2 5 ? 011 fc/2 3 fc/2 3 ? 100 fs fs fs 101 fc/2 fc/2 ? 110 fc fc ? 111 tc6 pin input tc6s tc6 start control 0: 1: operation stop and counter clear operation start r/w tc6m tc6m operating mode select 000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111: 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (pdo) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (pwm) output mode reserved 16-bit timer/event counter mode warm-up counter mode 16-bit pulse width modulation (pwm) output mode 16-bit ppg mode r/w
page 113 TMP86FS23UG note 6: to the timercounter in the 16-bit mode, select the so urce clock by programming tc5cr. set the timer start control and timer f/f control by prog ramming tc6s and tff6, respectively. note 7: the operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. for the detailed descriptions, see table 10-1 and table 10-2. note 8: the timer register settings are limited depending on t he timer operating mode. for the detailed descriptions, see table 10- 3. note 9: to use the pdo, pwm or ppg mode, a pulse is not output from the timer output pin when tc1cr2 is set to 1. to output a pulse from the timer output pin, clear tc1cr2 to 0. note 1: for 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm- up counter, 16-bit pwm and 16-bit ppg), set its source clock on lower bit (tc5ck). note 2: : available source clock table 10-1 operating mode and selectable source clock (normal1/2 and idle1/2 modes) operating mode fc/2 11 or fs/2 3 fc/2 7 fc/2 5 fc/2 3 fs fc/2 fc tc5 pin input tc6 pin input 8-bit timer ??? ????? 8-bit event counter ??????? 8-bit pdo ??? ????? 8-bit pwm ?????? ?? 16-bit timer ??? ????? 16-bit event counter ??????? ? warm-up counter ???? ???? 16-bit pwm ??????? ? 16-bit ppg ??? ??? ? table 10-2 operating mode an d selectable source clock (slow1/2 and sleep1/2 modes) operating mode fc/2 11 or fs/2 3 fc/2 7 fc/2 5 fc/2 3 fs fc/2 fc tc5 pin input tc6 pin input 8-bit timer ???????? 8-bit event counter ??????? ? 8-bit pdo ???????? 8-bit pwm ??? ???? 16-bit timer ???????? 16-bit event counter ??????? ? warm-up counter ?????? ?? 16-bit pwm ??? ?? ? 16-bit ppg ?????? ? note1: note2: for 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit pwm and 16-bit ppg), set its source clock on lower bit (tc5ck). : available source clock
page 114 10. 8-bit timercounter (tc5, tc6) 10.1 configuration TMP86FS23UG note: n = 5 to 6 table 10-3 constraints on register values being compared operating mode register value 8-bit timer/event counter 1 (ttregn) 255 8-bit pdo 1 (ttregn) 255 8-bit pwm 2 (pwregn) 254 16-bit timer/event counter 1 (ttreg6, 5) 65535 warm-up counter 256 (ttreg6, 5) 65535 16-bit pwm 2 (pwreg6, 5) 65534 16-bit ppg 1 (pwreg6, 5) < (ttreg6, 5) 65535 and (pwreg6, 5) + 1 < (ttreg6, 5)
page 115 TMP86FS23UG 10.3 function the timercounter 5 and 6 have the 8-bit timer, 8-bit ev ent counter, 8-bit programmable divider output (pdo), 8- bit pulse width modulation (pwm) output modes. the time rcounter 5 and 6 (tc5, 6) are cascadable to form a 16- bit timer. the 16-bit timer has the operat ing modes such as the 16-bit timer, 16-bit event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit pulse width modulation (pwm) output and 16-bit programmable pulse generation (ppg) modes. 10.3.1 8-bit timer mode (tc5 and 6) in the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. when a match between the up-counter and the timer register j (ttregj) value is detected, an inttcj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. after being cl eared, the up-counter restarts counting. note 1: in the timer mode, fix tcjcr to 0. if not fixed, the pdoj, pwmj and ppgj pins may output pulses. note 2: in the timer mode, do not change the ttregj setting while the timer is running. si nce ttregj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in ttregj is in effect immediately after the programming. therefore, if ttregi is changed while the timer is r unning, an expected operation may not be obtained. note 3: j = 5, 6 table 10-4 source clock for timercounter 5, 6 (internal clock) source clock resolution repeated cycle normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2, sleep1/2 mode fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 fc/2 11 [hz] fs/2 3 [hz] fs/2 3 [hz] 128 s244.14 s 32.6 ms 62.3 ms fc/2 7 fc/2 7 ?8 s ? 2.0 ms ? fc/2 5 fc/2 5 ?2 s ? 510 s? fc/2 3 fc/2 3 ? 500 ns ? 127.5 s? example :setting the timer mode with source clock fc/2 7 hz and generating an interrupt 80 s later (timercounter6, fc = 16.0 mhz) ld (ttreg6), 0ah : sets the timer register (80 s 2 7 /fc = 0ah). di set (eirh). 5 : enables inttc6 interrupt. ei ld (tc6cr), 00010000b : sets the operating cock to fc/2 7 , and 8-bit timer mode. ld (tc6cr), 00011000b : starts tc6.
page 116 10. 8-bit timercounter (tc5, tc6) 10.1 configuration TMP86FS23UG figure 10-2 8-bit timer mode timing chart (tc6) 10.3.2 8-bit event counter mode (tc5, 6) in the 8-bit event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge of the input pulse to the tcj pin. when a match between the up-counter and the ttregj valu e is detected, an inttcj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. after being cleared, the up-counter restarts counti ng at the falling edge of the input pulse to the tcj pin. two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the tcj pin. therefore, a maximum freque ncy to be supplied is fc/2 4 hz in the normal1/2 or idle1/2 mode, and fs/2 4 hz in the slow1/2 or sleep1/2 mode. note 1: in the event counter mode, fix tcjcr to 0. if not fixed, the pdoj, pwmj and ppgj pins may output pulses. note 2: in the event counter mode, do not change the ttre gj setting while the timer is running. since ttregj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in ttregj is in effect immediately after the programming. therefore, if ttregi is changed whil e the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. note 3: j = 5, 6 figure 10-3 8-bit event counter mode ti ming chart (tc6) 10.3.3 8-bit programmable divi der output (pdo) mode (tc5, 6) this mode is used to generate a pu lse with a 50% duty cycle from the pdoj pin. in the pdo mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. when a match between the up-counter and the ttregj value is detected , the logic level output from the pdoj pin is switched to the opposite state and the up-counter is cleared. the inttcj interrupt request is generated at the time. the logic state opposite to the timer f/fj logic level is output from the pdoj pin. an arbitrary value can be set to the timer f/fj by tcjcr. upon reset, the timer f/fj value is initialized to 0. to use the programmable divider output, set the output latch of the i/o port to 1. 1 2 3 n-1 n 0 1 n-1 n 2 0 1 2 0 n ? internal source clock counter match detect counter clear match detect counter clear tc6cr ttreg6 inttc6 interrupt request 1 0 2 n-1 n 0 1 2 0 n ? counter match detect counter clear n-1 n 2 0 1 match detect counter clear tc6cr ttreg6 inttc6 interrupt request tc6 pin input
page 117 TMP86FS23UG note 1: in the programmable divider output mode, do not change the ttregj setting while the timer is running. since ttregj is not in the shift register configur ation in the programmable divider output mode, the new value programmed in ttregj is in effect immediatel y after programming. therefore, if ttregi is changed while the timer is running, an ex pected operation may not be obtained. note 2: when the timer is stopped during pdo output, the pdoj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. to change the output status, program tcjcr after the timer is stopped. do not change the tcjcr setting upon stopping of the timer. example: fixing the pdoj pin to the high level when the timercounter is stopped clr (tcjcr).3: stops the timer. clr (tcjcr).7: sets the pdoj pin to the high level. note 3: j = 5, 6 example :generating 1024 hz pulse using tc6 (fc = 16.0 mhz) setting port ld (ttreg6), 3dh : 1/1024 2 7 /fc 2 = 3dh ld (tc6cr), 00010001b : sets the operating clock to fc/2 7 , and 8-bit pdo mode. ld (tc6cr), 00011001b : starts tc6.
page 118 10. 8-bit timercounter (tc5, tc6) 10.1 configuration TMP86FS23UG figure 10-4 8-bi t pdo mode timing chart (tc6) 12 0 n 0 n 0 n 0 n 0 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 0 n ? internal source clock counter match detect match detect match detect match detect held at the level when the timer is stopped set f/f write of "1" tc6cr tc6cr ttreg6 timer f/f6 pdo 6 pin inttc6 interrupt request
page 119 TMP86FS23UG 10.3.4 8-bit pulse width modulat ion (pwm) output mode (tc5, 6) this mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (pwm) signals with up to 8 bits of resolution. the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. when a match between the up-counter and the pwregj value is detected, the logic level output from the timer f/fj is switched to the opposite state. the counter continues counting. the logic level output from the timer f/fj is switched to the opposite state again by the up-co unter overflow, and the counter is cleared. the inttcj interrupt request is generated at this time. since the initial value can be set to the timer f/fj by tcjcr, positive and negative pulses can be gen- erated. upon reset, the tim er f/fj is cleared to 0. (the logic level output from the pwmj pin is the opposite to the timer f/fj logic level.) since pwregj in the pwm mode is se rially connected to the shift regist er, the value set to pwregj can be changed while the timer is running. the value set to pwregj during a run of the timer is shifted by the inttcj interrupt request and loaded into pwregj. while the timer is stopped, the value is shifted immedi- ately after the programming of pwre gj. if executing the read instruction to pwregj during pwm output, the value in the shift register is read, but not the valu e set in pwregj. therefore, after writing to pwregj, the reading data of pwregj is previo us value until inttcj is generated. for the pin used for pwm output, the output latch of the i/o port must be set to 1. note 1: in the pwm mode, program the timer register pw regj immediately after the inttcj interrupt request is generated (normally in the inttcj interrupt service r outine.) if the programming of pwregj and the inter- rupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of the pulse different from the programmed value until the next inttcj interrupt request is generated. note 2: when the timer is stopped during pwm output, the pwmj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. to change the output status, program tcjcr after the timer is stopped. do not change the tcjcr upon stopping of the timer. example: fixing the pwmj pin to the high level when the timercounter is stopped clr (tcjcr).3: stops the timer. clr (tcjcr).7: sets the pwmj pin to the high level. note 3: to enter the stop mode during pwm output, stop the timer and then enter the stop mode. if the stop mode is entered without stopping the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is out- put from the pwmj pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the stop mode. note 4: j = 5, 6 table 10-5 pwm output mode source clock resolution repeated cycle normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2, sleep1/2 mode fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 fc/2 11 [hz] fs/2 3 [hz] fs/2 3 [hz] 128 s244.14 s 32.8 ms 62.5 ms fc/2 7 fc/2 7 ?8 s?2.05 ms? fc/2 5 fc/2 5 ?2 s ? 512 s? fc/2 3 fc/2 3 ? 500 ns ? 128 s? fs fs fs 30.5 s30.5 s 7.81 ms 7.81 ms fc/2 fc/2 ? 125 ns ? 32 s? fc fc ? 62.5 ns ? 16 s?
page 120 10. 8-bit timercounter (tc5, tc6) 10.1 configuration TMP86FS23UG figure 10-5 8-bit pwm mode timing chart (tc6) 1 0 n n+1 ff 0 n n+1 ff 0 1 m m+1 ff 0 1 1 p n ? internal source clock counter write to pwreg4 write to pwreg4 m p m p n ? shift registar shift shift shift shift match detect match detect one cycle period match detect match detect n m p n tc6cr tc6cr pwreg6 timer f/f6 pwm 6 pin inttc6 interrupt request
page 121 TMP86FS23UG 10.3.5 16-bit time r mode (tc5 and 6) in the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. the timercounter 5 and 6 are cascad- able to form a 16-bit timer. when a match between the up-counter and the timer regi ster (ttreg5, ttreg6) valu e is detected after the timer is started by setting tc6cr to 1, an inttc 6 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. after being cleared, the up-counter continues counting. pr ogram the upper byte and lower byte in this order in the timer register. (programming only the uppe r or lower byte should not be attempted.) note 1: in the timer mode, fix tcjcr to 0. if not fixed, the pdoj , pwmj , and ppgj pins may output a pulse. note 2: in the timer mode, do not change the ttregj setting while the timer is running. si nce ttregj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in ttregj is in effect immediately after programming of ttregj. therefore, if ttreg j is changed while the time r is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. note 3: j = 5, 6 figure 10-6 16-bit timer m ode timing chart (tc5 and tc6) table 10-6 source clock for 16-bit timer mode source clock resolution repeated cycle normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2, sleep1/2 mode fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 fc/2 11 fs/2 3 fs/2 3 128 s244.14 s 8.39 s 16 s fc/2 7 fc/2 7 ?8 s ? 524.3 ms ? fc/2 5 fc/2 5 ?2 s ? 131.1 ms ? fc/2 3 fc/2 3 ? 500 ns ? 32.8 ms ? example :setting the timer mode with source clock fc/2 7 hz, and generating an interrupt 300 ms later (fc = 16.0 mhz) ldw (ttreg5), 927ch : sets the timer register (300 ms 2 7 /fc = 927ch). di set (eirh). 5 : enables inttc6 interrupt. ei ld (tc5cr), 13h :sets the operating cock to fc/2 7 , and 16-bit timer mode (lower byte). ld (tc6cr), 04h : sets the 16-bit timer mode (upper byte). ld (tc6cr), 0ch : starts the timer. 1 0 2 3 mn-1 mn 0 1 mn-1 mn 2 0 1 2 0 n ? m ? internal source clock counter match detect counter clear match detect counter clear tc6cr ttreg5 (lower byte) inttc6 interrupt request ttreg6 (upper byte)
page 122 10. 8-bit timercounter (tc5, tc6) 10.1 configuration TMP86FS23UG 10.3.6 16-bit event c ounter mode (tc5 and 6) 10.3.7 16-bit pulse wi dth modulation (pwm) ou tput mode (tc5 and 6) this mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (pwm) signals with up to 16 bits of resolution. the timercounter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form the 16-bit pwm signal generator. the counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. when a match between the up-counter and the timer register (pwreg5, pwreg6) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer f/f6 is switched to the opposite state. the counter continues counting. the logic level output from the timer f/f6 is switched to the opposite state again by the counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. the inttc6 interrupt is generated at this time. two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the tc5 pin. therefore, a maxi- mum frequency to be supplied is fc/2 4 hz in the normal1 or idle1 mode, and fs/2 4 to in the slow1/2 or sleep1/2 mode. since the initial value can be set to the timer f/f6 by tc6cr, positive and negative pulses can be generated. upon reset, the timer f/f6 is cleared to 0. (the logic level output from the pwm 6 pin is the opposite to the timer f/f6 logic level.) since pwreg6 and 5 in the pwm mode are serially connected to the shift register, the values set to pwreg6 and 5 can be changed while the timer is runni ng. the values set to pwreg6 and 5 during a run of the timer are shifted by the inttcj interrupt request and loaded into pwreg6 and 5. while the timer is stopped, the values are shifted i mmediately after the programming of pwreg6 and 5. set the lower byte (pwreg5) and upper byte (pwreg5) in this order to program pwreg6 and 5. (programming only the lower or upper byte of the register should not be attempted.) if executing the read instruction to pwreg6 and 5 during pwm output, the values set in the shift register is read, but not the values set in pwreg6 and 5. therefore, after writing to the pwreg6 and 5, reading data of pwreg6 and 5 is previous value until inttc6 is generated. for the pin used for pwm output, the output latch of the i/o port must be set to 1. note 1: in the pwm mode, program the timer register pwreg6 and 5 immediately after the inttc6 interrupt request is generated (normally in the inttc6 interrupt service routine.) if the programming of pwregj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of pulse different from the programmed value until the next inttc6 interrupt request is generated. note 2: when the timer is stopped during pwm output, the pwm 6 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. to change the output status, program tc6cr after the timer is stopped. do not program tc6cr upon stopping of the timer. example: fixing the pwm 6 pin to the high level when the timercounter is stopped in the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge to the tc5 pin. the timercounter 5 and 6 are cascadable to fo rm a 16-bit event counter. when a match between the up-counter and the timer register (ttreg5, ttreg6) value is detected after the timer is started by setting tc6cr to 1, an inttc6 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. after being cleared, the up-counter rest arts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the tc5 pin. two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the tc5 pin. therefore, a maximum freque ncy to be supplied is fc/2 4 hz in the normal1 or idle1 mode, and fs/2 4 in the slow1/2 or sleep1/2 mode. program the lower by te (ttreg5), and upper byte (ttreg6) in this order in the timer register. (programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.) note 1: note 2: note 3: in the event counter mode, fix tcjcr to 0. if not fixed, the pdoj, pwmj and ppgj pins may output pulses. in the event counter mode, do not change the ttregj setti ng while the timer is running. since ttregj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in ttregj is in effect imme- diately after the programming. therefore, if ttregj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. j = 5, 6
page 123 TMP86FS23UG clr (tc6cr).3: stops the timer. clr (tc6cr).7 : sets the pwm 6 pin to the high level. note 3: to enter the stop mode, stop the timer and then enter the stop mode. if the stop mode is entered with- out stopping of the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is select ed as the source clock, a pulse is output from the pwm 6 pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the stop mode. table 10-7 16-bit pwm output mode source clock resolution repeated cycle normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2, sleep1/2 mode fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 fc/2 11 fs/2 3 [hz] fs/2 3 [hz] 128 s244.14 s 8.39 s 16 s fc/2 7 fc/2 7 ?8 s ? 524.3 ms ? fc/2 5 fc/2 5 ?2 s ? 131.1 ms ? fc/2 3 fc/2 3 ? 500ns ? 32.8 ms ? fs fs fs 30.5 s30.5 s2 s 2 s fc/2 fc/2 ? 125 ns ? 8.2 ms ? fc fc ? 62.5 ns ? 4.1 ms ? example :generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 32.768 ms (fc = 16.0 mhz) setting ports ldw (pwreg5), 07d0h : sets the pulse width. ld (tc5cr), 33h : sets the operating clock to fc/2 3 , and 16-bit pwm output mode (lower byte). ld (tc6cr), 056h : sets tff6 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit pwm signal generation mode (upper byte). ld (tc6cr), 05eh : starts the timer.
page 124 10. 8-bit timercounter (tc5, tc6) 10.1 configuration TMP86FS23UG figure 10-7 16-bit pwm mode timing chart (tc5 and tc6) 1 0 an an+1 ffff 0 an an+1 ffff 0 1 bm bm+1 ffff 0 bm cp b c 1 1 cp n a an ? ? ? internal source clock 16-bit shift register shift shift shift shift counter match detect match detect one cycle period match detect match detect an bm cp an m p tc6cr tc6cr pwreg5 (lower byte) timer f/f6 pwm 6 pin inttc6 interrupt request pwreg6 (upper byte) write to pwreg6 write to pwreg6 write to pwreg5 write to pwreg5
page 125 TMP86FS23UG 10.3.8 16-bit programmable pulse generate (ppg) ou tput mode (tc5 and 6) this mode is used to generate pulses with up to 16- bits of resolution. the timer counter 5 and 6 are cascad- able to enter the 16-bit ppg mode. the counter counts up using the inte rnal clock or external clock. when a match between the up-counter and the timer register (pwreg5, pwreg6 ) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer f/f6 is switched to the opposite state. the counter continues counting. the logic level output from the timer f/f6 is switched to the opposite state again when a match betw een the up-counter and th e timer register (ttreg5, ttreg6) value is detected, and the counter is cleared. the inttc6 interrupt is generated at this time. since the initial value can be set to the timer f/f6 by tc6cr, positive and negative pulses can be generated. upon reset, the timer f/f6 is cleared to 0. (the logic level output from the ppg 6 pin is the opposite to the timer f/f6.) set the lower byte and upper byte in this order to program the timer register. (ttreg5 ttreg6, pwreg5 pwreg6) (programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.) for ppg output, set the output latch of the i/o port to 1. note 1: in the ppg mode, do not change the pwregi and ttregi settings while the timer is running. since pwregi and ttregi are not in the shift register c onfiguration in the ppg mode, the new values pro- grammed in pwregi and ttregi are in effect immediately after progra mming pwregi and ttregi. therefore, if pwregi and ttregi are changed whil e the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. note 2: when the timer is stopped during ppg output, the ppg 6 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. to change the output status, program tc6cr after the timer is stopped. do not change tc6cr upon stopping of the timer. example: fixing the ppg 6 pin to the high level when the timercounter is stopped clr (tc6cr).3: stops the timer clr (tc6cr).7: sets the ppg 6 pin to the high level note 3: i = 5, 6 two machine cycles are required for the high- or low- level pulse input to the tc5 pin. therefore, a maxi- mum frequency to be supplied is fc/2 4 hz in the normal1 or idle1 mode, and fc/2 4 to in the slow1/2 or sleep1/2 mode. example :generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 16.385 ms (fc = 16.0 mhz) setting ports ldw (pwreg5), 07d0h : sets the pulse width. ldw (ttreg5), 8002h : sets the cycle period. ld (tc5cr), 33h : sets the operating clock to fc/2 3 , and16-bit ppg mode (lower byte). ld (tc6cr), 057h : sets tff6 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit ppg mode (upper byte). ld (tc6cr), 05fh : starts the timer.
page 126 10. 8-bit timercounter (tc5, tc6) 10.1 configuration TMP86FS23UG figure 10-8 16-bit ppg mode timing chart (tc5 and tc60) 1 0 mn mn+1 qr-1 mn qr-1 1 mn mn+1 mn+1 0 qr 0 qr 1 0 internal source clock counter write of "0" match detect match detect match detect mn mn mn match detect match detect ? n m ? ? r q ? held at the level when the timer stops f/f clear tc6cr tc6cr pwreg5 (lower byte) timer f/f6 ppg 6 pin inttc6 interrupt request pwreg6 (upper byte) ttreg5 (lower byte) ttreg6 (upper byte)
page 127 TMP86FS23UG 10.3.9 warm-up counter mode in this mode, the warm-up period time is obtained to assure oscillation stability when the system clocking is switched between the high-frequency and low-frequency. the timer counter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form a 16-bit timercouter. the warm-up counter mode has two types of mode; switching from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and vice-versa. note 1: in the warm-up counter mode, fi x tcicr to 0. if not fixed, the pdoi , pwmi and ppgi pins may output pulses. note 2: in the warm-up counter mode, only upper 8 bits of the timer register ttreg6 and 5 are used for match detection and lower 8 bits are not used. note 3: i = 5, 6 10.3.9.1 low-frequency warm-up counter mode (normal1 normal2 slow2 slow1) in this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the low-frequency clock fs to oscillation stability is obtained. before starting the timer, set syscr2 to 1 to oscillate the low-frequency clock. when a match between the up-counter and the timer regist er (ttreg6, 5) value is detected after the timer is started by setting tc6cr to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the inttc6 interrupt request. after stopping the timer in the inttc6 inte rrupt service routine, set syscr2 to 1 to switch the system clock fr om the high-frequency to low-frequenc y, and then clear of syscr2 to 0 to stop the high-frequency clock. table 10-8 setting time of low-frequency warm-up counter mode (fs = 32.768 khz) maximum time setting (ttreg6, 5 = 0100h) maximum time setting (ttreg6, 5 = ff00h) 7.81 ms 1.99 s example :after check ing low-frequency clock oscillation stability with tc6 and 5, switching to the slow1 mode set (syscr2).6 : syscr2 1 ld (tc5cr), 43h : sets tff5=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode. ld (tc6cr), 05h : sets tff6=0, and warm-up counter mode. ld (ttreg5), 8000h : sets the warm-up time. (the warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) di : imf 0 set (eirh). 5 : enables the inttc6. ei : imf 1 set (tc6cr).3 : starts tc6 and 5. : : pinttc6: clr (tc6cr).3 : stops tc6 and 5. set (syscr2).5 : syscr2 1 (switches the system clock to the low-frequency clock.) clr (syscr2).7 : syscr2 0 (stops the high-frequency clock.) reti : : vinttc6: dw pinttc6 : inttc6 vector table
page 128 10. 8-bit timercounter (tc5, tc6) 10.1 configuration TMP86FS23UG 10.3.9.2 high-frequency warm-up counter mode (slow1 slow2 normal2 normal1) in this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the high-frequency clock fc to the oscillation sta- bility is obtained. before starting the timer, set sy scr2 to 1 to oscillat e the high-frequency clock. when a match between the up-counter and the timer regist er (ttreg6, 5) value is detected after the timer is started by setting tc6cr to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the inttc6 interrupt request. after stopping the timer in the inttc6 inte rrupt service routine, clear syscr2 to 0 to switch the system clock from the low-frequency to high-frequency, and then syscr2 to 0 to stop the low-frequency clock. table 10-9 setting time in high-frequency warm-up counter mode minimum time (ttreg6, 5 = 0100h) maximum time (ttreg6, 5 = ff00h) 16 s 4.08 ms example :after check ing high-frequency clock oscillation stability with tc6 and 5, switching to the normal1 mode set (syscr2).7 : syscr2 1 ld (tc5cr), 63h : sets tff5=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode. ld (tc6cr), 05h : sets tff6=0, and warm-up counter mode. ld (ttreg5), 0f800h : sets the warm-up time. (the warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) di : imf 0 set (eirh). 5 : enables the inttc6. ei : imf 1 set (tc6cr).3 : starts the tc6 and 5. : : pinttc6: clr (tc6cr).3 : stops the tc6 and 5. clr (syscr2).5 : syscr2 0 (switches the system clock to the high-frequency clock.) clr (syscr2).6 : syscr2 0 (stops the low-frequency clock.) reti : : vinttc6: dw pinttc6 : inttc6 vector table
page 129 TMP86FS23UG 11. asynchronous serial interface (uart ) 11.1 configuration figure 11-1 uart (asynch ronous serial interface) counter y a b c s s a b c d y e f g h uart status register uart control register 2 uart control register 1 transmit data buffer receive data buffer fc/13 fc/26 fc/52 fc/104 fc/208 fc/416 fc/96 stop bit parity bit fc/2 6 fc/2 7 fc/2 8 baud rate generator transmit/receive clock 2 4 3 2 2 2 noise rejection circuit m p x transmit control circuit shift register shift register receive control circuit mpx: multiplexer uartcr1 tdbuf rdbuf inttxd intrxd uartsr uartcr2 rxd txd inttc5
page 130 11. asynchronous serial interface (uart ) 11.2 control TMP86FS23UG 11.2 control uart is controlled by the uart control registers (uartcr1, uartcr2). the operating status can be moni- tored using the uart status register (uartsr). note 1: when operations are disabled by se tting txe and rxe bit to ?0?, the setting be comes valid when data transmit or receive complete. when the transmit data is stored in the transmit data buf fer, the data are not transmitted. even if data transmit is enabled, until new data are written to the transmit data buffer, the current data are not transmitted. note 2: the transmit clock and the parity are common to transmit and receive. note 3: uartcr1 and uartcr1 should be set to ?0? before uartcr1 is changed. note: when uartcr2 = ?01?, pulses longer than 96/fc [s] are always regarded as signals; when uartcr2 = ?10?, longer than 192/fc [s]; and when uart cr2 = ?11?, longer than 384/fc [s]. uart control register1 uartcr1 (0025h) 76543210 txe rxe stbt even pe brg (initial value: 0000 0000) txe transfer operation 0: 1: disable enable write only rxe receive operation 0: 1: disable enable stbt transmit stop bit length 0: 1: 1 bit 2 bits even even-numbered parity 0: 1: odd-numbered parity even-numbered parity pe parity addition 0: 1: no parity parity brg transmit clock select 000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111: fc/13 [hz] fc/26 fc/52 fc/104 fc/208 fc/416 tc5 ( input inttc5) fc/96 uart control register2 uartcr2 (0026h) 7654321 0 rxdnc stopbr (initial value: **** *000) rxdnc selection of rxd input noise rejectio time 00: 01: 10: 11: no noise rejection (hysteresis input) rejects pulses shorter than 31/fc [s] as noise rejects pulses shorter than 63/fc [s] as noise rejects pulses shorter than 127/fc [s] as noise write only stopbr receive stop bit length 0: 1: 1 bit 2 bits
page 131 TMP86FS23UG note: when an inttxd is generated, tbep flag is set to "1" automatically. uart status register uartsr (0025h) 76543210 perr ferr oerr rbfl tend tbep (initial value: 0000 11**) perr parity error flag 0: 1: no parity error parity error read only ferr framing error flag 0: 1: no framing error framing error oerr overrun error flag 0: 1: no overrun error overrun error rbfl receive data buffer full flag 0: 1: receive data buffer empty receive data buffer full tend transmit end flag 0: 1: on transmitting transmit end tbep transmit data buffer empty flag 0: 1: transmit data buffer full (transmit data writing is finished) transmit data buffer empty uart receive data buffer rdbuf (0f9bh) 76543210read only (initial value: 0000 0000) uart transmit data buffer tdbuf (0f9bh) 76543210write only (initial value: 0000 0000)
page 132 11. asynchronous serial interface (uart ) 11.3 transfer data format TMP86FS23UG 11.3 transfer data format in uart, an one-bit start bit (low level), stop bit (bit length selectable at high level, by uartcr1), and parity (select parity in uartcr1

; even- or odd-number ed parity by uartcr1) are added to the transfer data. the transfer data formats are shown as follows. figure 11-2 transfer data format figure 11-3 caution on ch anging transfer data format note: in order to switch the transfer data format, perform transmit operations in the above figure 11-3 sequence except for the initial setting. start bit 0 bit 1 bit 6 bit 7 stop 1 start bit 0 bit 1 bit 6 bit 7 stop 1 stop 2 start bit 0 bit 1 bit 6 bit 7 parity stop 1 start bit 0 bit 1 bit 6 bit 7 parity stop 1 stop 2 pe 0 0 1 1 stbt frame length 0 1 123 89101112 0 1 without parity / 1 stop bit with parity / 1 stop bit without parity / 2 stop bit with parity / 2 stop bit
page 133 TMP86FS23UG 11.4 transfer rate the baud rate of uart is set of uartcr1. th e example of the baud rate are shown as follows. when tc5 is used as the uart transfer rate (when uartcr1 = ?110?), the tr ansfer clock and transfer rate are determined as follows: transfer clock [hz] = tc5 source clock [hz] / ttreg5 setting value transfer rate [baud] = transfer clock [hz] / 16 11.5 data sampling method the uart receiver keeps sampling input using the cloc k selected by uartcr1 until a start bit is detected in rxd pin input. rt clock star ts detecting ?l? level of the rxd pin. once a start bit is detected, the start bit, data bits, stop bi t(s), and parity bit are sampled at three times of rt7, rt8, and rt9 during one receiver clock interval (rt clock). (rt0 is the position where the bit supposedly starts.) bit is determined according to majority rule (the data are the same twice or more out of three samplings). figure 11-4 data sampling method table 11-1 transfer rate (example) brg source clock 16 mhz 8 mhz 4 mhz 000 76800 [baud] 38400 [baud] 19200 [baud] 001 38400 19200 9600 010 19200 9600 4800 011 9600 4800 2400 100 4800 2400 1200 101 2400 1200 600 rt0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9101112 1314 15  01234567891011 bit 0 start bit bit 0 start bit (a) without noise rejection circuit rt clock internal receive data rt0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9101112 1314 15  01234567891011 bit 0 start bit bit 0 start bit rt clock internal receive data (b) with noise rejection circuit rxd pin rxd pin
page 134 11. asynchronous serial interface (uart ) 11.6 stop bit length TMP86FS23UG 11.6 stop bit length select a transmit stop bit length (1 bit or 2 bits) by uartcr1. 11.7 parity set parity / no parity by uartcr1 and set parity type (odd- or even-numbered) by uartcr1. 11.8 transmit/receive operation 11.8.1 data transmit operation set uartcr1 to ?1?. read uartsr to check ua rtsr = ?1?, then write data in tdbuf (transmit data buffer). writing data in tdbuf zero-cl ears uartsr, transfers the data to the transmit shift register and the data are sequenti ally output from the txd pin. the data output include a one-bit start bit, stop bits whose number is specified in uartcr1 and a parity bit if parity addition is specified. select the data transfer baud rate using uartcr1. when data transmit st arts, transmit buffer empty flag uartsr is set to ?1? a nd an inttxd interrupt is generated. while uartcr1 = ?0? and from when ?1? is written to uartcr1 to when send data are written to tdbuf, the txd pin is fixed at high level. when transmitting data, first read uartsr, then write data in tdbuf. otherwise, uartsr is not zero-cleared and transm it does not start. 11.8.2 data receive operation set uartcr1 to ?1?. when data are received vi a the rxd pin, the receive data are transferred to rdbuf (receive data buffer). at this time, the data transmitted includes a start bit and stop bit(s) and a parity bit if parity addition is specified. when stop bit(s) are received, data only are extracted and transferred to rdbuf (receive data buffer). then the receive buffer full flag ua rtsr is set and an intrxd interrupt is generated. select the data transfer baud rate using uartcr1. if an overrun error (oerr) occurs when data are received, the da ta are not transferre d to rdbuf (receive data buffer) but discarded; data in the rdbuf are not affected. note:when a receive operation is disabled by setting ua rtcr1 bit to ?0?, the setting becomes valid when data receive is completed. however, if a framing error occurs in data receive, the receive-disabling setting may not become valid. if a framing error occurs , be sure to perform a re-receive operation.
page 135 TMP86FS23UG 11.9 status flag 11.9.1 parity error when parity determined using the receive data bits diff ers from the received parity bit, the parity error flag uartsr is set to ?1?. the uartsr is cl eared to ?0? when the rdbuf is read after read- ing the uartsr. figure 11-5 generation of parity error 11.9.2 framing error when ?0? is sampled as the stop bit in the receive data, framing error flag uartsr is set to ?1?. the uartsr is cleared to ?0? when the rdbuf is r ead after reading the uartsr. figure 11-6 generati on of framing error 11.9.3 overrun error when all bits in the next data are received while unread data are still in rdbuf, overrun error flag uartsr is set to ?1?. in this case, the receive data is discarded; data in rdbuf are not affected. the uartsr is cleared to ?0? when the rdbuf is read af ter reading the uartsr. parity stop shift register pxxxx0 * 1pxxxx0 xxxx0 ** rxd pin uartsr intrxd interrupt after reading uartsr then rdbuf clears perr. final bit stop shift register xxxx0 * 0xxxx0 xxx0 ** rxd pin uartsr intrxd interrupt after reading uartsr then rdbuf clears ferr.
page 136 11. asynchronous serial interface (uart ) 11.9 status flag TMP86FS23UG figure 11-7 generati on of overrun error note:receive operations are di sabled until the overrun error flag uartsr is cleared. 11.9.4 receive data buffer full loading the received data in rdbuf sets receive data buffer full flag uartsr to "1". the uartsr is cleared to ?0? when the rdbuf is read after reading the uartsr. figure 11-8 generation of receive data buffer full note:if the overrun error flag uartsr is set during the period between reading the uartsr and reading the rdbuf, it cannot be cleared by only reading the rdbuf. therefore, after reading the rdbuf, read the uartsr again to check whether or not the overrun er ror flag which should have been cleared still remains set. 11.9.5 transmit data buffer empty when no data is in the transmit buffer tdbuf, uartsr is set to ?1?, that is, when data in tdbuf are transferred to the transmit shif t register and data transmit star ts, transmit data buffer empty flag uartsr is set to ?1?. the uartsr is cleared to ?0? when the tdbuf is written after reading the uartsr. final bit stop shift register xxxx0 * 1xxxx0 yyyy xxx0 ** rxd pin uartsr intrxd interrupt after reading uartsr then rdbuf clears oerr. rdbuf uartsr final bit stop shift register xxxx0 * 1xxxx0 xxxx yyyy xxx0 ** rxd pin uartsr intrxd interrupt rdbuf after reading uartsr then rdbuf clears rbfl.
page 137 TMP86FS23UG figure 11-9 generation of transmit data buffer empty 11.9.6 transmit end flag when data are transmitted and no data is in tdbuf (uartsr = ?1?), transmit end flag uartsr is set to ?1?. the uartsr is cleared to ?0? when the data transmit is stated after writing the tdbuf. figure 11-10 generation of transmit end flag and transmit data buffer empty shift register data write data write zzzz xxxx yyyy start bit 0 final bit stop 1xxxx0 ***** 1 * 1xxxx **** 1x ***** 1 1yyyy0 tdbuf txd pin uartsr inttxd interrupt after reading uartsr writing tdbuf clears tbep. shift register * 1yyyy *** 1 xx **** 1 x ***** 1 stop start 1yyyy0 bit 0 txd pin uartsr uartsr inttxd interrupt data write for tdbuf
page 138 11. asynchronous serial interface (uart ) 11.9 status flag TMP86FS23UG
page 139 TMP86FS23UG 12. synchronous serial interface (sio) the TMP86FS23UG has a clocked-synchr onous 8-bit serial inte rface. serial interface ha s an 8-byte transmit and receive data buffer that can automatically and continuously transfer up to 64 bits of data. serial interface is connected to outside peripherl devices via so, si, sck port. 12.1 configuration figure 12-1 serial interface sio control / status register serial clock shift clock shift register 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 transmit and receive data buffer (8 bytes in dbr) control circuit cpu serial data output serial data input 8-bit transfer 4-bit transfer serial clock i/o buffer control circuit so si sck siocr2 siocr1 siosr intsio interrupt request
page 140 12. synchronous serial interface (sio) 12.2 control TMP86FS23UG 12.2 control the serial interface is controlled by sio control registers (s iocr1/siocr2). the serial interface status can be determined by reading sio status register (siosr). the transmit and receive data buffer is controlled by the siocr2. th e data buffer is assigned to address 0f90h to 0f97h for sio in the dbr area, and can continuously transfer up to 8 words (bytes or nibbles) at one time. when the specified number of words has b een transferred, a buffer empty (in th e transmit mode) or a buffer full (in the receive mode or tran smit/receive mode) interrupt (intsio) is generated. when the internal clock is used as the serial clock in the 8-bit receive mode and the 8-bit transmit/receive mode, a fixed interval wait can be applied to the serial clock fo r each word transferred. four different wait times can be selected with siocr2. note 1: fc; high-frequency clock [hz], fs; low-frequency clock [hz] note 2: set sios to "0" and sioinh to "1" when setting the transfer mode or serial clock. note 3: siocr1 is write-only register, whic h cannot access any of in read-modify-wri te instruction such as bit operate, etc. sio control register 1 siocr176543210 (0f98h) sios sioinh siom sck (initial value: 0000 0000) sios indicate transfer start / stop 0: stop write only 1: start sioinh continue / abort transfer 0: continuously transfer 1: abort transfer (automatically cleared after abort) siom transfer mode select 000: 8-bit transmit mode 010: 4-bit transmit mode 100: 8-bit transmit / receive mode 101: 8-bit receive mode 110: 4-bit receive mode except the above: reserved sck serial clock select normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2 sleep1/2 mode write only dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 000 fc/2 13 fs/2 5 fs/2 5 001 fc/2 8 fc/2 8 - 010 fc/2 7 fc/2 7 - 011 fc/2 6 fc/2 6 - 100 fc/2 5 fc/2 5 - 101 fc/2 4 fc/2 4 - 110 reserved 111 external clock ( input from sck pin ) sio control register 2 siocr276543210 (0f99h) wait buf (initial value: ***0 0000)
page 141 TMP86FS23UG note 1: the lower 4 bits of each buffer are used during 4-bit tr ansfers. zeros (0) are stored to the upper 4bits when receiving. note 2: transmitting starts at the lowest address. received data are also stored starting from the lowest address to the highest address. ( the first buffer address transmitted is 0f90h ). note 3: the value to be loaded to buf is held after transfer is completed. note 4: siocr2 must be set when the serial interface is stopped (siof = 0). note 5: *: don't care note 6: siocr2 is write-only register, whic h cannot access any of in read-modify-wri te instruction such as bit operate, etc. note 1: t f ; frame time, t d ; data transfer time note 2: after sios is cleared to "0", siof is cleared to "0" at the termination of transfer or the setting of sioinh to "1". figure 12-2 fr ame time (t f ) and data transfer time (t d ) 12.3 serial clock 12.3.1 clock source internal clock or external clock for the source clock is selected by siocr1. wait wait control always sets "00" except 8-bit transmit / receive mode. write only 00: t f = t d (non wait) 01: t f = 2t d (wait) 10: t f = 4t d (wait) 11: t f = 8t d (wait) buf number of transfer words (buffer address in use) 000: 1 word transfer 0f90h 001: 2 words transfer 0f90h ~ 0f91h 010: 3 words transfer 0f90h ~ 0f92h 011: 4 words transfer 0f90h ~ 0f93h 100: 5 words transfer 0f90h ~ 0f94h 101: 6 words transfer 0f90h ~ 0f95h 110: 7 words transfer 0f90h ~ 0f96h 111: 8 words transfer 0f90h ~ 0f97h sio status register siosr76543210 (0f99h) siof sef siof serial transfer operating status moni- tor 0: 1: transfer terminated transfer in process read only sef shift operating status monitor 0: 1: shift operation terminated shift operation in process td tf (output) s ck output
page 142 12. synchronous serial interface (sio) 12.3 serial clock TMP86FS23UG 12.3.1.1 internal clock any of six frequencies can be selected. the serial clock is output to the outside on the sck pin. the sck pin goes high when transfer starts. when data writing (in the transmit mo de) or reading (in the receive mode or the transmit/receive mode) cannot keep up with the serial clock rate, there is a wa it function that automatically stops the serial clock and holds the next shift operation until the read/write processing is completed. note: 1 kbit = 1024 bit (fc = 16 mhz, fs = 32.768 khz) figure 12-3 automatic wait fu nction (at 4-bit transmit mode) 12.3.1.2 external clock an external clock connected to the sck pin is used as the serial clock. in this case, output latch of this port should be set to "1". to ensure shifting, a pulse width of at least 4 machine cycles is required. this pulse is needed for the shift operatio n to execute certainly. actually, there is necessary processing time for interrupting, writing, and reading. the minimum pulse is determined by setting the mode and the pro- gram. therfore, maximum transfer frequenc y will be 488.3k bit/sec (at fc=16mhz). figure 12-4 external clock pulse width table 12-1 serial clock rate normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2, sleep1/2 mode dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 sck clock baud rate clock baud rate clock baud rate 000 fc/2 13 1.91 kbps fs/2 5 1024 bps fs/2 5 1024 bps 001 fc/2 8 61.04 kbps fc/2 8 61.04 kbps - - 010 fc/2 7 122.07 kbps fc/2 7 122.07 kbps - - 011 fc/2 6 244.14 kbps fc/2 6 244.14 kbps - - 100 fc/2 5 488.28 kbps fc/2 5 488.28 kbps - - 101 fc/2 4 976.56 kbps fc/2 4 976.56 kbps - - 110 - - - - - - 111 external external external external external external a 1 a 2 b 0 b 1 b 2 b 3 c 0 c 1 a 3 a c b a 0 pin (output) pin (output) written transmit data a utomat i ca ll y wait function sck so t sckl t sckh tcyc = 4/fc (in the normal1/2, idle1/2 modes) 4/fs (in the slow1/2, sleep1/2 modes) t sckl , t sckh > 4tcyc sck pin (output)
page 143 TMP86FS23UG 12.3.2 shift edge the leading edge is used to transmit, a nd the trailing edge is used to receive. 12.3.2.1 leading edge transmitted data are shifted on the leading ed ge of the serial clock (falling edge of the sck pin input/ output). 12.3.2.2 trailing edge received data are shifted on the trailing edge of the serial clock (rising edge of the sck pin input/out- put). figure 12-5 shift edge 12.4 number of bits to transfer either 4-bit or 8-bit serial transfer can be selected. when 4-bit serial transfer is selected, only the lower 4 bits of the transmit/receive data buffer re gister are used. the upper 4 bits are cleared to ?0? when receiving. the data is transferred in sequence star ting at the least significant bit (lsb). 12.5 number of w ords to transfer up to 8 words consisting of 4 bits of data (4-bit serial tran sfer) or 8 bits (8-bit serial tr ansfer) of data can be trans- ferred continuously. the number of words to be transferred can be selected by siocr2. an intsio interrupt is generated when the specified number of words has been transferred. if the number of words is to be changed during transfer , the serial interface must be stopped before making the ch ange. the number of words can be changed during automatic-wa it operation of an internal clock. in this case, the serial interface is not required to be stopped. bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 * 321 3210 ** 32 *** 3 bit 0 shift register shift register bit 1 bit 0 bit 2 bit 3 0 *** **** 210 * 10 ** 3210 (a) leading edge (b) trailing edge * ; don?t care so pin si pin sck pin sck pin
page 144 12. synchronous serial interface (sio) 12.6 transfer mode TMP86FS23UG figure 12-6 number of words to transfer (example: 1word = 4bit) 12.6 transfer mode siocr1 is used to select the tr ansmit, receive, or tr ansmit/receive mode. 12.6.1 4-bit and 8-bit transfer modes in these modes, firstly set the sio control register to the transmit mode, and then write first transmit data (number of transfer words to be transfer red) to the data buffer registers (dbr). after the data are written, the transmission is star ted by setting siocr1 to ?1?. the data are then output sequentially to the so pin in synchronous with th e serial clock, starting with the least significant bit (lsb). as soon as the lsb has been output, the data are transferred from the data buffer register to the shift register. when the final data bit has been transferred a nd the data buffer register is empty, an intsio (buffer empty) interrupt is generated to request the next transmitted data. when the internal clock is used, the serial clock will stop and an automatic-wait will be initiated if the next transmitted data are not loaded to the data buffer regist er by the time the number of data words specified with the siocr2 has been transmitted . writing even one word of data can cels the automatic- wait; therefore, when transmitting two or more words, always write the ne xt word before transmission of the previous word is completed. note:automatic waits are also canceled by writing to a dbr not being used as a transmit data buffer register; there- fore, during sio do not use such dbr for other applicati ons. for example, when 3 words are transmitted, do not use the dbr of the remained 5 words. when an external clock is used, the data must be writte n to the data buffer register before shifting next data. thus, the transfer speed is determin ed by the maximum delay time from the generation of the interrupt request to writing of the data to the data buffer register by the interrupt service program. the transmission is ended by clearing siocr1 to ?0? or setting siocr1 to ?1? in buffer empty interrupt service program. a 1 a 2 a 3 a 0 a 1 a 2 a 3 b 0 b 1 b 2 b 3 c 0 c 1 c 2 c 3 a 0 a 1 a 0 a 2 a 3 b 0 b 1 b 2 b 3 c 0 c 1 c 2 c 3 (a) 1 word transmit (b) 3 words transmit (c) 3 words receive so pin intsio interrupt intsio interrupt intsio interrupt so pin si pin sck pin sck pin sck pin
page 145 TMP86FS23UG siocr1 is cleared, the operation will end after all bits of words are transmitted. that the transmission has ended can be determined from the status of siosr becau se siosr is cleared to ?0? when a transfer is completed. when siocr1 is set, the transmission is immediately ended and siosr is cleared to ?0?. when an external clock is used, it is also necessary to clear siocr1 to ?0? before shifting the next data; if siocr1 is not cleared before shift out, dummy data will be transmitted and the operation will end. if it is necessary to change the number of word s, siocr1 should be cleared to ?0?, then siocr2 must be rewritten after confirming that siosr has been cleared to ?0?. figure 12-7 transfer m ode (example: 8bit, 1word tr ansfer, internal clock) figure 12-8 transfer mode (example: 8b it, 1word transfer , external clock) a 1 a 2 a 3 a 4 a 5 a 6 a 7 b 0 b 1 b 2 b 3 b 4 b 5 b 6 b 7 a 0 dbr b a clear sios write (a) write (b) sck pin (output) so pin intsio interrupt siocr1 siosr siosr siosr a 1 a 2 a 3 a 4 a 5 a 6 a 7 b 0 b 1 b 2 b 3 b 4 b 5 b 6 b 7 a 0 dbr b a clear sios write (a) write (b) sck pin (input) so pin intsio interrupt siocr1 siosr siosr
page 146 12. synchronous serial interface (sio) 12.6 transfer mode TMP86FS23UG figure 12-9 transmiiied data ho ld time at end of transfer 12.6.2 4-bit and 8- bit receive modes after setting the control registers to the receive mode , set siocr1 to ?1? to enable receiving. the data are then transferred to the shift register via the si pin in synchronous with the serial clock. when one word of data has been received, it is tran sferred from the shift register to the data buffer register (dbr). when the number of words specified w ith the siocr2 has been received, an intsio (buffer full) interrupt is generated to request that these data be read out. the da ta are then read from the da ta buffer registers by the interrupt service program. when the internal clock is used, and the previous data are not read from the data buffer register before the next data are received, the serial cloc k will stop and an automatic-wait will be initiated until the data are read. a wait will not be initiated if even one data word has been read. note:waits are also canceled by readi ng a dbr not being used as a received data buffer register is read; therefore, during sio do not use such dbr for other applications. when an external clock is used, the shift operation is synchronized with the extern al clock; therefore, the previous data are read before the next data are transferred to the data buffer register. if the previous data have not been read, the next data will not be transferred to th e data buffer register and th e receiving of any more data will be canceled. when an external clock is used, th e maximum transfer speed is determined by the delay between the time when the interrupt request is gene rated and when the data received have been read. the receiving is ended by clearing si ocr1 to ?0? or setting sio cr1 to ?1? in buffer full interrupt service program. when siocr1 is cleared, th e current data are transferred to the buffer. after siocr1 cleared, the receiving is ended at the ti me that the final bit of the data has been received. that the receiving has ended can be determined from the st atus of siosr. siosr is cleared to ?0? when the receiv- ing is ended. after confirmed the r eceiving termination, the final receiving data is read. when siocr1 is set, the receiving is immediately ended and si osr is cleared to ?0 ?. (the received data is ignored, and it is not required to be read out.) if it is necessary to change the number of words in external clock operation, siocr1 should be cleared to ?0? then siocr2 mu st be rewritten after confirming th at siosr ha s been cleared to ?0?. if it is necessary to change the number of words in internal clock, during automatic-wait operation which occurs after completion of data recei ving, siocr2 must be rewritten before the received data is read out. note:the buffer contents are lost when the transfer mode is switched. if it should become necessary to switch the transfer mode, end receiving by cl earing siocr1 to ?0?, read the last data and then switch the trans- fer mode. msb of last word t sodh = min 3.5/fc [s] ( in the normal1/2, idle1/2 modes) t sodh = min 3.5/fs [s] (in the slow1/2, sleep1/2 modes) sck pin so pin siosr
page 147 TMP86FS23UG figure 12-10 receive mode (example: 8b it, 1word transfer, internal clock) 12.6.3 8-bit trans fer / receive mode after setting the sio control register to the 8-bit transmit/recei ve mode, write the data to be transmitted first to the data buffer registers (dbr). after that, enable the transmit/receive by sett ing siocr1 to ?1?. when transmitting, the data are output from the so pin at leading edges of the serial clock. when receiving, the data are input to the si pin at th e trailing edges of the serial clock. wh en the all receive is enabled, 8-bit data are transferred from th e shift register to the data buffer regist er. an intsio interrupt is generated when the number of data words specified with the siocr2 has been tr ansferred. usually, read the receive data from the buffer register in the interrupt service. the data buffer register is used for both transmitting and receiving; therefore, always writ e the data to be transmitted af ter reading the all received data. when the internal clock is used, a wait is initiated until the received data are read and the next transfer data are written. a wait will not be initiated if ev en one transfer data word has been written. when an external clock is used, the shift operation is synchronized with the external clock; therefore, it is necessary to read the received data and write the data to be transmitted next before starting the next shift oper- ation. when an external clock is us ed, the transfer speed is determined by the maximum delay between genera- tion of an interrupt request and the received data are read and the data to be transmitted next are written. the transmit/receive operatio n is ended by clearing siocr1 to ?0? or setting siocr1 to ?1? in intsio interrupt service program. when siocr1 is cleared, the current data ar e transferred to the buff er. after siocr1 cleared, the transmitting/ receiving is ended at the time that the fi nal bit of the data has been transmitted. that the transmitting/ receiving has ended can be determined from the status of siosr. siosr is cleared to ?0? when the transmitting/recei ving is ended. when siocr1 is set, the transmit/receive operation is immediately ended and siosr is cleared to ?0?. if it is necessary to change the number of words in external clock operation, siocr1 should be cleared to ?0?, then sio cr2 must be rewritten after confirmi ng that siosr has been cleared to ?0?. if it is necessary to change the number of words in internal clock, during automatic-wait operation which occurs after completion of transmit/ receive operation, siocr2 must be rewritten before reading and writing of the receive/transmit data. a 1 a 0 a 2 a 3 a 4 a 5 a 6 a 7 b 0 b 1 b 2 b 3 b 4 b 5 b 6 b 7 dbr b a clear sios read out read out sck pin (output) si pin intsio interrupt siocr1 siosr siosr
page 148 12. synchronous serial interface (sio) 12.6 transfer mode TMP86FS23UG note:the buffer contents are lost when the transfer mode is switched. if it should become necessary to switch the transfer mode, end receiving by cl earing siocr1 to ?0?, read the last data and then switch the trans- fer mode. figure 12-11 transfer / receive mode (examp le: 8bit, 1word transfe r, internal clock) figure 12-12 transmitted data hold ti me at end of tr ansfer / receive a 1 a 0 a 2 a 3 a 4 a 5 a 6 a 7 b 0 b 1 b 2 b 3 b 4 b 5 b 6 b 7 c 1 c 0 c 2 c 3 c 4 c 5 c b c 6 c 7 d 0 d 1 d 2 d 3 d 4 d 5 d 6 d 7 clear sios dbr d a read out (c) write (a) read out (d) write (b) sck pin (output) so pin intsio interrupt siocr1 siosr siosr si pin bit 7 of last word bit 6 t sodh = min 4/fc [s] ( in the normal1/2, idle1/2 modes) t sodh = min 4/fs [s] (in the slow1/2, sleep1/2 modes) sck pin so pin siosr
page 149 TMP86FS23UG 13. 10-bit ad converter (adc) the TMP86FS23UG have a 10-bit successive approximation type ad converter. 13.1 configuration the circuit configuration of the 10-bit ad converter is shown in figure 13-1. it consists of control register adccr1 and adccr2 , converted value register adcdr1 and adcdr2, a da converter, a sample-hold circuit, a compar ator, and a successive comparison circuit. note: before using ad converter, set appropriate value to i/o port register conbining a analog input port. for details, see the sec- tion on "i/o ports". figure 13-1 10-bit ad converter 2 4 10 8 ainds adrs r/2 r/2 r ack amd irefon ad conversion result register 1, 2 ad converter control register 1, 2 adbf eocf intadc sain n successive approximate circuit adccr2 adcdr1 adcdr2 adccr1  sample hold circuit a s en shift clock da converter analog input multiplexer y reference voltage analog comparator 2 3 control circuit vss varef avdd ain0 ain7
page 150 13. 10-bit ad converter (adc) 13.2 register configuration TMP86FS23UG 13.2 register configuration the ad converter consists of the following four registers: 1. ad converter control register 1 (adccr1) this register selects the analog channels and operatio n mode (software start or repeat) in which to per- form ad conversion and controls the ad converter as it starts operating. 2. ad converter control register 2 (adccr2) this register selects the ad conversion time and co ntrols the connection of the da converter (ladder resistor network). 3. ad converted value register 1 (adcdr1) this register used to store the digital value fter being converted by the ad converter. 4. ad converted value register 2 (adcdr2) this register monitors the oper ating status of the ad converter. note 1: select analog input channel during ad converter stops (adcdr2 = "0"). note 2: when the analog input channel is all use dis abling, the adccr1 should be set to "1". note 3: during conversion, do not perform port output instruction to maintain a precision for all of the pins because analog inp ut port use as general input port. and for port near to anal og input, do not input intense signaling of change. note 4: the adccr1 is automatically cleared to "0" after starting conversion. note 5: do not set adccr1 newly again during ad conv ersion. before setting adccr1 newly again, check adcdr2 to see that the conversion is completed or wait until the interrupt signal (intadc) is generated (e.g., interrupt handling routine). note 6: after stop or slow/sleep mode are started, ad conver ter control register1 (adccr1) is all initialized and no data can be written in this register. therfore, to use ad converter again, set the adccr1 newly after returning to normal1 or normal2 mode. ad converter control register 1 adccr1 (000eh) 76543210 adrs amd ainds sain (initial value: 0001 0000) adrs ad conversion start 0: 1: - ad conversion start r/w amd ad operating mode 00: 01: 10: 11: ad operation disable software start mode reserved repeat mode ainds analog input control 0: 1: analog input enable analog input disable sain analog input channel select 0000: 0001: 0010: 0011: 0100: 0101: 0110: 0111: 1000: 1001: 1010: 1011: 1100: 1101: 1110: 1111: ain0 ain1 ain2 ain3 ain4 ain5 ain6 ain7 reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved
page 151 TMP86FS23UG note 1: always set bit0 in adccr2 to "0" and set bit4 in adccr2 to "1". note 2: when a read instruction for adccr2, bi t6 to 7 in adccr2 read in as undefined data. note 3: after stop or slow/sleep mode are started, ad conver ter control register2 (adccr2) is all initialized and no data can be written in this register. therfore, to use ad converter again, set the adccr2 newly after returning to normal1 or normal2 mode. note 1: setting for " ? " in the above table are inhibited. fc: high frequency oscillation clock [hz] note 2: set conversion time setting should be kept more t han the following time by analog reference voltage (varef) . ad converter control register 2 adccr2 (000fh) 76543210 irefon "1" ack "0" (initial value: **0* 000*) irefon da converter (ladder resistor) connection control 0: 1: connected only during ad conversion always connected r/w ack ad conversion time select (refer to the following table about the con- version time) 000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111: 39/fc reserved 78/fc 156/fc 312/fc 624/fc 1248/fc reserved table 13-1 ack setting and conversion time condition conversion time 16 mhz 8 mhz 4 mhz 2 mhz 10 mhz 5 mhz 2.5 mhz ack 000 39/fc - - - 19.5 s - - 15.6 s 001 reserved 010 78/fc - - 19.5 s 39.0 s - 15.6 s 31.2 s 011 156/fc - 19.5 s 39.0 s 78.0 s 15.6 s 31.2 s 62.4 s 100 312/fc 19.5 s39.0 s 78.0 s 156.0 s 31.2 s 62.4 s124.8 s 101 624/fc 39.0 s78.0 s 156.0 s - 62.4 s124.8 s- 110 1248/fc 78.0 s 156.0 s - - 124.8 s- - 111 reserved - varef = 4.5 to 5.5 v 15.6 s and more - varef = 2.7 to 5.5 v 31.2 s and more ad converted value register 1 adcdr1 (0021h) 76543210 ad09 ad08 ad07 ad06 ad05 ad04 ad03 ad02 (initial value: 0000 0000) ad converted value register 2 adcdr2 (0020h) 76543210 ad01 ad00 eocf adbf (initial value: 0000 ****)
page 152 13. 10-bit ad converter (adc) 13.2 register configuration TMP86FS23UG note 1: the adcdr2 is cleared to "0" when reading the a dcdr1. therfore, the ad conversion result should be read to adcdr2 more first than adcdr1. note 2: the adcdr2 is set to "1" when ad conversion star ts, and cleared to "0" when ad conversion finished. it also is cleared upon entering stop mode or slow mode . note 3: if a read instruction is executed for a dcdr2, read data of bit3 to bit0 are unstable. eocf ad conversion end flag 0: 1: before or during conversion conversion completed read only adbf ad conversion busy flag 0: 1: during stop of ad conversion during ad conversion
page 153 TMP86FS23UG 13.3 function 13.3.1 software start mode after setting adccr1 to ?01? (software start mode), set adccr1 to ?1?. ad conver- sion of the voltage at the analog input pin specified by adccr1 is thereby started. after completion of the ad conversion, the conversion result is stored in ad converted value registers (adcdr1, adcdr2) and at the same time adcdr2 is set to 1, the ad conversion finished inter- rupt (intadc) is generated. adrs is automatically cleared afte r ad conversion has started. do not set adccr1 newly again (restart) during ad conversion. before setting adrs newly again, check adcdr2 to see that the conversion is completed or wait until the interrupt signa l (intadc) is generated (e.g., interrupt handling rou- tine). figure 13-2 software start mode 13.3.2 repeat mode ad conversion of the voltage at the analog input pin specified by adccr1 is performed repeatedly. in this mode, ad conversion is started by setti ng adccr1 to ?1? after setting adccr1 to ?11? (repeat mode). after completion of the ad conversion, the conversion result is stored in ad converted value registers (adcdr1, adcdr2) and at the same time adcdr2 is set to 1, the ad conversion finished inter- rupt (intadc) is generated. in repeat mode, each time one ad conversion is complete d, the next ad conversion is started. to stop ad conversion, set adccr1 to ?00? (disable mode) by writing 0s. the ad convert operation is stopped immediately. the converted valu e at this time is not stored in the ad converted value register. adcdr1 status eocf cleared by reading conversion result conversion result read adcdr2 intadc interrupt request adcdr2 adccr1 1st conversion result 2nd conversion result indeterminate ad conversion start ad conversion start a dcdr1 a dcdr2 conversion result read conversion result read conversion result read
page 154 13. 10-bit ad converter (adc) 13.3 function TMP86FS23UG figure 13-3 repeat mode 13.3.3 regi ster setting 1. set up the ad converter control register 1 (adccr1) as follows: ? choose the channel to ad convert using ad input channel select (sain). ? specify analog input enable fo r analog input control (ainds). ? specify amd for the ad converter control operation mode (software or repeat mode). 2. set up the ad converter control register 2 (adccr2) as follows: ? set the ad conversion time using ad conversion time (ack). for details on how to set the con- version time, refer to figure 13-1 and ad converter control register 2. ? choose irefon for da converter control. 3. after setting up (1) and (2) above, set ad conversion start (adrs) of ad converter control register 1 (adccr1) to ?1?. if software start mode has been selected, ad conversi on starts immediately. 4. after an elapse of the specified ad conversion time, the ad converted value is stored in ad con- verted value register 1 (adcdr1) and the ad conv ersion finished flag (e ocf) of ad converted value register 2 (adcdr2) is set to ?1?, upon wh ich time ad conversion interrupt intadc is gener- ated. 5. eocf is cleared to ?0? by a read of the conversion result. however, if reconverted before a register read, although eocf is cl eared the previous conversi on result is retained until the next conversion is completed. a dcdr1,adcdr2 eocf cleared by reading conversion result conversion result read a dcdr2 intadc interrupt request conversion operation a dccr1 indeterminate ad conversion start adccr1 ?11? ?00? 1st conversion result ad convert operation suspended. conversion result is not stored. 2nd conversion result 3rd conversion result a dcdr1 a dcdr2 2nd conversion result 3rd conversion result 1st conversion result conversion result read conversion result read conversion result read conversion result read conversion result read
page 155 TMP86FS23UG 13.4 stop/slow modes during ad conversion when standby mode (stop or slow mode) is entered fo rcibly during ad conversi on, the ad convert operation is suspended and the ad converter is in itialized (adccr1 and adccr2 are initia lized to initial value). also, the conversion result is indeterminate. (conversion results up to the previous operation are cleared, so be sure to read the conversion results before entering standby mode (sto p or slow mode).) when restored from standby mode (stop or slow mode), ad conversion is not automatically restarted, so it is necessa ry to restart ad conversion. note that since the analog reference voltage is automatically disconnected, there is no possibility of current flowing into the analog reference voltage. example :after selecting the conversion time 19.5 s at 16 mhz and the analog input channel ain3 pin, perform ad con- version once. after checking eocf, read the converted value, store the lower 2 bits in address 0009eh nd store the upper 8 bits in address 0009fh in ram. the operation mode is software start mode. : (port setting) : ;set port register approrriately before setting ad converter registers. : : (refer to section i/o port in details) ld (adccr1) , 00100011b ; select ain3 ld (adccr2) , 11011000b ;select conversion time(312/fc) and operation mode set (adccr1) . 7 ; adrs = 1(ad conversion start) sloop : test (adcdr2) . 5 ; eocf= 1 ? jrs t, sloop ld a , (adcdr2) ; read result data ld (9eh) , a ld a , (adcdr1) ; read result data ld (9fh), a
page 156 13. 10-bit ad converter (adc) 13.5 analog input voltage and ad conversion result TMP86FS23UG 13.5 analog input voltage and ad conversion result the analog input voltage is corresponded to the 10-bit dig ital value converted by the ad as shown in figure 13-4. figure 13-4 analog i nput voltage and ad c onversion result (typ.) 1 0 01 h 02 h 03 h 3fd h 3fe h 3ff h 2 3 1021 1022 1023 1024 analog input voltage 1024 ad conversion result varef vss
page 157 TMP86FS23UG 13.6 precautions about ad converter 13.6.1 restrictions for ad conv ersion interrupt (intadc) usage when an ad interrupt is used, it may not be proce ssed depending on program composition. for example, if an intadc interrupt request is generated while an inte rrupt with priority lower than the interrupt latch il15 (intadc) is being accepted, the int adc interrupt latch may be cleared without the intadc interrupt being processed. the completion of ad conversion can be detected by the following methods: (1) method not using the ad conversion end interrupt whether or not ad conversion is completed can be detected by monitoring the ad conversion end flag (eocf) by software. this can be done by polling eocf or monitoring eocf at regular intervals after start of ad conversion. (2) method for detecting ad conversion end while a lower-priority interrupt is being processed while an interrupt with priority lower than intadc is being processed, chec k the ad conversion end flag (eocf) and interrupt latch il15. if il15 = 0 and eocf = 1, call the ad conversion end interrupt processing routine with consideration given to push/pop operations . at this time, if an interrupt request with priority higher than intadc has been set, the ad conversion end interrupt processing routine will be executed first against the specified priority. if n ecessary, we recommend that the ad conversion end interrupt processing rou- tine be called after checking whether or not an interrupt request with priority higher than intadc has been set. 13.6.2 analog input pin voltage range make sure the analog input pins (ain0 to ain7) are used at voltages within varef to vss. if any voltage outside this range is applied to one of the analog input pins, the converted value on that pin becomes uncertain. the other analog input pins also are affected by that. 13.6.3 analog input shared pins the analog input pins (ain0 to ain7) are shared w ith input/output ports. when using any of the analog inputs to execute ad conversion, do not execute input/output instructions for all other ports. this is necessary to prevent the accuracy of ad conversi on from degrading. not only these analog input sh ared pins, some other pins may also be affected by noise arising from input/o utput to and from adjacent pins. 13.6.4 noise countermeasure the internal equivalent circuit of the analog input pins is shown in figure 13-5. the higher the output impedance of the analog input source, more easily they are susceptible to no ise. therefore, make sure the out- put impedance of the signal source in your design is 5 k ? or less. toshiba also recommends attaching a capac- itor external to the chip. figure 13-5 analog i nput equivalent circuit and exam ple of input pin processing da converter aini analog comparator internal resistance permissible signal source impedance internal capacitance 5 k ? (typ) c = 12 pf (typ.) 5 k ? (max) note) i = 7 to 0
page 158 13. 10-bit ad converter (adc) 13.6 precautions about ad converter TMP86FS23UG
page 159 TMP86FS23UG 14. key-on wakeup (kwu) in the TMP86FS23UG, the stop m ode is released by not only p20( int5 / stop ) pin but also four (stop2 to stop5) pins. when the stop mode is released by stop2 to stop5 pins, the stop pin needs to be used. in details, refer to the following section " 14.2 control ". 14.1 configuration figure 14-1 key-on wakeup circuit 14.2 control stop2 to stop5 pins can controlled by key-on wakeup c ontrol register (stopcr). it can be configured as enable/disable in 1-bit unit. when thos e pins are used for stop mode releas e, configure corresponding i/o pins to input mode by i/o port register beforehand. 14.3 function stop mode can be entered by setting up the system control register (syscr1), and can be exited by detecting the "l" level on stop2 to stop5 pins, which are enabled by stopcr, for releasing stop mode (note1). key-on wakeup control register stopcr76543210 (0f9ah) stop5 stop4 stop3 stop2 (initial value: 0000 ****) stop5 stop mode released by stop5 0:disable 1:enable write only stop4 stop mode released by stop4 0:disable 1:enable write only stop3 stop mode released by stop3 0:disable 1:enable write only stop2 stop mode released by stop2 0:disable 1:enable write only stopcr int5 stop stop mode release signal (1: release) (0f9ah) stop2 stop3 stop4 stop5 stop2 stop3 stop4 stop5
page 160 14. key-on wakeup (kwu) 14.3 function TMP86FS23UG also, each level of the stop2 to stop5 pins can be co nfirmed by reading correspondi ng i/o port data register, check all stop2 to stop5 pins "h" that is enabled by stopcr before the stop mode is startd (note2,3). note 1: when the stop mode released by the edge release mo de (syscr1 = ?0?), inhibit input from stop2 to stop5 pins by key-on wakeup control register (stopcr) or must be set "h" level into stop2 to stop5 pins that are available input during stop mode. note 2: when the stop pin input is high or stop2 to stop5 pins input which is enabled by stopcr is low, executing an instruction which starts stop mode wi ll not place in stop mode but instead will immediately start the release sequence (warm up). note 3: the input circuit of key-on wakeup input and port i nput is separated?aso each input voltage threshold value is diffrent. therefore, a value comes from port input before stop mode start may be diffrent from a value which is detected by key-on wakeup input (figure 14-2). note 4: stop pin doesn?t have the control register such as stop cr, so when stop mode is released by stop2 to stop5 pins, stop pin also should be used as stop mode release function. note 5: in stop mode, key-on wakeup pin which is enabled as input mode (for releasing stop mode) by key-on wakeup control register (stopcr) may genarate the penet ration current, so the said pin must be disabled ad conversion input (analog voltage input). note 6: when the stop mode is released by stop2 to stop5 pins, the level of stop pin should hold "l" level (figure 14-3). figure 14-2 key-on wakeup input and port input figure 14-3 priority of stop pin and stop2 to stop5 pins table 14-1 release level (edge) of stop mode pin name release level (edge) syscr1="1" (note2) syscr1="0" stop "h" level rising edge stop2 "l" level don?t use (note1) stop3 "l" level don?t use (note1) stop4 "l" level don?t use (note1) stop5 "l" level don?t use (note1) port input external pin key-on wakeup input stop pin a) stop release stop mode stop mode stop pin "l" b) release stop mode stop mode in case of stop2 to stop5 stop2 pin
page 161 TMP86FS23UG 15. lcd driver the TMP86FS23UG has a driver and control circuit to dir ectly drive the liquid crysta l device (lcd). the pins to be connected to lcd are as follows: 1. segment output port 32 pins (seg31 to seg0) 2. common output port 4 pins (com3 to com0) in addition, vlc pin is provided for the lcd power supply. the devices that can be directly driven is sel ectable from lcd of the following drive methods: 1. 1/4 duty (1/3 bias) lcd max 128 segments (8 segments 16 digits) 2. 1/3 duty (1/3 bias) lcd max 96 segments (8 segments 12 digits) 3. 1/3 duty (1/2 bias) lcd max 96 segments (8 segments 12 digits) 4. 1/2 duty (1/2 bias) lcd max 64 segments (8 segments 8 digits) 5. static lcd max 32 segments (8 segments 4 digits) 15.1 configuration figure 15-1 lcd driver com3 com0 vlc duty control fc/2 17 , fs/2 9 fc/2 14 fc/2 16 , fs/2 8 common driver dbr display data area display data select control timing control display data buffer register blanking control segment driver fc/2 15 to lcdcr to duty slf edsp lrse power switch and  bias, bleeder  resistance 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 seg0 seg31
page 162 15. lcd driver 15.1 configuration TMP86FS23UG 15.2 control the lcd control register (lcdcr) cont rols the lcd driver. edsp specifies whether to enable the lcd display. if edsp is cleared to ?0? for blanking, the power switch for the vlc pin is turned off. so, the com pin and pin out- put selected with seg enter gnd level. note 1: the base-frequency (slf) source clock is swit ched between high and low frequencies by the syscr2 pro- gramming. the base frequency does not depend on the tbtcr programming. note 2: if the setting of syscr2is changed, be sure to turn off the lcd (clear edsp to ?0?) to avoid the output of incor- rect waveform. note 3: programming lrse properly according to the lcd panel used. as the lrse programming increases (lengthen the period of enabling of the low resistor), the drive capability becomes higher while the power dissipation increases. reversely, as the lrse programming decreases shorten the period of enabling of the low resistor, the drive capability becomes lower while the power consumption decreases. note 4: if the idle0, sleep0, or stop mode is activated when the display is enabled, lcdcr is automatically changed to ?0? to blank the display. lcd driver control register lcdcr (0027h) 76543210 edsp lrsel duty slf (initial value: 0000 0000) edsp lcd display control 0: blanking 1: enables lcd display (blanking is released) r/w lrse period selection of enabling (turn on) of the low bleeder resistor (for implementing appropriate lcd panel drive capability) normal1/2, idle/1/2 mode slow1/2, sleep1/2 mode slf setting slf setting 11 10 01 00 01 00 00: 2 6 /fc 2 7 /fc 2 8 /fc 2 9 /fc 1/fs 2/fs 01: 2 9 /fc 2 10 /fc 2 11 /fc 2 12 /fc 2 3 /fs 2 4 /fs 10: always enabling 11: reserved duty selection of driving methods 000: 1/4 duty (1/3 bias) 001: 1/3 duty (1/3 bias) 010: 1/3 duty (1/2 bias) 011: 1/2 duty (1/2 bias) 100: static 101: reserved 110: reserved 111: reserved slf selection of lcd frame fre- quency normal1/2, idle0/1/2 mode slow1/2, sleep1/2 mode 00: 01: 10: 11: fc/2 17 [hz] fc/2 16 fc/2 15 fc/2 13 fs/2 9 [hz] fs/2 8 reserved reserved
page 163 TMP86FS23UG 15.2.1 lcd driving methods as for lcd driving method, 5 types can be selected by lcdcr. the driving method is initialized in the initial program according to the lcd used. note 1: f f : frame frequency note 2: v lcd : lcd drive voltage (= v dd ? v lc ) figure 15-2 lcd drive wave form (com - seg pins) v lcd ? v lcd 1/f f 1/f f v lcd ? v lcd data "1" data "0" 0 data "1" ? v lcd data "0" 0 (b) 1/3 duty (1/3 bias) data "1" data "0" 1/f f v lcd 0 (c) 1/3 duty (1/2 bias) (a) 1/4 duty (1/3 bias) v lcd ? v lcd data "1" data "0" 1/f f 0 (e) static ? v lcd data "1" data "0" 1/f f v lcd 0 (d) 1/2 duty (1/2 bias)
page 164 15. lcd driver 15.1 configuration TMP86FS23UG 15.2.2 frame frequency frame frequency (f f ) is set according to driving method and base frequency as shown in the following table 15-1. the base frequency is selected by lcdcr acco rding to the frequency fc and fs of the basic clock to be used. note: fc: high-frequency clock [hz] note: fs: low-frequency clock [hz] table 15-1 setting of lcd frame frequency for high frequency clock (a) at the syscr2 = ?0?. slf base frequency [hz] frame frequency [hz] 1/4 duty 1/3 duty 1/2 duty static 00 (fc = 16 mhz) 122 163 244 122 (fc = 8 mhz) 61 81 122 61 01 (fc = 8 mhz) 122 163 244 122 (fc = 4 mhz) 61 81 122 61 10 (fc = 4 mhz) 122 163 244 122 (fc = 2 mhz) 61 81 122 61 11 (fc = 2 mhz) 122 162 244 122 (fc = 1 mhz) 61 81 122 61 table 15-2 setting of lcd frame frequency for low frequency clock (b) at the syscr2 = ?1?. slf base frequency [hz] frame frequency [hz] 1/4 duty 1/3 duty 1/2 duty static 00 (fs = 32.768 khz) 64 85 128 64 01 (fs = 32.768 khz) 128 171 256 128 1* reserved fc 2 17 -------- fc 2 17 -------- 4 3 -- - fc 2 17 -------- ? 4 2 -- - fc 2 17 -------- ? fc 2 17 -------- fc 2 16 -------- fc 2 16 -------- 4 3 -- - fc 2 16 -------- ? 4 2 -- - fc 2 16 -------- ? fc 2 16 -------- fc 2 15 -------- fc 2 15 -------- 4 3 -- - fc 2 15 -------- ? 4 2 -- - fc 2 15 -------- ? fc 2 15 -------- fc 2 14 -------- fc 2 14 -------- 4 3 -- - fc 2 14 -------- ? 4 2 -- - fc 2 14 -------- ? fc 2 14 -------- fs 2 9 ----- - fs 2 9 ----- - 4 3 -- - fs 2 9 ----- - ? 4 2 -- - fs 2 9 ----- - ? fs 2 9 ----- - fs 2 8 ----- - fs 2 8 ----- - 4 3 -- - fs 2 8 ----- - ? 4 2 -- - fs 2 8 ----- - ? fs 2 8 ----- -
page 165 TMP86FS23UG 15.2.3 lcd drive voltage lcd driving voltage vlcd is given as potential difference vdd ? vlc between pins vdd and vlc. therefore, when the cpu voltage and lcd drive voltage are the same, vlc pin will be connected to vss pin. the lcd lights when the potential difference between segment output and common output is vlcd. other- wise it turns off. during reset, the power switch of lcd driver is automatically turned off, shutting off the vlc voltage. after reset, if the p*lcr register (*; port no.) fo r each port is set to ?1? with lcdcr = ?0?, a gnd level is output from the pin which can be used as segment. the power switch is turned on to supply vlc voltage to lcd driver by setting with lcdcr to ?1?. if the idle0, sleep0, or stop mode is activated , lcdcr is automati cally changed to ?0? to blank the display. to turn the disp lay back on after releasing from th e previous mode, set lcdcr to ?1? again. note:during reset, the lcd common outputs (com3 to com0) are fixed ?0? level. however, the multiplex port (input/output port or seg output is selectable) becomes high impedance. therefore, when the reset input is long remarkably, ghost problem may appear in lcd display. 15.2.4 adjusting the lcd panel drive capability the lcd panel drive capability can be adjusted by programming lcdcr. when the period of enabling of the low bleeder resistor is lengthened, th e drive capability becomes hi gher while the power con- sumption increases. reversely, when the period of enabli ng of the low bleeder resistor is shortened, the drive capability becomes lower while the power consumption d ecreases. if the drive capability is not enough, the lcd display might present a ghost problem. so, implem ent the optimum drive capability for the lcd panel used. the figure below shows the bleeder resistance timing and equivalent circuit for 1/4 duty and 1/3 bias. figure 15-3 bleeder resistance selection wit h lcdcr (for 1/ 4 duty and 1/3 bias) vdd vm1 vm2 vlcd frame frequency r lt r lt r lt r lt r lt when lcdcr "10b" r lt r ht r lt r ht r lt r ht r lt r ht r lt r ht when lcdcr = "00b" or "01b" (a) on timing for low bleeder resistance vm2 vm vdd r l r l r l r h r h r h vlc high/low resistance switching signal r h : high resistance r l : low resistance vlc (b) equivalent circuit for bleeder resistance r lt : period during which resistance r l is selected (time specified with lcdcr) r ht : period during which resistance r h is selected (time specified with lcdcr 4 ? time specified with lcdcr)
page 166 15. lcd driver 15.3 lcd display operation TMP86FS23UG 15.3 lcd display operation 15.3.1 display data setting display data is stored to the display data area (addres s 0f80h to 0f8fh,16 bytes) in the dbr. the display data stored in the display data area is automatically r ead out and sent to the lcd driver by the hardware. the lcd driver generates the segment signal and common si gnal according to the displa y data and driving method. therefore, display patterns can be changed by only over writing the contents of display data area by the pro- gram. table 15-4 shows the correspondence between the display data area and seg/com pins. lcd light when display data is ?1? and turn off when ?0?. according to the driving method of lcd, the number of pixels which can be driven becomes different, and the number of bits in the display data area which is used to store display da ta also becomes different. therefore, the bits which are not used to store display data as well as the data buffer which corresponds to the addresses not connected to lcd can be used to store general user process data (see table 15-3). note: ?: this bit is not used for display data 15.3.2 blanking blanking is enabled when lcd cr is cleared to ?0?. to blank the lcd display and turn it off, a gnd-level signal is output to the com pin and the port which can be used as the segment by setting of p*lcr register (*; port no.). at this time, the power switch of vlc pin is turned off. table 15-3 driving method and bit for display data driving methods bit 7/3 bit 6/2 bit 5/1 bit 4/0 1/4 duty com3 com2 com1 com0 1/3 duty ? com2 com1 com0 1/2 duty ? ? com1 com0 static ? ? ? com0 table 15-4 lcd display data area (dbr) address bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 0f80h seg1 seg0 0f81h seg3 seg2 0f82h seg5 seg4 0f83h seg7 seg6 0f84h seg9 seg8 0f85h seg11 seg10 0f86h seg13 seg12 0f87h seg15 seg14 0f88h seg17 seg16 0f89h seg19 seg18 0f8ah seg21 seg20 0f8bh seg23 seg22 0f8ch seg25 seg24 0f8dh seg27 seg26 0f8eh seg29 seg28 0f8fh seg31 seg30 com3 com2 com1 com0 com3 com2 com1 com0
page 167 TMP86FS23UG 15.4 control method of lcd driver 15.4.1 initial setting figure 15-4 shows the flowchart of initialization. figure 15-4 initial se tting of lcd driver 15.4.2 store of display data generally, display data are prepared as fixed data in program memory (rom) and stored in display data area by load command. note:db is a byte data definition instruction. example :to operate a 1/4 duty lcd of 32 segments 4 com-mons at fr ame frequency fc/2 16 [hz], the period of enabling of the low bleeder resistor: 2 8 /fc ld (lcdcr), 00000001b ; sets lcd driving method, the period of enabling of low bleeder resistor and frame frequency. ld (p*lcr), 0ffh ; sets segment output control register. (*; port no.) : : : : ; sets the initial value of display data. ld (lcdcr), 10000001b ; display enable example :(1) to display using 1/4 duty lcd a numerical valu e which corresponds to the lcd data stored in data memory at address 80h (when pins com and seg are connected to lcd as in figure 15-5), display data become as shown in table 15-5. ld a, (80h) add a, table-$-7 ld hl, 0f85h ld w, (pc + a) ld (hl), w ret table: db 11011111b, 00000110b, 11100011b, 10100111b, 00110110b, 10110101b, 11110101b, 00010111b, 11110111b, 10110111b sets lcd driving method (duty). sets frame frequency (slf). selects period of enabling of low resistor (lrse). sets segment output control registers (p*lcr (*; port no.)) initialization of display data area. display enable (edsp) (releases from blanking.)
page 168 15. lcd driver 15.3 lcd display operation TMP86FS23UG figure 15-5 example of com, seg pin connection (1/4 duty) example: (2) table 15-6 shows an example of display data which are displayed using 1/2 duty lcd in the same way as table 15-5. the connection between pins com and seg are the same as shown in figure 15-6. figure 15-6 example of com, seg pin connection table 15-5 example of display data (1/4 duty) no. display display data no. display display data 0 11011111 5 101 10101 1 00000110 6 11110101 2 11100011 7 00000111 3 10100111 8 11110111 4 00110110 9 10110111 seg10 seg11 com0 com1 com2 com3 seg10 seg12 seg11 seg13 com0 com1
page 169 TMP86FS23UG note: *: don?t care 15.4.3 example of lcd driver output figure 15-7 1/4 duty (1/3 bias) drive table 15-6 example of display data (1/2 duty) number display data number display data high order address low order address high order address low order address 0 **01**11 **01**11 5 **11**10 **01**01 1 **00**10 **00**10 6 **11**11 **01**01 2 **10**01 **01**11 7 **01**10 **00**11 3 **10**10 **01**11 8 **11**11 **01**11 4 **11**10 **00**10 9 **11**10 **01**11 v lc 0 v lc 0 v lc 0 v lc 0 v lc 0 v lc 0 v lcd -v lcd v lcd 0 0 -v lcd seg10 seg11 display data area address 0f85 h seg10 edsp seg11 com0 com1 com2 com3 com0-seg10 (selected) com2-seg11 (non selected) 1011 0101 com0 com1 com2 com3
page 170 15. lcd driver 15.3 lcd display operation TMP86FS23UG figure 15-8 1/3 duty (1/3 bias) drive seg12 address *: don?t care seg10 edsp seg11 seg12 com0 com1 com2 com0-seg11 (selected) com1-seg12 (non selected) seg11 seg10 com0 com1 com2 display data area 0f85 h 0f86 h *111 *010 **** *001 v lc 0 v lc 0 v lc 0 v lc 0 v lc 0 v lc 0 v lcd -v lcd v lcd 0 0 -v lcd
page 171 TMP86FS23UG figure 15-9 1/3 duty (1/2 bias) drive seg12 address *: don?t care seg10 edsp seg11 seg12 com0 com1 com2 com0-seg11 (selected) com1-seg12 (non selected) seg11 seg10 com0 com1 com2 display data area 0f85 h 0f86 h *111 *010 **** *001 v dd v lc v dd v lc v dd v lc v dd v lc v dd v lc v dd v lc 0 0 v lcd v lcd -v lcd -v lcd
page 172 15. lcd driver 15.3 lcd display operation TMP86FS23UG figure 15-10 1/2 duty (1/2 bias) drive seg13 address *: don?t care seg10 edsp seg11 seg12 seg13 com0 com1 com0-seg11 (selected) com1-seg12 (non selected) seg10 com0 display data area 0f85 h 0f86 h **01 **01 **11 **10 v dd v lc v dd v lc v dd v lc v dd v lc v dd v lc v dd v lc 0 seg11 seg12 com1 0 v lcd v lcd -v lcd -v lcd
page 173 TMP86FS23UG figure 15-11 static drive seg12 seg17 address 0f85 h seg15 seg14 seg13 seg10 seg11 seg16 com0 v dd v dd vlc v dd vlc v dd v lcd -v lcd v lcd 0 seg10 seg14 seg17 com0 com0-seg10 (selected) com0-seg14 (non selected) 0 edsp 0f86 h 0f87 h 0f88 h ***0 ***1 ***1 ***1 ***1 ***0 ***0 ***1 display data area *: don?t care v lc vlc -v lcd
page 174 15. lcd driver 15.3 lcd display operation TMP86FS23UG
page 175 TMP86FS23UG 16. real-time clock the TMP86FS23UG include a real time counter (rtc). a low-frequency clock can be used to provide a periodic interrupt (0.0625[s],0.125[s],0 .25[s],0.50[s]) at a programm ed interval, implement the clock function. the rtc can be used in the mode in which the low-frequency oscillator is active (except for the sleep0 mode). 16.1 configuration figure 16-1 confi guration of the rtc 16.2 control of the rtc the rtc is controlled by the rtc control register (rtccr). note 1: program the rtccr during low-freque ncy oscillation (when syscr2 = ?1?). for selecting an interrupt genera- tion period, program the rtcsel when the timer is inacti ve (rtcrun = ?0?). during the timer operation, do not change the rtcsel programming at the same moment the timer stops. note 2: the timer automatically stops, and this register is initialized (the timer's binary counter is also initialized) if one of the fol- lowing operations is performed while the timer is active: 1. stopping the low-frequency oscillation (with syscr2 = ?0?) 2. when the TMP86FS23UG are put in stop or sleep0 mode therefore, before activating the timer after releasing fr om stop or sleep0 mode, r eprogram the registers again. note 3: if a read instruction for rtccr is exec uted, undefined value is set to bits 7 to 3. note 4: if break processing is performed on the debugger for the development tool during the time r operation, the timer stops counting (contents of the rtccr isn't altered). when the break is cancelled, processing is restarted from the point at which it was suspended. rtc control register rtccr (0017h) 7654321 0 rtcsel rtcrun (initial value: **** *000) rtcsel interrupt generation period (fs = 32.768 khz) 00: 0.50 [s] 01: 0.25 [s] 10: 0.125 [s] 11: 0.0625 [s] r/w rtcrun rtc control 0: stops and clears the binary counter. 1: starts counting selector rtccr rtcsel interrupt request intrtc binary counter rtcrun 2 14 /fs 2 13 /fs 2 12 /fs 2 11 /fs fs (32.768 khz)
page 176 16. real-time clock 16.3 function TMP86FS23UG 16.3 function the rtc counts up on the internal low-frequency clock. when rtccr is set to ?1?, the binary counter starts counting up. each time the end of the period specified with rtccr is detected, an intrtc interrupt is generated, and the binary counter is cleared. the timer continue s counting up even after the binary counter is cleared.
page 177 TMP86FS23UG 17. multiply-accumulate (mac) unit the TMP86FS23UG includes a multiply-accumulate (mac) unit. the mac unit is capable of executing 16-bit 16-bit multiplications and 16-bit 16-bit + 32-bit multiply-accumu- late operations. the mac unit supports only integer arithmetic, not fixed-point or floating-point arithmetic. both signed and unsigned operations can be performed. the mac unit can only be used in normal1 or normal2 mode. all the registers of the mac unit are initial- ized upon entering a mode other than normal mode. with development tools, if break mode is entered whil e the mac unit is calculating, the calculation is continued but its result is unpredictable. in th is case, the calculation must be re-execu ted after break mode is exited. do not write to the multiplicand register in break mode. when the calculation is co mpleted, it is possible to enter break mode and read the calculati on result in break mode. 17.1 configuration figure 17-1 mac unit 17.2 registers the mac unit consists of the following registers: 17.2.1 command register the command register is used to enable and disable the mac unit, specify the ar ithmetic mode, and clear the result register. table 17-1 registers in the mac unit register address number of bits command register (maccr) 0fa4h 8 bits status register (macsr) 0fa5h 8 bits multiplier data register (mpldrh, mpldrl) 0fa7h, 0fa6h 16 bits multiplicand data register (mpcdrh, mpcdrl) 0fa9h, 0fa8h 16 bits result register (rcaldr4 to rcaldr1) 0faah to 0fadh 32 bits addend register (maddr4 to maddr1) 0faah to 0fadh 32 bits control circuit status register command register arithmetic unit temporary register 2 temporary register 3 result register multiplier register multiplicand register temporary register 1
page 178 17. multiply-accumulate (mac) unit 17.3 control TMP86FS23UG 17.2.2 status register the status register contains flags to indicate the operation status of the mac unit and the calculation result. 17.2.3 multiplier data register the data written to this register is calculated as a multiplier. 17.2.4 multiplicand data register the data written to this register is calculated as a multiplicand. 17.2.5 result register the calculation result is stored in this register. 17.2.6 addend register the data written to this register is calculated as an addend in a multiply-accumu late operation. an addend must be written to this register while calculation is not being performed (calc = ?0?). 17.3 control note 1: setting rclr to ?1? causes the result, addend, and status registers to be initialized. the multiplier, multiplicand, and com- mand registers remain the same as before. (rclr is automatical ly cleared to ?0? one machine cycle after it is set to ?1?.) note 2: writing to cmod (including an overwrite) makes no c hanges to the status, multiplier, multiplicand, result, and addend re g- isters. note 3: before changing the arithmetic mode, be sure to c heck that calculation is not being performed (calc = ?0?). note 4: clearing the result register with rclr is possible only when calculation is not being performed (calc = ?0?). (rclr can - not be set to ?1?during calculation.) note 5: bits 6 to 4 are always read as ?1?. ( ?0? cannot be written.) command register maccr (0fa4h) 76543210 rclr ?1? ?1? ?1? cmod emac (initial value: 0111 0000) rclr result register clear 0: -(keeps the value of the result register.) 1: clears the result register. (this bit is automatically cleared to ?0? one machine cycle after it is set to ?1?.) r/w cmod arithmetic mode 000: unsigned multiply (16 bits 16 bits) 001: unsigned multiply-accumulate (16 bits 16 bits + 32 bits) 010: signed multiply (16 bits 16 bits) 011: signed multiply-accumulate (16 bits 16 bits + 32 bits) 1**: reserved emac mac unit control 0: disables the mac unit. 1: enables the mac unit. status register macsr (0fa5h) 76543210 ?1? ?1? ?1? carf zerf sign ovrf calc (initial value: 1110 0000)
page 179 TMP86FS23UG note 1: the status register is initialized when the result register is cleared (rclr = ?1?). note 2: carf, zerf, sign, and ovrf are programmed at the end of calculation. they are not affected by a read from the status register. note 3: zerf and sign are not affected by a write to the addend register. note 4: in multiply mode, ovrf and carf are always read as ?0?. note 5: bit 7 to 5 are always read as ?1?. note: in signed arithmetic mode, bi t 15 is treated as the sign bit. note 1: in signed arithmetic mode, bit 15 is treated as the sign bit. note 2: calculation can only be started by writing to both the lower byte (mpcdrl) and upper byte (mpcdrh) of the mul- tiplicand register in this order. note 3: the multiplicand register can only be programmed when dat a is written in the order of lower byte and upper byte. if data is only written to the upper byte, the written data c annot be read out. (if data is only written to the lower byte, the written data can be read out.) note: in signed arithmetic mode, bit 31 contai ns the sign of the calculation result. carf carry flag 0: no carry occurred in multiply-accumulate operation. 1: carry occurred in multiply-accumulate operation. read only zerf zero flag 0: calculation resulst is other than ?00000000h?. 1: calculation result is ?00000000h?. sign sign flag 0: result register contents are positive or ?00000000h?. 1: result register contents are negative. ovrf overflow flag 0: overflow occurred. 1: no overflow occurred. calc operation status flag 0: calculation not in progress 1: calculation in progress multiplier data register mpldrh, mpldrl (0fa7h, 0fa6h) 1514131211109876543210 mpldrh (0fa7h) mpldrl (0fa6h) (initial value: 0000 0000 0000 0000) r/w multiplicand data register mpcdrh, mpcdrl (0fa9h, 0fa8h) 1514131211109876543210 mpcdrh (0fa9h) mpcdrl (0fa8h) (initial value: 0000 0000 0000 0000) r/w result register rcaldr4, rcaldr3 (0fadh, 0fach) 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 rcaldr4 (0fadh) rcaldr3 (0fach) (initial value: 0000 0000 0000 0000) read only rcaldr2, rcaldr1 (0fabh, 0faah) 1514131211109876543210 rcaldr2 (0fabh) rcaldr1 (0faah) (initial value: 0000 0000 0000 0000) read only addend register maddr4, maddr3 (0fadh, 0fach) 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 maddr4 (0fadh) maddr3 (0fach) (initial value: 0000 0000 0000 0000) write only maddr2, maddr1 (0fabh, 0faah) 1514131211109876543210 maddr2 (0fabh) maddr1 (0faah) (initial value: 0000 0000 0000 0000) write only
page 180 17. multiply-accumulate (mac) unit 17.4 register description TMP86FS23UG note 1: in signed arithmetic mode, bit 31 is treated as the sign bit. note 2: writing to the addend register changes the contents of the result register. thus, read from the result register before w riting to the addend register. 17.4 register description 17.4.1 emac setting maccr to ?1? enable s the mac unit. once enabled, the mac unit remains enabled until it is disabled. 17.4.2 cmod the maccr is used to specify the arithmetic mode. calculation is started automatically when data is written to both the lower byte (mpcdrl) and upper byte (mpcdrh) of the multiplicand register in this orde r. thus, the multiplier register (mpldrh, mpldrl) must be set before the multiplicand register. when calculation is completed, the result is stored in the result register (rcaldr4 to rcaldr1). the arithmetic mode is valid until the cmod field is changed. note that if the operation mode is changed to idle0/1/2, slow1/2, or stop mode, cmod is initialized. during calculation, the next data can be written to the multiplier and multiplicand registers only once. do not write to these registers more than once. whether or not calculation is in progress can be ch ecked by reading the macsr flag. note 1: before changing the arithmetic mode, ensure t hat calculation is not being performed (calc = ?0?). note 2: writing to the cmod field (including an overwrite) makes no changes to the status, multiplier, multiplicand, result, and addend registers. thus, to clear the stat us, result, and addend registers after a change of the arithmetic mode, set the rclr bit to ?1?. 17.4.3 rclr when calculation is not being performed (calc = ?0?), setting maccr to ?1? causes the result, addend, and status registers to be initilized. (the multiplier and multiplicand registers remain the same as before.) rclr is automatically cleared to ?0 ? one machine cycle after it is set to ?1? note:when calculation is in progress (calc = ?1?), rclr cannot be set to ?1?. (the instruction to set it to ?1? is invalid.) as shown in table 17-2, the state of each register changes when: the mac unit is disabled (emac = ?0?); the result register is cleared (rclr = ?1 ?); or the operation mode is changed. note 1: the multiplier, multiplicand, and addend registers can be written to only when the mac unit is enabled (emac = ?1?). note 2: when writing to the multiplicand register, be sure to writ e to the lower byte (mpcdrl) first and then to the upper byte (mpcdrh). note 3: rclr can be written to only when calc ulation is not being performed (calc = ?0?). table 17-2 effects of the emac and rclr bits on the mac registers register emac = ?0? (disable) rclr = ?1? (register clear) idle0/1/2, slow1/2, or stop mode command register (maccr) bits other than emac remain the same as before bits other than rclr remain the same as before. rclr is cleared to ?0? after one machine cycle. initialized status register (macsr) init ialized initialized initialized multiplier data register (mpldrh, mpldrl) initialized remains the same as before initialized multiplicand data register (mpcdrh, mpcdrl) initi alized remains the same as before initialized result register (rcaldr4 to rcald r1) initialized initialized initialized addend register (maddr4 tomaddr1) initialized initialized initialized
page 181 TMP86FS23UG note 4: when the mac unit is enabled (emac = ?1?), if the operation mode is changed to idle0/1/2, slow1/2, or stop mode, the command register (maccr) is initialized and its cont ents are discarded. thus, program the maccr again after each of these operation modes is exited. 17.5 arithmetic modes the following four arithm etic modes are available: 1. unsigned multiply (16 bits 16 bits) 2. signed multiply (16 bits 16 bits) 3. unsigned multiply-accumulate (16 bits 16 bits + 32 bits) 4. signed multiply-accumulate (16 bits 16 bits + 32 bits) 17.5.1 unsigned multiply mode setting the maccr field in the command re gister to ?000b? places the mac unit in unsigned multiply mode. in this mode, the valu es of the multiplier and multiplican d registers are each treated as 16-bit data for calculation. calculation is started automatically by writing a mult iplier to the multiplier register (mpldrh, mpldrl) and then writing a multiplicand to the lower byte (mpc drl) and upper byte (mpcdrh) of the multiplicand register in this order. the calculation result is stored as 32-bit data in the result register (rcaldr4 to rcaldr1). (the previous cal culation result is cleared.) 17.5.2 signed multiply mode setting the maccr field in the command regist er to ?010b? places the mac unit in signed mul- tiply mode. in this mode, bit 15 in the multiplier an d multiplicand registers is each treated as the sign bit. calculation is started automatically by writing a mu ltiplier to the multiplier register (mpldrh, mpldrl) and then writing a multiplicand to the lower byte (mpc drl) and upper byte (mpcdrh) of the multiplicand register in this order. the calculation result is stored as 32-bit data in the result register (rcaldr4 to rcaldr1). (bit 31 contains the sign, and the previous cal culation result is cleared.) the sign of the calcula- tion result varies depending on the signs of the multiplier and multiplicand, as shown in table 17-3. 17.5.3 unsigned multiply-accumulate mode setting the maccr field in the command re gister to ?001b? places the mac unit in unsigned multiply-accumulate mode. in this mode, the values of the multiplier and multiplicand registers are each treated as 16-bit data for calculation. calculation is started automatically by writing a mult iplier to the multiplier register (mpldrh, mpldrl) and then writing a multiplicand to the lower byte (mpcdrh) and upper byte (mpcdrh) of the multiplicand register in this order. first, the multiplier and multipli cand are multiplied. then, the contents of the addend reg- ister are added to the product. the sum is stor ed as 32-bit data in the result register. in unsigned multiply-accumulate mode , any addend can be written to the addend register when calculation is not being performed. if, for example, a b is executed after arbitrary data c is written to the addend register, the result of a b + c is stored in the result register (r caldr4 to rcaldr1). setting the rclr bit to ?1? table 17-3 signs used in singed multiply mode sign of multiplier sign of multip licand sign of calculation result 000 011 101 110
page 182 17. multiply-accumulate (mac) unit 17.6 status flags TMP86FS23UG causes the result and addend registers to be cleared. afte r calculation is completed, the contents of the result register are automatically stored in the addend register. thus, if the conten ts of the addend register are not changed, the result of the previous multiply-accumulate op eration is used as an addend for the next calculation. note 1: be sure to write to the addend register when calculation is not being performed (calc = ?0?). note 2: writing to the addend register changes the contents of the result register. thus, read from the result register before writing to the addend register. 17.5.4 signed multiply-accumulate mode setting the maccr field in th e command register to ?011b? places the mac unit in signed mul- tiply-accumulate mode. in this mode, bit 15 in the mul tiplier and multiplicand regist er is each treated as the sign bit. calculation is started automatically by writing a mult iplier to the multiplier register (mpldrh, mpldrl) and then writing a multiplicand to the lower byte (mpc drl) and upper byte (mpcdrh) of the multiplicand register in this order. first, the multiplicand and mult iplicand are multiplied. then, the contents of the addend register are added to the product. the sum is stored as signed 32-bit data in the result register (rcaldr4 to rcaldr1). the sign of the result varies as shown in table 17-4. as in th e case of unsigned multiply-accumu- late mode, any addend can be written to the addend register when calculation is not being performed. note: in signed multiply-accumulate mode, bit 31 in the addend register is treated as the sign bit. 17.5.5 valid numerical ranges table 17-5 shows the numerical range that can be handled in each arithmetic mode. 17.6 status flags the status register macsr contains the following five flags. ovrf, carf, sign, and zerf are programmed when calculation is completed, and these flags are not affected by a read from the status register. 1. operation status flag (calc) 2. overflow flag (ovrf) 3. carry flag (carf) 4. sign flag (sign) 5. zero flag (zerf) table 17-4 signs used in sg ined multiply-accumulate mode sign of product sign of addend sign (bit 31) of calculation result when ovrf = ?0? when ovrf = ?1? 00 0 1 01 ?1? when sum < 0 ?0? when sum 0 ? 10 ?1? when sum < 0 ?0? when sum 0 ? 11 1 0 table 17-5 valid numerical ranges in de cimal (with hexadecimal shown in brackets) mode multiplier/multiplicand addend sum unsigned multiply 0 to 65535 (0000h to ffffh) ? 0 to 4294836225 (00000000h to fffe0001h) signed multiply -32768 to 32767 (8000h to 7fffh) ? -1073709056 to 1073741824 (c0008000h to 40000000h) unsigned multiply- accumulate 0 to 65535 (0000h to ffffh) 0 to 4294967295 (00000000h to ffffffffh) 0 to 4294967295 (00000000h to ffffffffh) signed multiply- accumulate -32768 to 32767 (8000h to 7fffh) -2147483648 to 2147483647 (80000000h to 7fffffffh) -2147483648 to 2147483647 (80000000h~7fffffffh)
page 183 TMP86FS23UG 17.6.1 operation st atus flag (calc) calc indicates the status of the mac unit. it is set to "1" when calcula tion is in progress and "0" when cal- culation is not in progress. 17.6.2 overflow flag (ovrf) ovrf is set to ?1? if the sum of positive values is nega tive or the sum of negative values is positive in signed multiply-accumulate mode. in othe r cases, it is cleared to ?0?. note:in multiply mode, ovrf is always read as "0". 17.6.3 carry flag (carf) carf is set to ?1? if a carry occurs in the highest-order bi t (bit 31) in a multiply -accumulate operation. in other cases, it is cleared to "0". note: in multiply mode, carf is always read as "0". 17.6.4 sign flag (sign) sign contains the same data as the highest-order bit (bit 31) of the cal culation result (regar dless of whether calculation is performed in signed or unsigned mode). note:sign is programmed by the calculation result. this flag is not affected by a write to the addend register. 17.6.5 zero flag (zerf) zerf is set to ?1? if the result register contains ?00000000h? . in other cases, it is cleared to ?0?. it is also set to ?1? if the result register contains ?00000 000h? after an overflow or carry has occurred. note:zerf is programmed by the calculation result. this flag is not affected by a write to the addend register. 17.7 example of software processing the following shows an example of calculating x = x + y + z. the calculation time is 3 s when fc = 8 mhz. the multiplier and multiplicand are separately stored in da ta ram. the w and a registers are used as general-pur- pose registers. the general-purpose re gisters are not saved on the stack. the processing for enabling/disabling the mac unit is not included. note 1: if the operation mode is changed by processing an interrupt during calculation, the correct calculation result may not be obtained. thus, before starting calculation, be sure to execute the di instructi on to disable interrupts. note 2: before reading the result register after calculation is started, check that the calc flag in the macsr register is "0" or wait for at least three machine cycles (e.g. nop x 3). instruction processing time di (disables interrupts.) ld wa, (ram_multiplier ) 6 cycles/3 s ld (mpldrl), wa ; multiplier register 6 cycles/3 s ld wa, (ram_multiplier x) 6 cycles/3 s ld (mpcdrl), wa ; multiplicand register 6 cycles/3 s ; the next data can be written in succession.
page 184 17. multiply-accumulate (mac) unit 17.7 example of software processing TMP86FS23UG ld wa, (ram_multiplier ) 6 cycles/3 s ld (mpldrl), wa ; multiplier register 6 cycles/3 s ld wa, (ram_multiplicand z) 6 cycles/3 s ld (mpcdrl), wa ; multiplicand register 6 cycles/3 s ; the first calculation is already completed. thus, the next data can be written. ld wa, (ram_multiplier y) 6 cycles/3 s ld (mpldrl), wa ; multiplier register 6 cycles/3 s ld wa, (ram_multiplicand z) 6 cycles/3 s ld (mpcdrl), wa ; multiplicand register 6 cycles/3 s nop ; wait three machine cycles or longer. nop ; (note 2) nop ld wa, (rcaldr1) ; low-order part of the result register 6 cycles/3 s ld (ram_low-order part of result x), wa 6 cycles/3 s ld wa, (rcaldr3) ; high-order part of the result register 6 cycles/3 s ld (ram_high-order part of result x), wa 6 cycles/3 s ei (enables interrupts.) processing time 51 ms 6 cycles/3 s ret 6 cycles/3 s total processing time 57 s
page 185 TMP86FS23UG 18. flash memory TMP86FS23UG has 61440byte flash memory (address: 1000h to ffffh). the write and erase operations to the flash memory are controlled in th e following three types of mode. - mcu mode the flash memory is accessed by the cpu control in the mcu mode. this mode is used for software bug correction and firmware change after shipment of the device since the write operation to the flash memory is available by retaining the application behavior. - serial prom mode the flash memory is accessed by the cpu control in th e serial prom mode. use of the serial interface (uart) enables the flash memory to be controlled by the small number of pins. TMP86FS23UG in the serial prom mode supports on-board programming wh ich enables users to prog ram flash memory after the microcontroller is mounted on a user board. - parallel prom mode the parallel prom mode allows the flash memory to be accessed as a stand-alone flash memory by the program writer provided by the third party. high-speed access to th e flash memory is available by control- ling address and data signals directly. for the suppor t of the program writer, please ask toshiba sales rep- resentative. in the mcu and serial prom modes, the flash memory c ontrol register (flscr) is used for flash memory con- trol. this chapter describes how to acce ss the flash memory using the flash memo ry control register (flscr) in the mcu and serial prom modes.
page 186 18. flash memory 18.1 flash memory control TMP86FS23UG 18.1 flash memory control the flash memory is controlled via the flash memory control register (flscr) and flash memory stanby control resister (flsstb). note 1: the command sequence of the flash me mory can be executed only when flsmd=" 0011b". in other cases, any attempts to execute the command sequence are ineffective. note 2: flsmd must be set to either "1100b" or "0011b". note 3: banksel is effective only in the serial prom mode. in t he mcu mode, the flash memory is always accessed with actual addresses (1000-ffffh) regardless of banksel. note 4: bits 2 through 0 in flscr are always read as don?t care. note 1: when fstb is set to 1, do not execute the read/write in struction to the flash memory bec ause there is a possibility that the expected data is not read or the program is not operated correctl y. if executing the read/write instruction, fstb is initial- ized to 0 automatically. note 2: if an interrupt is issued when fstb is set to 1, fstb is initialized to 0 automatically and then the vector area of the flash memory is read. note 3: if the idle0/1/2, sleep0/1/2 or stop mode is activated when fstb is set to 1, fstb is initialized to 0 automatically. in the idle0/1/2, sleep0/1/2 or stop mode, the standby function operates regardless of fstb setting. 18.1.1 flash memory command sequenc e execution control (flscr) the flash memory can be protected fr om inadvertent write due to program error or microcontroller misoper- ation. this write protection feature is realized by disabling flash memo ry command sequence execution via the flash memory control register (write protect). to enable command sequence execution, set flscr to ?0011b?. to disable comman d sequence execution, set flscr to ?1100b?. after reset, flscr is initialized to ?1100b? to disable command sequence execution. normally, flscr should be set to ?1100b? except when the flash memory needs to be written or erased. 18.1.2 flash memory bank se lect control (flscr) in the serial prom mode, a 2-kbyte bootrom is ma pped to addresses 7800h-7fffh and the flash mem- ory is mapped to 2 banks at 8000h-ffffh. flash memory addresses 1000h-7fffh are mapped to 9000h- ffffh as bank0, and flash memory addresses 800 0h-ffffh are mapped to 8000h-ffffh as bank1. flscr is used to switch between these banks . for example, to access the flash memory address 7000h, set flscr to ?0? and then access f0 00h. to access the flash memory address 9000h, set flscr to ?1 " and then access 9000h. in the mcu mode, the flash memory is accessed with actual addresses at 1000h-ffffh. in this case, flscr is ineffective (i.e., its value has no effect on other operations). flash memory control register flscr76543210 (0fffh) flsmd banksel (initial value : 1100 1***) flsmd flash memory command sequence exe- cution control 1100: disable command sequence execution 0011: enable command sequence execution others: reserved r/w banksel flash memory bank select control (serial prom mode only) 0: select bank0 1: select bank1 r/w flash memory standby control register flsstb76543210 (0fe9h) fstb (initial value : **** ***0) fstb flash memory standby control 0: disable the standby function. 1: enable the standby function. write only
page 187 TMP86FS23UG 18.1.3 flash memory stan dby control (flsstb) low power consumption is enabled by cutting off the steady-state current of the flash memory. in the idle0/1/2, sleep0/1/2 or stop mode, th e steady-state current of the flas h memory is cut off automatically. when the program is executed in the ram area (with out accessing the flash me mory) in the normal 1/2 or slow1/2 mode, the current can be cut off by the contro l of the register. to cut off the steady-state current of the flash memory, set flsstb to ?1? by the c ontrol program in the ram area. the procedures for controlling the flsstb regi ster are explained below. (steps1 and 2 are controlled by the program in the flash memory, and steps 3 through 8 are controlled by the write control program ex ecuted in the ram area.) 1. transfer the control program of th e flsstb register to the ram area. 2. jump to the ram area. 3. disable (di) the interrupt mast er enable flag (imf = ?0?). 4. set flsstb to ?1?. 5. execute the user program. 6. repeat step 5 until the return requ est to the flash memory is detected. 7. set flsstb to ?0?. 8. jump to the flash memory area. note 1: the standby function is not operated by setting fl sstb with the program in the flash memory. you must set flsstb by the program in the ram area. note 2: to use the standby function by setting flsstb to ?1? with the program in the ram area, flsstb must be set to ?0? by the program in the ram area before returning the program control to the flash memory. if the program control is returned to the flash memory with flsstb set to ?1?, the program may misoperate and run out of control. table 18-1 flash memory access operating mode flscr access area specified address mcu mode don?t care 1000h-ffffh serial prom mode 0 (bank0) 1000h-7fffh 9000h-ffffh 1 (bank1) 8000h-ffffh
page 188 18. flash memory 18.2 command sequence TMP86FS23UG 18.2 command sequence the command sequence in the mcu and the serial prom modes consists of six commands (jedec compatible), as shown in table 18-2. addresses specified in the command sequence are recogni zed with the lower 12 bits (excluding ba, sa, and ff7fh used for read protection). the upper 4 bits are used to specify the flash memory area, as shown in table 18-3. note 1: set the address and data to be written. note 2: the area to be erased is specified with the upper 4 bits of the address. 18.2.1 byte program this command writes the fl ash memory for each byte unit. the addresse s and data to be written are specified in the 4th bus write cycle. each byte can be programmed in a maximum of 40 s. the next command sequence cannot be executed until the write operation is completed. to check the completion of the write operation, per- form read operations repeat edly until the same data is read twice fr om the same address in the flash memory. during the write operation, any consecutive attempts to r ead from the same address is reversed bit 6 of the data (toggling between 0 and 1). note:to rewrite data to flash memory addresses at which dat a (including ffh) is already written, make sure to erase the existing data by "sector erase" or "chip erase" before rewriting data. 18.2.2 sector erase (4-kbyte erase) this command erases the flash memory in units of 4 k bytes. the flash memory area to be erased is specified by the upper 4 bits of the 6th bus write cycle address. for example, in the mcu mode, to erase 4 kbytes from 7000h to 7fffh, specify one of the addresses in 7000h-7fffh as the 6th bus write cycle. in the serial prom mode, to erase 4 kbytes from 7000h to 7fffh, set flscr to "0" and then specify one of the addresses in f000h-ffffh as the 6th bus write cycle. the sector erase command is effective only in the mcu and serial prom modes, and it cannot be used in the parallel prom mode. table 18-2 command sequence command sequence 1st bus write cycle 2nd bus write cycle 3rd bus write cycle 4th bus write cycle 5th bus write cycle 6th bus write cycle address data address data address data address data address data address data 1 byte program 555h aah aaah 55h 555h a0h ba (note 1) data (note 1) ---- 2 sector erase (4-kbyte erase) 555h aah aaah 55h 555h 80h 555h aah aaah 55h sa (note 2) 30h 3 chip erase (all erase) 555h aah aaah 55h 555h 80h 555h aah aaah 55h 555h 10h 4product id entry555haahaaah55h555h90h------ 5 product id exitxxhf0h---------- product id exit555haahaaah55h555hf0h------ 6read protect555haahaaah55h555ha5hff7fh00h---- table 18-3 address specification in the command sequence operating mode flscr specified address mcu mode don?t care 1***h-f***h serial prom mode 0 (bank0) 9***h-f***h 1 (bank1) 8***h-f***h
page 189 TMP86FS23UG a maximum of 30 ms is required to erase 4 kbytes. the next command sequence cannot be executed until the erase operation is completed. to check the completion of the erase operation, perf orm read operations repeat- edly for data polling until the same data is read twice from the same address in the flash memory. during the erase operation, any consecutive attempts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6 of the data (toggling between 0 and 1). 18.2.3 chip erase (all erase) this command erases the entire flash memory in appr oximately 30 ms. the next command sequence cannot be executed until the erase operation is completed. to check the completio n of the erase operation, perform read operations repeatedly for data polling until the same data is read twice from the same address in the flash memory. during the erase operation, any consecutive attemp ts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6 of the data (toggling between 0 and 1). after the chip is erased, all bytes contain ffh. 18.2.4 product id entry this command activates the product id mode. in the product id mode, the vendor id, the flash id, and the read protection status can be read from the flash memory. note: the value at address f002h (flash size) depends on the size of flash memory incorporated in each product. for example, if the product has 60-kbyte flash memory, "0eh" is read from address f002h. 18.2.5 product id exit this command is used to exit the product id mode. 18.2.6 read protect this command enables the r ead protection setting in the flash memory . when the read protection is enabled, the flash memory cannot be read in the parallel prom mode. in the seri al prom mode, the flash write and ram loader commands cannot be executed. to enable the read protection set ting in the serial prom mode, set flscr to "1" before exe- cuting the read protect comman d sequence. to disable the read protection setting, it is necessary to execute the chip erase command sequence. whethe r or not the read protection is en abled can be checked by reading ff7fh in the product id mode. for details, see table 18-4. table 18-4 values to be read in the product id mode address meaning read value f000h vendor id 98h f001h flash macro id 41h f002h flash size 0eh: 60 kbytes 0bh: 48 kbytes 07h: 32 kbytes 05h: 24 kbytes 03h: 16 kbytes 01h: 8 kbytes 00h: 4 kbytes ff7fh read protection status ffh: read protection disabled other than ffh: read protection enabled
page 190 18. flash memory 18.3 toggle bit (d6) TMP86FS23UG it takes a maximum of 40 s to set read protection in the flash memory. the next command sequence cannot be executed until this operation is completed. to check the completion of the read protect operation, perform read operations repeatedly for data polling until the same data is read twice from the same address in the flash memory. during the read protect operation, any attempts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6 of the data (toggling between 0 and 1). 18.3 toggle bit (d6) after the byte program, chip erase, and read protect command sequence is executed, any consecutive attempts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6 (d6) of the data (toggling between 0 and 1) until the operation is com- pleted. therefore, this toggle bit provides a software mechanism to check the completion of each operation. usually perform read operations repeatedly for data polling until th e same data is read twice from the same address in the flash memory. after the byte program, chip erase, or read protect command sequence is executed, the initial read of the toggle bit always produces a "1".
page 191 TMP86FS23UG 18.4 access to the flash memory area when the write, erase and read protect ions are set in the flash memory, read and fetch operations cannot be per- formed in the entire flash memory area. therefore, to perform these operations in the entire flash memory area, access to the flash memory area by the control program in the bootrom or ram area. (the flash memory pro- gram cannot write to the flash memory.) the serial prom or mcu mode is used to run the control program in the bootrom or ram area. note 1: the flash memory can be written or read for each by te unit. erase operations can be performed either in the entire area or in units of 4 kbytes, whereas read operations can be performed by an one transfer instruction. however, the command sequence method is adopted for write and erase operations, requiring several-byte transfer instruc- tions for each operation. note 2: to rewrite data to flash memory addresses at which data (including ffh) is already written, make sure to erase the existing data by "sector erase" or "chip erase" before rewriting data. 18.4.1 flash memory contro l in the serial prom mode the serial prom mode is used to access to the fl ash memory by the contro l program provided in the bootrom area. since almost of all op erations relating to access to the flash memory can be controlled sim- ply by the communication data of th e serial interface (uart), these functio ns are transparent to the user. for the details of the serial prom mode, see ?serial prom mode.? to access to the flash memory by using peripheral func tions in the serial prom mode, run the ram loader command to execute the control prog ram in the ram area. the procedures to execute the control program in the ram area is shown in " 18.4.1.1 how to write to the flash memory by executing the control program in the ram area (in the ram loader mode within the serial prom mode) ". 18.4.1.1 how to write to the flash memory by executing the control program in the ram area (in the ram loader mode within the serial prom mode) (steps 1 and 2 are controlled by the bootrom, and steps 3 through 10 are controlled by the control program executed in the ram area.) 1. transfer the write control program to the ram area in the ram loader mode. 2. jump to the ram area. 3. disable (di) the interrup t master enable flag (imf "0"). 4. set flscr to "0011b" (to enable command sequence execution). 5. execute the erase command sequence. 6. read the same flash memory address twice. (repeat step 6 until the same data is re ad by two consecutive reads operations.) 7. specify the bank to be written in flscr. 8. execute the write command sequence. 9. read the same flash memory address twice. (repeat step 9 until the same data is read by two consecutive reads operations.) 10. set flscr to "1100b" (to disable command sequence execution). note 1: before writing to the flash memory in the ram area, disable interrupts by setting the interrupt master enable flag (imf) to "0". usually disable interrupts by executing the di instruction at the head of the write control program in the ram area. note 2: since the watchdog timer is disabled by the boot rom in the ram loader mode, it is not required to disable the watchdog timer by the ram loader program.
page 192 18. flash memory 18.4 access to the flash memory area TMP86FS23UG example :after chip erasure, the program in the ram area writ es data 3fh to address f000h. di : disable interrupts (imf "0") ld (flscr),0011_1000b : enable command sequence execution. ld ix,0f555h ld iy,0faaah ld hl,0f000h ; #### flash memory chip erase process #### ld (ix),0aah : 1st bus write cycle ld (iy),55h : 2nd bus write cycle ld (ix),80h : 3rd bus write cycle ld (ix),0aah : 4th bus write cycle ld (iy),55h : 5th bus write cycle ld (ix),10h : 6th bus write cycle sloop1: ld w,(ix) cmp w,(ix) jr nz,sloop1 : loop until the same value is read. set (flscr).3 : set bank1. ; #### flash memory write process #### ld (ix),0aah : 1st bus write cycle ld (iy),55h : 2nd bus write cycle ld (ix),0a0h : 3rd bus write cycle ld (hl),3fh : 4th bus write cycle, (f000h)=3fh sloop2: ld w,(hl) cmp w,(hl) jr nz,sloop2 : loop until the same value is read. ld (flscr),1100_1000b : disable command sequence execution. sloop3: jp sloop3
page 193 TMP86FS23UG 18.4.2 flash memory c ontrol in the mcu mode in the mcu mode, write operations are performed by executing the control program in the ram area. before execution of the control pr ogram, copy the control program into the ram area or obtain it from the external using the communication pin. the procedures to execute the cont rol program in the ram area in the mcu mode are described below. 18.4.2.1 how to write to the flash memory by executing a user write control program in the ram area (in the mcu mode) (steps 1 and 2 are controlled by the program in the flash memory, and steps 3 through 11 are controlled by the control program in the ram area.) 1. transfer the write contro l program to the ram area. 2. jump to the ram area. 3. disable (di) the interrup t master enable flag (imf "0"). 4. disable the watchdog timer, if it is used. 5. set flscr to "0011b" (to enable command sequence execution). 6. execute the erase command sequence. 7. read the same flash memory address twice. (repeat step 7 until the same data is read by two consecutive read operations.) 8. execute the write command sequence. (it is no t required to specify the bank to be written.) 9. read the same flash memory address twice. (repeat step 9 until the same data is read by two consecutive read operations.) 10. set flscr to "1100b" (to disable command sequence execution). 11. jump to the flash memory area. note 1: before writing to the flash memory in the ram area, disable interrupts by setting the interrupt master enable flag (imf) to "0". usually disable interrupts by executing the di instruction at the head of the write control program in the ram area. note 2: when writing to the flash memory, do not in tentionally use non-maskable interrupts (the watchdog timer must be disabled if it is used). if a non-mask able interrupt occurs while the flash memory is being written, unexpected data is read from the flash memory (interrupt vector), resulting in malfunc- tion of the microcontroller.
page 194 18. flash memory 18.4 access to the flash memory area TMP86FS23UG example :after sector eras ure (e000h-efffh), the program in the ram area writes data 3fh to address e000h. di : disable interrupts (imf "0") ld (wdtcr2),4eh : clear the wdt binary counter. ldw (wdtcr1),0b101h : disable the wdt. ld (flscr),0011_1000b : enable command sequence execution. ld ix,0f555h ld iy,0faaah ld hl,0e000h ; #### flash memory sector erase process #### ld (ix),0aah : 1st bus write cycle ld (iy),55h : 2nd bus write cycle ld (ix),80h : 3rd bus write cycle ld (ix),0aah : 4th bus write cycle ld (iy),55h : 5th bus write cycle ld (hl),30h : 6th bus write cycle sloop1: ld w,(ix) cmp w,(ix) jr nz,sloop1 : loop until the same value is read. ; #### flash memory write process #### ld (ix),0aah : 1st bus write cycle ld (iy),55h : 2nd bus write cycle ld (ix),0a0h : 3rd bus write cycle ld (hl),3fh : 4th bus write cycle, (1000h)=3fh sloop2: ld w,(hl) cmp w,(hl) jr nz,sloop2 : loop until the same value is read. ld (flscr),1100_1000b : disable command sequence execution. jp xxxxh : jump to the flash memory area. example :this write control program reads data from address f000h and stores it to 98h in the ram area. ld a,(0f000h) : read data from address f000h. ld (98h),a : store data to address 98h.
page 195 TMP86FS23UG 19. serial prom mode 19.1 outline the TMP86FS23UG has a 2048 byte bootrom (mask rom) for programming to flash memory. the bootrom is available in the serial prom mode, and controlled by test, boot and reset pins. communica- tion is performed via uart. the serial prom mode ha s seven types of operating mode: flash memory writing, ram loader, flash memory sum output, product id code output, flash memory status output, flash memory eras- ing and flash memory read protection setting. memory addr ess mapping in the serial pr om mode differs from that in the mcu mode. figure 19-1 shows memory address mapping in the serial prom mode. note: though included in above operating range, some of high fr equencies are not supported in the serial prom mode. for details, refer to ?table 19-5?. 19.2 memory mapping the figure 19-1 shows memory mapping in the serial prom mode and mcu mode. in the serial prom mode, the bootrom (mask rom) is mapped in addresses from 7800h to 7fffh. the flash memory is divided into two banks for mapping. therefore, when the ram loader mode (60h) is used, it is required to specify the flash memory address acco rding to figure 19-1 (for detail of ba nks and control register, refer to the chapter of ?flash memo ry control register?.) figure 19-1 memory address maps table 19-1 operating range in the serial prom mode parameter min max unit power supply 4.5 5.5 v high frequency (note) 2 16 mhz to use the flash memory writing command (30h), specify th e flash memory addresses fr om 1000h to ffffh, that is the same addresses in the mcu mode, because the bootrom changes the flash memory address. 003fh 0000h 64 bytes 2048 bytes 0040h 0fffh 7800h 7fffh 8000h 8000h 7fffh ffffh ffffh sfr ram dbr sfr ram dbr bootrom flash memory serial prom mode mcu mode 9000h 28672 bytes (bank0) 32768 bytes (bank1) 61440 bytes 003fh 0000h 64 bytes 0040h 0fffh 1000h flash memory 2048 bytes 128 bytes 128 bytes 083fh 0f80h 0f80h 2048 bytes 083fh
page 196 19. serial prom mode 19.3 serial prom mode setting TMP86FS23UG 19.3 serial prom mode setting 19.3.1 serial prom mode control pins to execute on-board programming, act ivate the serial prom mode. table 19-2 shows pin setting to activate the serial prom mode. note: the boot pin is shared with the uart communication pin (rxd pin) in the serial prom m ode. this pin is used as uart communication pin after activating serial prom mode 19.3.2 pin function in the serial prom mode, txd (p11) and rxd (p10) are used as a serial interface pin. note 1: during on-board programming with other parts mounted on a user board, be careful no to affect these communication control pins. note 2: operating range of high frequency in serial prom mode is 2 mhz to 16 mhz. table 19-2 serial prom mode setting pin setting test pin high boot/rxd pin high reset pin table 19-3 pin function in the serial prom mode pin name (serial prom mode) input/ output function pin name (mcu mode) txd output serial data output (note 1) p11 boot/rxd input/input serial prom mode control/serial data input p10 reset input serial prom mode control reset test input fixed to high test vdd, avdd power supply 4.5 to 5.5 v vss power supply 0 v varef power supply leave open or apply input reference voltage. i/o (output) ports except p11, p10 i/o (output) these ports are in the high-impedance state in the serial prom mode. the input level is fixed to the port inputs with a hardware feature to prevent overlap current. (the port inputs are invalid.) to make the port inputs valid, set the pin of the spcr register to ?1? by the ram loader control pro- gram. com3 to com0 output low output in the serial prom mode vlc power supply connect to gnd or apply lcd drive voltage. xin input self-oscillate with an oscillator. (note 2) xout output
page 197 TMP86FS23UG figure 19-2 serial prom mode pin setting note 1: for connection of other pins, refer to " t able 19-3 pin function in the serial prom mode ". 19.3.3 example connection for on-board writing figure 19-3 shows an example connection to perform on-board wring. figure 19-3 example conn ection for on-board writing note 1: when other parts on the application board effect th e uart communication in the serial prom mode, iso- late these pins by a jumper or switch. note 2: when the reset control circuit on the application board effect s activation of the serial prom mode, isolate the pin by a jumper or switch. note 3: for connection of other pins, refer to " t able 19-3 pin function in the serial prom mode ". vdd(4.5 v to 5.5 v) serial prom mode mcu mode vdd test reset external control pull-up xin xout vss gnd boot / rxd (p10) txd (p11) TMP86FS23UG vdd(4.5 v to 5.5 v) serial prom mode mcu mode vdd test reset pc control pull-up level converter xin xout vss gnd external control board application board rc power-on reset circuit reset control other parts (note 1) (note 2) boot / rxd (p10) txd (p11)
page 198 19. serial prom mode 19.3 serial prom mode setting TMP86FS23UG 19.3.4 activating t he serial prom mode the following is a procedure to ac tivate the serial prom mode. " figure 19-4 serial prom mode timing " shows a serial prom mode timing. 1. supply power to the vdd pin. 2. set the reset pin to low. 3. set the test pin and boot/rxd pins to high. 4. wait until the power supply and clock oscillation stabilize. 5. set the reset pin to high. 6. input the matching data (5ah) to the boot/rxd pin after setup sequence. for details of the setup timing, refer to " 19.16 uart timing ". figure 19-4 serial prom mode timing vdd test(input) reset(input) program setup time for serial prom mode (rxsup) high level setting matching data don't care reset mode serial prom mode input boot/rxd (input)
page 199 TMP86FS23UG 19.4 interface specifications for uart the following shows the uart communication format used in the serial prom mode. to perform on-board programming, the communication format of the write controller must also be set in the same manner. the default baud rate is 9600 bps regardless of operating frequency of the microcontroller. the baud rate can be modified by transmitting the baud rate modification da ta shown in table 1-4 to TMP86FS23UG. the table 19-5 shows an operating frequency and baud rate. the frequencies which are not described in table 19-5 can not be used. - baud rate (default): 9600 bps - data length: 8 bits - parity addition: none - stop bit: 1 bit table 19-4 baud rate modification data baud rate modification data 04h 05h 06h 07h 0ah 18h 28h baud rate (bps) 76800 62500 57600 38400 31250 19200 9600
page 200 19. serial prom mode 19.4 interface specifications for uart TMP86FS23UG note 1: ?ref. frequency? and ?rating? show frequencies availabl e in the serial prom mode. though the frequency is supported in the serial prom mode, the serial prom mode may not be activated correctly due to the frequency difference in the external controller (such as pers onal computer) and oscillator, and load capacitance of communication pins. note 2: it is recommended that the total frequency difference is within 3% so that auto detection is performed correctly by the ref- erence frequency. note 3: the external controller must transmit the matching dat a (5ah) repeatedly till the auto detection of baud rate is perform ed. this number indicates the number of times t he matching data is transmitted for each frequency. table 19-5 operating frequency and baud rate in the serial prom mode (note 3) reference baud rate (bps) 76800 62500 57600 38400 31250 19200 9600 baud rate modification data 04h 05h 06h 07h 0ah 18h 28h ref. fre- quency (mhz) rating (mhz) baud rate (bps) (%)(bps)(%)(bps)(%)(bps)(%)(bps)(%)(bps)(%)(bps)(%) 1 21.91 to 2.10------------9615+0.16 2 43.82 to 4.19--------312500.0019231+0.169615+0.16 4.193.82 to 4.19--------32734+4.7520144+4.921 0072 +4.92 3 4.91524.70 to 5.16------ 38400 0.00 - - 19200 0.00 9600 0.00 54.70 to 5.16------ 39063 +1.73 - - 19531 +1.73 9766 +1.73 4 65.87 to 6.45------------9375-2.34 6.1445.87 to 6.45------------96000.00 5 7.3728 7.05 to 7.74 - - - 57600 0.00 - - - - 19200 0.00 9600 0.00 6 8 7.64 to 8.39 - - 62500 0.00 - - 38462 +0.16 31250 0.00 19231 +0.16 9615 +0.16 7 9.8304 9.40 to 10.32 76800 0.00 ---- 38400 0.00 - - 19200 0.00 9600 0.00 10 9.40 to 10.32 78125 +1.73 ---- 39063 +1.73 - - 19531 +1.73 9766 +1.73 8 12 11.75 to 12.90 - - - - 57692 +0.16 - - 31250 0.00 18750 -2.34 9375 -2.34 12.288 11.75 to 12.90 - - - - 59077 +2.56 - - 32000 +2.40 19200 0.00 9600 0.00 12.5 11.75 to 12.90 - - 60096 -3.85 60096 +4.33 - - 30048 -3.85 19531 +1.73 9766 +1.73 9 14.7456 14.10 to 15.48 - - - - 57600 0.00 38400 0.00 - - 19200 0.00 9600 0.00 10 16 15.27 to 16.77 76923 +0.16 62500 0.00 - - 38462 +0.16 31250 0.00 19231 +0.16 9615 +0.16
page 201 TMP86FS23UG 19.5 operation command the eight commands shown in table 19-6 are used in the serial prom mode. after reset release, the TMP86FS23UG waits for the matching data (5ah). 19.6 operation mode the serial prom mode has seven types of modes, that are (1) flash memory erasin g, (2) flash memory writing, (3) ram loader, (4) flash memory sum output, (5) product id code output, (6) flash memory status output and (7) flash memory read protection setting modes. description of each mode is shown below. 1. flash memory erasing mode the flash memory is erased by the chip erase (erasing an entire flash area) or sector erase (erasing sectors in 4-kbyte units). the erased area is filled with ffh. when the read protection is enabled, the sector erase in the flash erasing mode can not be performed. to disabl e the read protection, perfor m the chip erase. before erasing the flash memory, TMP86FS23UG checks the pa sswords except a blank produ ct. if the password is not matched, the flash memory erasing mode is not activated. 2. flash memory writing mode data is written to the specified flas h memory address for each byte unit. the external controller must trans- mit the write data in the intel hex format (binary). if no error is encountered till the end record, TMP86FS23UG calculates the checksum for the entire flash memory area (1000h to ffffh), and returns the obtained result to the external controller. when the read protection is enabled, the flash memory writing mode is not activated. in this case, perform the chip erase command beforehand in the flash memory eras- ing mode. before activating the flash memory wri ting mode, TMP86FS23UG check s the password except a blank product. if the password is not matched, flash memory writing mode is not activated. 3. ram loader mode the ram loader transfers the data in intel hex format sent from the external controller to the internal ram. when the transfer is completed normally, the ram loader calculates the checksum. after transmit- ting the results, the ram loader jump s to the ram address specified with the first data record in order to execute the user program. when the read protection is enabled, the ram loader mode is not activated. in this case, perform the chip erase beforehand in the fl ash memory erasing mode. before activating the ram loader mode, TMP86FS23UG checks the password except a blank product. if the password is not matched, flash ram loader mode is not activated. 4. flash memory sum output mode the checksum is calculated for the entire flash memory area (1000h to ffffh), and the result is returned to the external controller. since the bootrom does not support the oper ation command to read the flash memory, use this checksum to identify programs when managing revisions of application programs. 5. product id code output the code used to identify the product is output. the code to be output consists of 13-byte data, which includes the information indicating th e area of the rom incorporated in the product. the external control- ler reads this code, and recognizes the product to write. (in the case of TMP86FS23UG, the addresses from 1000h to ffffh become the rom area.) table 19-6 operation command in the serial prom mode command data operating mode description 5ah setup matching data. execute this command after releasing the reset. f0h flash memory erasing erases the flas h memory area (address 1000h to ffffh). 30h flash memory writing writes to the flash memory area (address 1000h to ffffh). 60h ram loader writes to the specified ram area (address 0050h to 083fh). 90h flash memory sum output outputs the 2-byte checksum upper byte and lower byte in this order for the entire area of the flash memory (address 1000h to ffffh). c0h product id code output outputs the product id code (13-byte data). c3h flash memory status output outputs the status code (7-byte data) such as the read protection condition. fah flash memory read protection setting enables the read protection.
page 202 19. serial prom mode 19.6 operation mode TMP86FS23UG 6. flash memory status output mode the status of the area from ffe0h to ffffh, and the read protection co ndition are output as 7-byte code. the external controller reads this code to recognize the flash memory status. 7. flash memory read protection setting mode this mode disables reading the flash memory data in parallel prom mode. in the serial prom mode, the flash memory writing and ram loader modes are disabled. to disable th e flash memory read protection, perform the chip erase in th e flash memory erasing mode.
page 203 TMP86FS23UG 19.6.1 flash memory erasi ng mode (operati ng command: f0h) table 19-7 shows the flash memory erasing mode. note 1: ?xxh 3? indicates that the device enters the halt condition after transmitting 3 bytes of xxh. note 2: refer to " 19.13 specifying the erasure area ". note 3: refer to " 19.8 checksum (sum) ". note 4: refer to " 19.10 passwords ". note 5: do not transmit the password string for a blank product. note 6: when a password error occurs, TMP86FS23UG stops ua rt communication and enters the halt mode. therefore, when a password error occurs, initialize TMP86FS23UG by the reset pin and reactivate the serial prom mode. note 7: if an error occurs during transfer of a password addres s or a password string, TMP86FS23UG stops uart communica- tion and enters the halt condition. therefore, when a pa ssword error occurs, initialize TMP86FS23UG by the reset pin and reactivate the serial prom mode. description of the flash memory erasing mode 1. the 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and r eceived data contain the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. table 19-7 flash memory erasing mode transfer byte transfer data from the external controller to TMP86FS23UG baud rate transfer data from TMP86FS23UG to the external controller boot rom 1st byte 2nd byte matching data (5ah) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - (automatic baud rate adjustment) ok: echo back data (5ah) error: no data transmitted 3rd byte 4th byte baud rate change data (table 19-4) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - ok: echo back data error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 62h 3 (note 1) 5th byte 6th byte operation command data (f0h) - modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: echo back data (f0h) error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 63h 3 (note 1) 7th byte 8th byte password count storage address bit 15 to 08 (note 4, 5) modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 9th byte 10th byte password count storage address bit 07 to 00 (note 4, 5) modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 11th byte 12th byte password comparison start address bit 15 to 08 (note 4, 5) modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 13th byte 14th byte password comparison start address bit 07 to 00 (note 4, 5) modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted) 15th byte : m?th byte password string (note 4, 5) - modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted n?th - 2 byte erase area specification (note 2) modified baud rate - n?th - 1 byte - modified baud rate ok: checksum (upper byte) (note 3) error: nothing transmitted n?th byte - modified baud rate ok: checksum (lower byte) (note 3) error: nothing transmitted n?th + 1 byte (wait for the next operation command data) modified baud rate -
page 204 19. serial prom mode 19.6 operation mode TMP86FS23UG 2. the 5th byte of the received data contains th e command data in the flash memory erasing mode (f0h). 3. when the 5th byte of the receive d data contains the operation command data shown in table 19-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in this case, f0h). if the 5th byte of the received data does not contai n the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of the operation command error code (63h). 4. the 7th thorough m'th bytes of the transmitted and received data contai n the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. in the case of a blank produc t, do not transmit a password string. (do not transmit a dummy password string.) 5. the n?th - 2 byte contains the erasure area specification data. the upper 4 bits and lower 4 bits specify the start address and end address of the erasure area, respectively. for the detailed description, see ?1.13 specifying the erasure area?. 6. the n?th - 1 byte and n?th byte contain the upper and lower bytes of the checksum, respectively. for how to calculate the checksum, refer to ?1.8 checksum (sum)?. checksum is calculated unless a receiving error or intel hex format error occurs. after sending the e nd record, the external controller judges whether the transmission is completed corr ectly by receiving the checksum sent by the device. 7. after sending the checksum, the device waits for the next operation command data.
page 205 TMP86FS23UG 19.6.2 flash memory writing mode (operation command: 30h) table 19-8 shows flash memory writing mode process. note 1: ?xxh 3? indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxh. for details, refer to " 19.7 error code ". note 2: refer to " 19.9 intel hex format (binary) ". note 3: refer to " 19.8 checksum (sum) ". note 4: refer to " 19.10 passwords ". note 5: if addresses from ffe0h to ffffh are filled with ?ffh?, the passwords are not compared because the device is consid- ered as a blank product. transmitting a password string is not requi red. even in the case of a blank product , it is required to specify the password count storage address and the password comparison start address. transmit these data from the external controller. if a password error occurs due to incorr ect password count storage address or password comparison start address, TMP86FS23UG stops uart communication and enters the halt condition. therefore, when a password error occurs, initialize TMP86FS23UG by the reset pin and reactivate the serial rom mode. note 6: if the read protection is enabled or a password erro r occurs, TMP86FS23UG stops uart communication and enters the halt confition. in this case, initialize TMP86FS23UG by the reset pin and reactivate the serial rom mode. note 7: if an error occurs during the reception of a password address or a password string, TMP86FS23UG stops uart commu- nication and enters the halt condition. in th is case, initialize TMP86FS23UG by the reset pin and reactivate the serial prom mode. table 19-8 flash memory writing mode process transfer byte transfer data from external controller to TMP86FS23UG baud rate transfer data from TMP86FS23UG to external controller boot rom 1st byte 2nd byte matching data (5ah) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - (automatic baud rate adjustment) ok: echo back data (5ah) error: nothing transmitted 3rd byte 4th byte baud rate modification data (see table 19-4) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - ok: echo back data error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 62h 3 (note 1) 5th byte 6th byte operation command data (30h) - modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: echo back data (30h) error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 63h 3 (note 1) 7th byte 8th byte password count storage address bit 15 to 08 (note 4) modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 9th byte 10th byte password count storage address bit 07 to 00 (note 4) modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 11th byte 12th byte password comparison start address bit 15 to 08 (note 4) modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 13th byte 14th byte password comparison start address bit 07 to 00 (note 4) modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted) 15th byte : m?th byte password string (note 5) - modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted m?th + 1 byte : n?th - 2 byte intel hex format (binary) (note 2) modified baud rate - - n?th - 1 byte - modified baud rate ok: sum (upper byte) (note 3) error: nothing transmitted n?th byte - modified baud rate ok: sum (lower byte) (note 3) error: nothing transmitted n?th + 1 byte (wait state for the next operation com- mand data) modified baud rate -
page 206 19. serial prom mode 19.6 operation mode TMP86FS23UG description of the flash memory writing mode 1. the 1st byte of the received data contains the ma tching data. when the serial prom mode is acti- vated, TMP86FS23UG (her eafter called device), waits to receive the matching data (5ah). upon reception of the matching data, the device automatically adjusts the uart?s initial baud rate to 9600 bps. 2. when receiving the matching data (5ah), the device transmits an ech o back data (5ah) as the second byte data to the external controller. if the devi ce can not recognize the matching data, it does not transmit the echo back data and waits for the matc hing data again with automatic baud rate adjust- ment. therefore, the external cont roller should transmit the matching data repeatedly till the device transmits an echo back data. the transmission repe tition count varies depending on the frequency of device. for details, refer to table 19-5. 3. the 3rd byte of the received data contains the baud ra te modification data. the five types of baud rate modification data shown in table 19-4 are available. even if baud rate is not modified, the external controller should transmit the initial baud rate data (28h: 9600 bps). 4. only when the 3rd byte of the received data contai ns the baud rate modificat ion data corresponding to the device's operating frequency, th e device echoes back data the valu e which is the same data in the 4th byte position of the received data. after the ech o back data is transmitted, baud rate modification becomes effective. if the 3rd byte of the received data does not co ntain the baud rate modification data, the device enters the halts condition after se nding 3 bytes of baud rate modification error code (62h). 5. the 5th byte of the received data contains the command data (30h) to write the flash memory. 6. when the 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in table 1-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in this case, 30h). if the 5th byte of the received da ta does not contain the op eration command data, the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of the operation command error code (63h). 7. the 7th byte contains the data for 15 to 8 bits of the password count storage address. when the data received with the 7th byte has no receiving error, the device does not send any data. if a receiving error or password error occurs, the device does not send any data and enters the halt condition. 8. the 9th byte contains the data for 7 to 0 bits of the password count storage address. when the data received with the 9th byte has no receiving error, the device does not send any data. if a receiving error or password error occurs, the device does not send any data and enters the halt condition. 9. the 11th byte contains the data for 15 to 8 bits of the password comparison start address. when the data received with the 11th byte has no receiving erro r, the device does not send any data. if a receiv- ing error or password error occurs, the device does not send any data and enters the halt condition. 10. the 13th byte contains the data for 7 to 0 bits of the password comparison start address. when the data received with the 13th byte ha s no receiving error, the device does not send any data. if a receiv- ing error or password error occurs, the device does not send any data and enters the halt condition. 11. the 15th through m?th bytes contain the passwor d data. the number of passwords becomes the data (n) stored in the password count storage address. the external password data is compared with n- byte data from the address specified by the passwor d comparison start addre ss. the external control- ler should send n-byte password data to the device. if the passwords do not match, the device enters the halt condition without returning an error code to the external controller . if the addresses from ffe0h to ffffh are filled with ?f fh?, the passwords are not conpare d because the device is consid- ered as a blank product. 12. the m?th + 1 through n?th - 2 bytes of the receive d data contain the binary data in the intel hex for- mat. no received data is echoed back to the extern al controller. after receiv ing the start mark (3ah for ?:?) in the intel hex format, the device starts data record reception. ther efore, the received data except 3ah is ignored until the start mark is received. afte r receiving the start mark, the device receives the data record, that consists of data lengt h, address, reco rd type, write data and checksum. since the device starts checksum cal culation after receiving an end r ecord, the external controller should wait for the checksum afte r sending the end record. if a recei ving error or intel hex format error occurs, the device enters the halts condition without returning an error code to the external con- troller. 13. the n?th - 1 and n?th bytes contain the checksum upper and lower bytes. for details on how to calcu- late the sum, refer to " 19.8 checksum (sum) ". the checksum is calculated only when the end record is detected and no receivi ng error or intel hex format er ror occurs. after sending the end
page 207 TMP86FS23UG record, the external controller ju dges whether the transmission is co mpleted correctly by receiving the checksum sent by the device. 14. after transmitting the checksu m, the device waits for the next operation command data. note 1: do not write only the address from ffe0h to ffffh when all flash memory data is the same. if only these area are written, the subsequent operation can not be executed due to password error. note 2: to rewrite data to flash memory addresses at whic h data (including ffh) is already written, make sure to erase the existing data by "sector erase" or "chip erase" before rewriting data.
page 208 19. serial prom mode 19.6 operation mode TMP86FS23UG 19.6.3 ram loader mode (o peration command: 60h) table 19-9 shows ram loader mode process. note 1: ?xxh 3? indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxh. for details, refer to " 19.7 error code ". note 2: refer to " 19.9 intel hex format (binary) ". note 3: refer to " 19.8 checksum (sum) ". note 4: refer to " 19.10 passwords ". note 5: if addresses from ffe0h to ffffh are filled with ?ffh?, the passwords are not compared because the device is consid- ered as a blank product. transmitting a password string is not requi red. even in the case of a blank product , it is required to specify the password count storage address and the password comparison start address. transmit these data from the external controller. if a password error occurs due to incorr ect password count storage address or password comparison start address, TMP86FS23UG stops uart communication and enters the halt condition. therefore, when a password error occurs, initialize TMP86FS23UG by the reset pin and reactivate the serial rom mode. note 6: after transmitting a password string, the external c ontroller must not transmit only an end record. if receiving an end record after a password string, the device may not operate correctly. note 7: if the read protection is enabled or a password erro r occurs, TMP86FS23UG stops uart communication and enters the halt condition. in this case, initialize TMP86FS23UG by the reset pin and reactivate the serial prom mode. table 19-9 ram loader mode process transfer bytes transfer data from external control- ler to TMP86FS23UG baud rate transfer data from TMP86FS23UG to external controller boot rom 1st byte 2nd byte matching data (5ah) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - (automatic baud rate adjustment) ok: echo back data (5ah) error: nothing transmitted 3rd byte 4th byte baud rate modification data (see table 19-4) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - ok: echo back data error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 62h 3 (note 1) 5th byte 6th byte operation command data (60h) - modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: echo back data (60h) error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 63h 3 (note 1) 7th byte 8th byte password count storage address bit 15 to 08 (note 4) modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 9th byte 10th byte password count storage address bit 07 to 00 (note 4) modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 11th byte 12th byte password comparison start address bit 15 to 08 (note 4) modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 13th byte 14th byte password comparison start address bit 07 to 00 (note 4) modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 15th byte : m?th byte password string (note 5) - modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted m?th + 1 byte : n?th - 2 byte intel hex format (binary) (note 2) modified baud rate modified baud rate - - n?th - 1 byte - modified baud rate ok: sum (upper byte) (note 3) error: nothing transmitted n?th byte - modified baud rate ok: sum (lower byte) (note 3) error: nothing transmitted ram - the program jumps to the start address of ram in which the first transferred data is written.
page 209 TMP86FS23UG note 8: if an error occurs during the reception of a password address or a password string, TMP86FS23UG stops uart commu- nication and enters the halt condition. in th is case, initialize TMP86FS23UG by the reset pin and reactivate the serial prom mode. description of ram loader mode 1. the 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and recei ved data contains the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. 2. in the 5th byte of the received data contains the ram loader command data (60h). 3. when th 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in table 1-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position (in this case, 60h). if the 5th byte does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after send- ing 3 bytes of operation command error code (63h). 4. the 7th through m?th bytes of the transmitted and received data contai n the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. 5. the m?th + 1 through n?th - 2 bytes of the received data contain the binary data in the intel hex for- mat. no received data is echoed back to the extern al controller. after receiv ing the start mark (3ah for ?:?) in the intel hex format, the device starts data record reception. ther efore, the received data except 3ah is ignored until the start mark is received. afte r receiving the start mark, the device receives the data record, that consists of data lengt h, address, reco rd type, write data and checksum. the writing data of the data record is written in to ram specified by address. since the device starts checksum calculation after receiving an end record, the external contro ller should wait for the check- sum after sending the end record. if a receiving error or intel hex format error occurs, the device enters the halts condition without returning an error code to the external controller. 6. the n?th - 1 and n?th bytes contain the checksum upper and lower bytes. for details on how to calcu- late the sum, refer to " 19.8 checksum (sum) ". the checksum is calculated only when the end record is detected and no receivi ng error or intel hex format er ror occurs. after sending the end record, the external controller ju dges whether the transmission is co mpleted correctly by receiving the checksum sent by the device. 7. after transmitting the checksum to the external controller, the boot program jumps to the ram address that is specified by the first received data record. note 1: to rewrite data to flash memory addresses at whic h data (including ffh) is already written, make sure to erase the existing data by "sector erase" or "chip erase" before rewriting data.
page 210 19. serial prom mode 19.6 operation mode TMP86FS23UG 19.6.4 flash memory sum out put mode (operati on command: 90h) table 19-10 shows flash memory sum output mode process. note 1: ?xxh 3? indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxh. for details, refer to " 19.7 error code ". note 2: refer to " 19.8 checksum (sum) ". description of the flash memory sum output mode 1. the 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and recei ved data contains the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. 2. the 5th byte of the received data contains the command data in the flash memory sum output mode (90h). 3. when the 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in table 1-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in this case, 90h). if the 5th byte of the received da ta does not contain the op eration command data, the device enters the halt condition after transmitting 3 bytes of operation command error code (63h). 4. the 7th and the 8th bytes contain the upper and lowe r bits of the checksum, respectively. for how to calculate the checksum, refer to " 19.8 checksum (sum) ". 5. after sending the checksum, the device waits for the next operation command data. table 19-10 flash memo ry sum output process transfer bytes transfer data from external control- ler to TMP86FS23UG baud rate transfer data from TMP86FS23UG to external controller boot rom 1st byte 2nd byte matching data (5ah) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - (automatic baud rate adjustment) ok: echo back data (5ah) error: nothing transmitted 3rd byte 4th byte baud rate modification data (see table 19-4) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - ok: echo back data error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 62h 3 (note 1) 5th byte 6th byte operation command data (90h) - modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: echo back data (90h) error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 63h 3 (note 1) 7th byte - modified baud rate ok: sum (upper byte) (note 2) error: nothing transmitted 8th byte - modified baud rate ok: sum (lower byte) (note 2) error: nothing transmitted 9th byte (wait for the next operation com- mand data) modified baud rate -
page 211 TMP86FS23UG 19.6.5 product id code output mode (operation command: c0h) table 19-11 shows product id code output mode process. note: ?xxh 3? indicates that the device enters th e halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxh. for details, refer to " 19.7 error code ". description of product id code output mode 1. the 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and r eceived data contain the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. 2. the 5th byte of the received data contains the product id code output mode command data (c0h). 3. when the 5th byte contains the operation command data shown in table 19-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte positio n of the received data (i n this case, c0h). if the 5th byte data does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of operation command error code (63h). 4. the 9th through 19th bytes contain the product id code. for details, refer to " 19.11 product id code ". table 19-11 product id code output process transfer bytes transfer data from external controller to TMP86FS23UG baud rate transfer data from TMP86FS23UG to external controller boot rom 1st byte 2nd byte matching data (5ah) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - (automatic baud rate adjustment) ok: echo back data (5ah) error: nothing transmitted 3rd byte 4th byte baud rate modification data (see table 19-4) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - ok: echo back data error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 62h 3 (note 1) 5th byte 6th byte operation command data (c0h) - modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: echo back data (c0h) error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 63h 3 (note 1) 7th byte modified baud rate 3ah start mark 8th byte modified baud rate 0ah the number of transfer data (from 9th to 18th bytes) 9th byte modified baud rate 02h length of address (2 bytes) 10th byte modified baud rate 1dh reserved data 11th byte modified baud rate 00h reserved data 12th byte modified baud rate 00h reserved data 13th byte modified baud rate 00h reserved data 14th byte modified baud rate 01h rom block count (1 block) 15th byte modified baud rate 10h first address of rom (upper byte) 16th byte modified baud rate 00h first address of rom (lower byte) 17th byte modified baud rate ffh end address of rom (upper byte) 18th byte modified baud rate ffh end address of rom (lower byte) 19th byte modified baud rate d2h checksum of transferred data (9th through 18th byte) 20th byte (wait for the next operation command data) modified baud rate -
page 212 19. serial prom mode 19.6 operation mode TMP86FS23UG 5. after sending the checksum, the device waits for the next operation command data.
page 213 TMP86FS23UG 19.6.6 flash memory status out put mode (operati on command: c3h) table 19-12 shows flash memory status output mode process. note 1: ?xxh 3? indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxh. for details, refer to " 19.7 error code ". note 2: for the details on status code 1, refer to " 19.12 flash memory status code ". description of flash memory status output mode 1. the 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and r eceived data contain the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. 2. the 5th byte of the received data contains the flash memory status output mode command data (c3h). 3. when the 5th byte contains the operation command data shown in table 19-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte positio n of the received data (i n this case, c3h). if the 5th byte does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after send- ing 3 bytes of operation command error code (63h). 4. the 9th through 13th bytes contain the status code. for details on the status code, refer to " 19.12 flash memory status code ". 5. after sending the status code, the device wa its for the next operation command data. table 19-12 flash memory status output mode process transfer bytes transfer data from external con- troller to TMP86FS23UG baud rate transfer data from TMP86FS23UG to exter- nal controller boot rom 1st byte 2nd byte matching data (5ah) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - (automatic baud rate adjustment) ok: echo back data (5ah) error: nothing transmitted 3rd byte 4th byte baud rate modification data (see table 19-4) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - ok: echo back data error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 62h 3 (note 1) 5th byte 6th byte operation command data (c3h) - modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: echo back data (c3h) error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 63h 3 (note 1) 7th byte modified baud rate 3ah start mark 8th byte modified baud rate 04h byte count (from 9th to 12th byte) 9th byte modified baud rate 00h to 03h status code 1 10th byte modified baud rate 00h reserved data 11th byte modified baud rate 00h reserved data 12th byte modified baud rate 00h reserved data 13th byte modified baud rate checksum 2?s complement for the sum of 9th through 12th bytes 9th byte checksum 00h: 00h 01h: ffh 02h: feh 03h: fdh 14th byte (wait for the next operation com- mand data) modified baud rate -
page 214 19. serial prom mode 19.6 operation mode TMP86FS23UG 19.6.7 flash memory read protection setting mode (operation command: fah) table 19-13 shows flash memory read protection setting mode process. note 1: ?xxh 3? indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxh. for details, refer to " 19.7 error code ". note 2: refer to " 19.10 passwords ". note 3: if the read protection is enabled for a blank product or a password error occurs for a non-blank product, TMP86FS23UG stops uart communication and enters the halt mode. in this case, initialize TMP86FS23UG by the reset pin and reacti- vate the serial prom mode. note 4: if an error occurs during reception of a password addres s or a password string, TMP86FS23UG stops uart communica- tion and enters the halt mode. in this case, initialize TMP86FS23UG by the reset pin and reactivate the serial prom mode. description of the flash memory read protection setting mode 1. the 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and r eceived data contain the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. 2. the 5th byte of the received data contains the command data in th e flash memory status output mode (fah). 3. when the 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in table 1-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in table 19-13 flash memory read protection setting mode process transfer bytes transfer data from external con- troller to TMP86FS23UG baud rate transfer data from TMP86FS23UG to exter- nal controller boot rom 1st byte 2nd byte matching data (5ah) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - (automatic baud rate adjustment) ok: echo back data (5ah) error: nothing transmitted 3rd byte 4th byte baud rate modification data (see table 19-4) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - ok: echo back data error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 62h 3 (note 1) 5th byte 6th byte operation command data (fah) - modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: echo back data (fah) error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 63h 3 (note 1) 7th byte 8th byte password count storage address 15 to 08 (note 2) modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 9th byte 10th byte password count storage address 07 to 00 (note 2) modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 11th byte 12th byte password comparison start address 15 to 08 (note 2) modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 13th byte 14th byte password comparison start address 07 to 00 (note 2) modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 15th byte : m?th byte password string (note 2) - modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted n?th byte - modified baud rate ok: fbh (note 3) error: nothing transmitted n?+1th byte (wait for the next operation com- mand data) modified baud rate -
page 215 TMP86FS23UG this case, fah). if the 5th byte does not contai n the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after transmitting 3 bytes of operation command error code (63h). 4. the 7th through m?th bytes of the transmitted and received data contai n the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. 5. the n'th byte contains the status to be transmitted to the external controller in the case of the success- ful read protection.
page 216 19. serial prom mode 19.7 error code TMP86FS23UG 19.7 error code when detecting an error, the device tr ansmits the error code to the external controller, as shown in table 19-14. note: if a password error occurs, TMP86FS23UG does not transmit an error code. 19.8 checksum (sum) 19.8.1 calculation method the checksum (sum) is calculated with the sum of all bytes, and the obtain ed result is returned as a word. the data is read for each byte unit and th e calculated result is returned as a word. example: the checksum which is transmitted by executing the fl ash memory write comman d, ram loader command, or flash memory sum output command is calculated in the manner, as shown above. table 19-14 error code transmit data meaning of error data 62h, 62h, 62h baud rate modification error. 63h, 63h, 63h operation command error. a1h, a1h, a1h framing error in the received data. a3h, a3h, a3h overrun error in the received data. a1h if the data to be calculated consists of the four bytes, the checksum of the data is as shown below. b2h a1h + b2h + c3h + d4h = 02eah sum (high)= 02h sum (low)= eah c3h d4h
page 217 TMP86FS23UG 19.8.2 calculation data the data used to calculate the ch ecksum is listed in table 19-15. table 19-15 checksum calculation data operating mode calculation data description flash memory writing mode data in the entire area of the flash memory even when a part of the flash memory is written, the checksum of the entire flash memory ar ea (1000h to fffh) is calculated. the data length, address, record type and checksum in intel hex format are not included in the checksum. flash memory sum output mode ram loader mode ram data written in the first received ram address through the last received ram address the length of data, address, record type and checksum in intel hex format are not included in the checksum. product id code output mode 9th through 18th bytes of the transferred data for details, refer to " 19.11 product id code ". flash memory status output mode 9th through 12th bytes of the tran sferred data for details, refer to " 19.12 flash memory status code " flash memory erasing mode all data in the erased area of the flash memory (the whole or part of the flash memory) when the sector erase is exec uted, only the erased area is used to calculate the checksum. in the case of the chip erase, an entire area of the flash memory is used.
page 218 19. serial prom mode 19.9 intel hex format (binary) TMP86FS23UG 19.9 intel hex format (binary) 1. after receiving the checksum of a data record, the device waits for the start mark (3ah ?:?) of the next data record. after receiving the checksum of a data reco rd, the device ignores the data except 3ah transmitted by the external controller. 2. after transmitting the checksum of en d record, the external controller mu st transmit nothing, and wait for the 2-byte receive data (upper and lower bytes of the checksum). 3. if a receiving error or intel hex fo rmat error occurs, the device enters the halt condition without returning an error code to the external controller. the in tel hex format error occurs in the following case: when the record type is not 00h, 01h, or 02h when a checksum error occurs when the data length of an extended record (record type = 02h) is not 02h when the device receives the data reco rd after receiving an extended record (record type = 02h ) with extended address of 1000h or larger. when the data length of the end record (record type = 01h) is not 00h 19.10passwords the consecutive eight or mo re-byte data in the flash memory ar ea can be specified to the password. TMP86FS23UG compares the data string specified to the password with the password string transmitted from the external controller. the area in which passwords can be specified is locat ed at addresses 1000h to ff9fh. the area from ffa0h to ffffh can not be specified as the passwords area. if addresses from ffe0h through fff fh are filled with ?ffh?, the passw ords are not compared because the product is considered as a blank product. even in this case, the password count stor age addresses and password comparison start address must be specified. table 19-16 shows the password setting in the blank product and non- blank product. note 1: when addresses from ffe0h through ffffh are filled wi th ?ffh?, the product is re cognized as a blank product. note 2: the data including the same consecutive data (three or mo re bytes) can not be used as a password. (this causes a pass- word error data. TMP86FS23UG transmits no data and enters the halt condition.) note 3: *: don?t care. note 4: when the above condition is not met, a password error oc curs. if a password error occurs , the device enters the halt con - dition without returning the error code. note 5: in the flash memory writing mode or ram loader mode, the blank product receives the intel hex format data immediately after receiving pcsa without receiving password strings. in this case, the subsequent processing is performed correctly because the blank product ignores the data exc ept the start mark (3ah ?:?) as the intel hex format data, even if the exter- nal controller transmits the dummy password string. however, if the dummy password string contains ?3ah?, it is detected as the start mark erroneously. the micr ocontroller enters the halt mode. if this causes the problem, do not transmit the dummy password strings. note 6: in the flash memory erasing mode, t he external controller must not transmit the password string for the blank product. table 19-16 password setting in the blank product and non-blank product password blank product (note 1) non-blank product pnsa (password count storage address) 1000h pnsa ff9fh 1000h pnsa ff9fh pcsa (password comparison start address) 1000h pcsa ff9fh 1000h pcsa ffa0 - n n (password count) *8 n password string setting not required (note 5) required (note 2)
page 219 TMP86FS23UG figure 19-5 password comparison 19.10.1password string the password string transmitted from th e external controller is compared w ith the specified data in the flash memory. when the password string is not matched to the data in the flash memory, the device enters the halt condition due to the password error. 19.10.2handling of password error if a password error occurs, the device enters the halt c ondition. in this case, reset the device to reactivate the serial prom mode. 19.10.3password management during program development if a program is modified many times in the development stage, confusion may arise as to the password. therefore, it is recommended to use a fixed password in the program development stage. example :specify pnsa to f000h, and the pa ssword string to 8 bytes from address f001h (pcsa becomes f001h.) password section code abs = 0f000h db 08h : pnsa definition db ?code1234? : password string definition 08h 01h 02h 03h 04h 05h 08h f012h f107h f108h flash memory f109h f10ah f10bh f10ch uart f0h 12h f1h 07h 01h 02h 03h 04h 05h 06h 07h 08h pnsa pcsa password string 06h 07h f10dh f10eh "08h" becomes the umber of passwords 8 bytes compare example pnsa = f012h pcsa = f107h password string = 01h,02h,03h,04h,05h 06h,07h,08h rxd pin
page 220 19. serial prom mode 19.11 product id code TMP86FS23UG 19.11product id code the product id code is the 13-byte data containing the start address and the end address of rom. table 19-17 shows the product id code format. 19.12flash memory status code the flash memory status code is the 7-byte data including the read protection status and the status of the data from ffe0h to ffffh. table 19-18 shows the flash memory status code. table 19-17 product id code format data description in the case of TMP86FS23UG 1st start mark (3ah) 3ah 2nd the number of transfer data (10 bytes from 3rd to 12th byte) 0ah 3rd address length (2 bytes) 02h 4th reserved data 1dh 5th reserved data 00h 6th reserved data 00h 7th reserved data 00h 8th rom block count 01h 9th the first address of rom (upper byte) 10h 10th the first address of rom (lower byte) 00h 11th the end address of rom (upper byte) ffh 12th the end address of rom (lower byte) ffh 13th checksum of the transferred data (2?s compliment for the sum of 3rd through 12th bytes) d2h table 19-18 flash memory status code data description in the case of TMP86FS23UG 1st start mark 3ah 2nd transferred data count (3rd through 6th byte) 04h 3rd status code 00h to 03h (see figure below) 4th reserved data 00h 5th reserved data 00h 6th reserved data 00h 7th checksum of the transferred data (2?s compliment for the sum of 3rd through 6th data) 3rd byte 00h 01h 02h 03h checksum 00h ffh feh fdh status code 1 76543210 rpena blank (initial value: 0000 00**)
page 221 TMP86FS23UG some operation commands are limited by the flash memory stat us code 1. if the read pr otection is enabled, flash memory writing mode command and ram loader mode co mmand can not be executed. erase all flash memory before executing these command. note: m : the command can be executed. pass: the command can be executed with a password. : the command can not be executed. (after echoing the command back to the exter nal controller, TMP86FS23UG stops uart communication and enters the halt condition.) rpena flash memory read pro- tection status 0: 1: read protection is disabled. read protection is enabled. blank the status from ffe0h to ffffh. 0: 1: all data is ffh in the area from ffe0h to ffffh. the value except ffh is included in the area from ffe0h to ffffh. rpena blank flash memory writing mode ram loader mode flash memory sum output mode product id code output mode flash memory status output mode flash memory erasing mode read protec- tion setting mode chip erase sec- tor erase 00 mmmmmm 0 1 pass pass mmm pass pass 10 mmmm 11 mmm pass pass
page 222 19. serial prom mode 19.13 specifying the erasure area TMP86FS23UG 19.13specifying the erasure area in the flash memory erasing m ode, the erasure area of the flas h memory is specified by n ? 2 byte data. the start address of an erasure area is specified by erasta, and the end address is specified by eraend. if erasta is equal to or smaller than eraend, the sector erase (erasure in 4 kbyte units) is executed. executing the sector erase while the read protection is enabled results in an infinite loop. if erasta is larger than eraend, th e chip erase (erasure of an entire flash memory area) is executed and the read protection is disabled. therefore, execute the chip erase (not sector erase) to disable the read protection. note: when the sector erase is executed for the area contai ning no flash cell, TMP86FS23UG stops the uart communi- cation and enters the halt condition. 19.14port input control register in the serial prom mode, the input level is fixed to the all ports except p11 and p10 por ts with a hardware feature to prevent overlap current to unused ports. (all port inpu ts and peripheral function inputs shared with the ports become invalid.) therefore, to access to the flash memory in the ram load er mode without uart communication, port inputs must be valid. to make port inputs valid, set the pin of the port input contro l register (spcr) to ?1?. the spcr register is not operated in the mcu mode. erasure area specification data (n ? 2 byte data) 76543210 erasta eraend erasta the start address of the erasure area 0000: 0001: 0010: 0011: 0100: 0101: 0110: 0111: 1000: 1001: 1010: 1011: 1100: 1101: 1110: 1111: from 0000h from 1000h from 2000h from 3000h from 4000h from 5000h from 6000h from 7000h from 8000h from 9000h from a000h from b000h from c000h from d000h from e000h from f000h eraend the end address of the erasure area 0000: 0001: 0010: 0011: 0100: 0101: 0110: 0111: 1000: 1001: 1010: 1011: 1100: 1101: 1110: 1111: to 0fffh to 1fffh to 2fffh to 3fffh to 4fffh to 5fffh to 6fffh to 7fffh to 8fffh to 9fffh to afffh to bfffh to cfffh to dfffh to efffh to ffffh
page 223 TMP86FS23UG note 1: the spcr register can be read or written only in the seri al prom mode. when the write instruction is executed to the spcr register in the mcu mode, the port input control can not be performed. when the read instruction is executed for the spcr register in the mcu mode, read data of bit7 to 1 are unstable. note 2: all i/o ports except p11 and p10 por ts are controlled by the spcr register. port input control register spcr (0feah) 76543210 pin (initial value: **** ***0) pin port input control in the serial prom mode 0 : invalid port inputs (the input level is fixed with a hardware feature.) 1 : valid port inputs r/w
page 224 19. serial prom mode 19.15 flowchart TMP86FS23UG 19.15flowchart start setup receive uart data receive data = 5ah adjust the baud rate (adjust the source clock to 9600 bps) no yes transmit uart data (transmit data = 5ah) receive uart data modify the baud rate based on the receive data receive data = 30h (flash memory writing mode) receive data = 60h (ram loader mode) receive uart data (intel hex format) transmit uart data (checksum of an entire area) receive uart data transmit uart data (transmit data = 60h) receive uart data (intel hex format) jump to the start address of ram program transmit uart data (checksum of an entire area) receive data = c0h (product id code output mode) transmit uart data (transmit data = c0h) flash memory write process ram write process transmit uart data (product id code) transmit uart data (echo back the baud rate modification data) verify the password (compare the receive data and flash memory data) read protection check protection disabled read protection check protection disabled infinite loop infinite loop ng protection enable ng receive data = c3h (flash memory status output mode) transmit uart data (transmit data = c3h) receive data = f0h (flash memory erasing mode) transmit uart data (transmit data = f0h) infinite loop ng chip erase (erase on entire area) transmit uart data (checksum of an entire area) receive data = fah (read protection setting mode) transmit uart data (transmit data = fah) read protection setting read protection check blank product check infinite loop ng blank product check blank product check non-blank product non-blank product ok blank product ok blank product check non-blank product ok ok blank product check non-blank product blank product protection enable blank product disable read protection blank product receive uart data receive data sector erase (block erase) upper 4 bits x 1000h to lower 4 bits x 1000h transmit uart data (checksum of the erased area) upper 4 bits > lower 4 bits transmit uart data (transmit data = 30h) transmit uart data (transmit data = 90h) receive data = 90h (flash memory sum output mode) verify the password (compare the receive data and flash memory data) transmit uart data (checksum) verify the password (compare the receive data and flash memory data) verify the password (compare the receive data and flash memory data) transmit uart data (status of the read protection and blank product) transmit uart data (transmit data = fbh) read protection check upper 4 bits < lower 4 bits protection enabled infinite loop protection disabled
page 225 TMP86FS23UG 19.16uart timing table 19-19 uart timing-1 (vdd = 4.5 to 5.5 v, fc = 2 to 16 mhz, topr = -10 to 40c) parameter symbol clock frequency (fc) minimum required time at fc = 2 mhz at fc = 16 mhz time from matching data reception to the echo back cmeb1 approx. 930 465 s58.1 s time from baud rate modification data reception to the echo back cmeb2 approx. 980 490 s61.3 s time from operation command reception to the echo back cmeb3 approx. 800 400 s 50 s checksum calculation time cksm approx. 7864500 3.93 s 491.5 s erasure time of an entire flash memory ceall - 30 ms 30 ms erasure time for a sector of a flash memory (in 4-kbyte units) cesec - 15 ms 15 ms table 19-20 uart timing-2 (vdd = 4.5 to 5.5 v, fc = 2 to 16 mhz, topr = -10 to 40c) parameter symbol clock frequency (fc) minimum required time at fc = 2 mhz at fc = 16 mhz time from the reset release to the acceptance of start bit of rxd pin rxsup 2100 1.05 ms 131.3 ms matching data transmission interval cmtr1 28500 14.2 ms 1.78 ms time from the echo back of matching data to the acceptance of baud rate modification data cmtr2 380 190 s 23.8 s time from the echo back of baud rate modification data to the acceptance of an operation command cmtr3 650 325 s 40.6 s time from the echo back of operation command to the acceptance of password count storage addresses (upper byte) cmtr4 800 400 s50 s reset pin rxd pin rxsup (5ah) cmeb1 (5ah) cmtr2 (28h) (28h) cmeb2 cmtr3 (30h) (30h) cmeb3 cmtr4 txd pin rxd pin txd pin (5ah) (5ah) (5ah) cmtr1
page 226 19. serial prom mode 19.16 uart timing TMP86FS23UG
page 227 TMP86FS23UG 20. input/output circuitry 20.1 control pins the input/output circuitries of the TMP86FS23UG control pins are shown below. note: the test pin of the tmp86fs23 does not have a pull-down resistor. fix the test pin at low-level in mcu mode. control pin i/o input/output circuitry remarks xin xout input output resonator connecting pins (high-frequency) r f = 1.2 m ? (typ.) r o = 0.5 k ? (typ.) xtin xtout input output resonator connecting pins (low-frequency) r f = 6 m ? (typ.) r o = 220 k ? (typ.) reset input hysteresis input pull-up resistor r in = 220 k ? (typ.) test input without pull-down resistor r = 1 k ? (typ.) fix the test pin at low-level in mcu mode. fc r f r o osc. enable xin xout vdd vdd fs r f r o osc. enable xtin xtout xten vdd vdd vdd address-trap-reset watchdog-timer system-clock-reset r in vdd r d 1
page 228 20. input/output circuitry 20.2 input/output ports TMP86FS23UG 20.2 input/output ports port i/o input/output circuitry remarks p1 i/o tri-state i/o hysteresis input r = 100 ? (typ.) lcd segment output p5 p7 p8 i/o tri-state i/o r = 100 ? (typ.) lcd segment output p2 i/o sink open drain output hysteresis input r = 100 ? (typ.) p34 to p30 i/o sink open drain output or c-mos output hysteresis input high current output (nch) (only p33, p34 port) r = 100 ? (typ.) p37 to p35 output sink open drain output high current output (nch) p6 i/o tri-state i/o hysteresis input ain input r = 100 ? (typ.)  
           
           
        
   
      

          
      
 
        
page 229 TMP86FS23UG 21. electrical characteristics 21.1 absolute maximum ratings the absolute maximum ratings are rated values which must not be exceeded during operat ion, even for an instant. any one of the ratings must not be exceeded. if any absolute maximum rati ng is exceeded, a device may break down or its performance may be degraded, causi ng it to catch fire or explode resul ting in injury to the user. thus, when designing products which include this de vice, ensure that no absolute maximu m rating value will ever be exceeded. (v ss = 0 v) parameter symbol pins ratings unit supply voltage v dd ? 0.3 to 6.5 v input voltage v in ? 0.3 to v dd + 0.3 output voltage v out ? 0.3 to v dd + 0.3 output current (per 1 pin) i out1 p1, p30 to p34, p5, p6, p7, p8 port ? 1.8 ma i out2 p1, p2, p30 to p32, p5, p6, p7, p8 port 3.2 i out3 p33 to p37 port 30 output current (total) i out1 p1, p30 to p34, p5, p6, p7, p8 port ? 30 i out2 p1, p2, p30 to p32, p5, p6, p7, p8 port 60 i out3 p33 to p37 port 80 power dissipation [topr = 85 c] p d 350 mw soldering temperature (time) tsld 260 (10 s) c storage temperature tstg ? 55 to 125 operating temperature topr ? 40 to 85
page 230 21. electrical characteristics 21.2 recommended operating condition TMP86FS23UG 21.2 recommended op erating condition the recommended operating co nditions for a device are operating conditions under which it can be guaranteed that the device will operate as specified. if the device is us ed under operating conditions other than the recommended operating conditions (supply voltage, operating temperature range, specified ac/dc values etc.), malfunction may occur. thus, when designing products which include this device, ensure that the r ecommended operating conditions for the device are always adhered to. 21.2.1 when programming flas h memory in mcu mode 21.2.2 when not programming flash memory in mcu mode note: when the supply voltage v dd is less than 3.0 v, the operating temperature topr must be in a range of -20 to 85 c. (v ss = 0 v, topr = ? 10 to 40 c) parameter symbol pins ratings min max unit supply voltage v dd normal1, 2 modes 4.5 5.5 v input high level v ih1 except hysteresis input v dd 4.5 v v dd 0.70 v dd v ih2 hysteresis input v dd 0.75 input low level v il1 except hysteresis input v dd 4.5 v 0 v dd 0.30 v il2 hysteresis input v dd 0.25 clock frequency fc xin, xout 1.0 16.0 mhz (v ss = 0 v, topr = ? 40 to 85 c) parameter symbol pins ratings min max unit supply voltage v dd fc = 16 mhz normal1, 2 modes idle0, 1, 2 modes 3.5 5.5 v fc = 8 mhz normal1, 2 modes idle0, 1, 2 modes 2.7 (note1) fs = 32.768 khz slow1, 2 modes sleep0, 1, 2 modes stop mode input high level v ih1 except hysteresis input v dd 4.5 v v dd 0.70 v dd v ih2 hysteresis input v dd 0.75 v ih3 v dd < 4.5 v v dd 0.90 input low level v il1 except hysteresis input v dd 4.5 v 0 v dd 0.30 v il2 hysteresis input v dd 0.25 v il3 v dd < 4.5 v v dd 0.10 clock frequency fc xin, xout v dd = 2.7 to 5.5 v 1.0 8.0 mhz v dd = 3.5 to 5.5 v 16.0 fs xtin, xtout v dd = 2.7 to 5.5 v 30.0 34.0 khz
page 231 TMP86FS23UG 21.2.3 serial prom mode (v ss = 0 v, topr = ? 10 to 40 c) parameter symbol pins condition min max unit supply voltage v dd normal1, 2 modes 4.5 5.5 v input high voltage v ih1 except hysteresis input v dd 4.5 v v dd 0.70 v dd v ih2 hysteresis input v dd 0.75 input low voltage v il1 except hysteresis input v dd 4.5 v 0 v dd 0.30 v il2 hysteresis input v dd 0.25 clock frequency fc xin, xout 2.0 16.0 mhz
page 232 21. electrical characteristics 21.3 dc characteristics TMP86FS23UG 21.3 dc characteristics note 1: typical values show those at topr = 25 c, v dd = 5 v note 2: input current (i in1 , i in2 ); the current through pull-up or pull-down resistor is not included. note 3: i dd does not include i ref current. note 4: the supply currents of slow 2 and sleep 2 modes are equivalent to idle 0, 1, 2. note 5: output resistors ros and roc indicate "on" when switching levels. note 6: v o2/3 indicates the output voltage at the 2/3 level when operating in the 1/4 or 1/3 duty mode. note 7: v o1/2 indicates the output voltage at the 1/2 level when operating in the 1/2 duty or static mode. note 8: v o1/3 indicates the output voltage at the 1/3 level when operating in the 1/4 or 1/3 duty mode. note 9: when using lcd, it is neces sary to consider values of r os1/2 and r oc1/2 . note 10:when a program is executing in t he flash memory or when data is being read from the flash memory, the flash memory operates in an intermittent manner, causing peak curr ents in the operation current, as shown in figure 21-1. (v ss = 0 v, topr = -40 to 85 c) parameter symbol pins condition min typ. max unit hysteresis voltage v hs hysteresis input ? 0.9 ? v input current i in1 test v dd = 5.5 v, v in = 5.5 v/0 v ?? 2 a i in2 sink open drain, tri-state i in3 reset , stop input resistance r in2 reset pull-up 100 220 450 k ? output leakage current i lo sink open drain, tri-state v dd = 5.5 v, v out = 5.5 v/0 v ?? 2 a output high voltage v oh c-mos, tri?state port v dd = 4.5 v, i oh = ?0.7 ma 4.1 ? ? v output low voltage v ol except xout and p3 port v dd = 4.5 v, i ol = 1.6 ma ??0.4 output low current i ol high current port (p33 to p37 port) v dd = 4.5 v, v ol = 1.0 v ?20?ma supply current in normal1, 2 modes i dd v dd = 5.5 v v in = 5.3 v/0.2 v fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz when a program operates on flash memory (note10,11) ?12.620 ma supply current in idle0, 1, 2 modes ?610 supply current in slow1 mode v dd = 3.0 v v in = 2.8 v/0.2 v fs = 32.768 khz when a program operates on flash memory (note10,11) ?40260 a when a program operates on ram ?1825 supply current in sleep1 mode ?1018 supply current in sleep0 mode ?816 supply current in stop mode v dd = 5.5 v v in = 5.3 v/0.2 v ?0.510 segment output low resistance r os1 seg pin ?20? k ? common output low resistance r oc1 com pin 20 segment output high resistance r os2 seg pin 200 common output high resistance r oc2 com pin 200 segment/common output voltage v o2/3 seg/com pin v dd = 5.0 v v lc = 2.0 v 3.8 ? 4.2 v v o1/2 3.3 3.7 v o1/3 2.8 3.2
page 233 TMP86FS23UG in this case, the supply current i dd (in normal1, normal2 and slow1 modes) is defined as the sum of the average peak current and mcu current. note 11:when designing the power supply, make sure that peak currents can be supplied. in slow1 mode, the difference between the peak current and the average current becomes large. figure 21-1 intermittent operation of flash memory n program coutner (pc) n+1 n+2 n+3 1 machine cycle (4/fc or 4/fs) mcu current i [ma] ddp-p typ. current momentary flash current max. current sum of average momentary flash current and mcu current
page 234 21. electrical characteristics 21.4 ad conversion characteristics TMP86FS23UG 21.4 ad conversi on characteristics note 1: the total error includes all errors except a quantizati on error, and is defined as a maximum deviation from the ideal co n- version line. note 2: conversion time is different in recommended value by power supply voltage. about conversion time, please re fer to ?register framing?. note 3: please use input voltage to ain input pin in limit of v aref to v ss . when voltage of range outside is input, conversion value becomes unsettled and gives affect to other channel conversion value. note 4: analog reference voltage range: ? v aref = v aref ? v ss note 5: the a vdd pin should be fixed on the v dd level even though ad converter is not used. note 6: when the supply voltage v dd is less than 3.0 v, the operating temperature topr must be in a range of ? 20 to 85 c. (v ss = 0.0 v, 4.5 v v dd 5.5 v, topr = ? 40 to 85 c) parameter symbol condition min typ. max unit analog reference voltage v aref a vdd ? 1.0 ? a vdd v power supply voltage of analog control circuit (note 5) a vdd v dd analog reference voltage range (note 4) ? v aref 3.5 ?? analog input voltage v ain v ss ? v aref power supply current of analog reference voltage i ref v dd = a vdd = v aref = 5.5 v v ss = 0.0 v ? 0.6 1.0 ma non linearity error v dd = a vdd = 5.0 v v ss = 0.0 v v aref = 5.0 v ?? 2 lsb zero point error ?? 2 full scale error ?? 2 to t a l e r r o r ?? 2 (v ss = 0.0 v, 2.7 v v dd < 4.5 v, topr = ? 40 to 85 c) parameter symbol condition min typ. max unit analog reference voltage v aref a vdd ? 1.0 ? a vdd v power supply voltage of analog control circuit (note 5) a vdd v dd analog reference voltage range (note 4) ? v aref 2.5 ?? analog input voltage v ain v ss ? v aref power supply current of analog reference voltage i ref v dd = a vdd = v aref = 4.5 v v ss = 0.0 v ? 0.5 0.8 ma non linearity error v dd = a vdd = 2.7 v v ss = 0.0 v v aref = 2.7 v ?? 2 lsb zero point error ?? 2 full scale error ?? 2 to t a l e r r o r ?? 2
page 235 TMP86FS23UG 21.5 ac characteristics note: when the supply voltage v dd is less than 3.0 v, the operating temperature topr must be in a range of ? 20 to 85 c. 21.6 timer counter 1 inpu t (ecin) characteristics 21.7 flash characteristics 21.7.1 write/retenti on characteristics (v ss = 0 v, v dd = 3.5 to 5.5 v, topr = ? 40 to 85 c) parameter symbol condition min typ. max unit machine cycle time tcy normal1, 2 mode 0.25 ? 4 s idle1, 2 mode slow1, 2 mode 117.6 ? 133.3 sleep1, 2 mode high level clock pulse width t wch for external clock operation (xin input) fc = 16 mhz ? 31.25 ? ns low level clock pulse width t wcl high level clock pulse width t wch for external clock operation (xtin input) fs = 32.768 khz ? 15.26 ? s low level clock pulse width t wcl (v ss = 0 v, v dd = 2.7 to 5.5 v, topr = ? 40 to 85 c) parameter symbol condition min typ. max unit machine cycle time tcy normal1, 2 mode 0.5 ? 4 s idle1, 2 mode slow1, 2 mode 117.6 ? 133.3 sleep1, 2 mode high level clock pulse width t wch for external clock operation (xin input) fc = 8 mhz ? 62.5 ? ns low level clock pulse width t wcl high level clock pulse width t wch for external clock operation (xtin input) fs = 32.768 khz ? 15.26 ? s low level clock pulse width t wcl (v ss = 0 v, topr = ? 40 to 85 c) parameter symbol condition min typ. max unit tc1 input (ecin input) t tc1 frequency measurement mode v dd = 3.5 to 5.5 v single edge count ?? 16 mhz both edge count ?? frequency measurement mode v dd = 2.7 to 5.5 v single edge count ?? 8 both edge count ?? (v ss = 0 v) paramete condition min max. typ. unit number of guaranteed writes to flash memory v ss = 0 v, topr = ? 10 to 40 c ?? 100 times
page 236 21. electrical characteristics 21.8 recommended oscillating conditions TMP86FS23UG 21.8 recommended osc illating conditions note 1: to ensure stable oscillation, the resonator position, load capacitance, etc. must be appropriate. because these factors are greatly affected by board patterns, please be sure to evaluate operation on the board on which the device will act ually be mounted. note 2: for the resonators to be used with toshiba microcont rollers, we recommend ceramic resonators manufactured by murata manufacturing co., ltd. for details, please visit the website of murata at the following url: http://www.murata.com 21.9 handling precaution - the solderability test conditions for lead-free produc ts (indicated by the suffix g in product name) are shown below. 1. when using the sn-37pb solder bath solder bath temperature = 230 c dipping time = 5 seconds number of times = once r-type flux used 2. when using the sn-3.0ag-0.5cu solder bath solder bath temperature = 245 c dipping time = 5 seconds number of times = once r-type flux used note: the pass criteron of the above test is as follows: solderability rate until forming 95 % - when using the device (oscillator) in places exposed to high electric fields such as cathode-ray tubes, we recommend electrically shielding the package in order to maintain normal operating condition.  

   

             
page 237 TMP86FS23UG 22. package dimension p-lqfp64-1010-0.50d unit: mm
page 238 22. package dimension TMP86FS23UG
this is a technical document that de scribes the operating functi ons and electrical specif ications of the 8-bit microcontroller series tlcs-870/c (lsi). toshiba provides a variety of development tools a nd basic software to enable efficient software development. these development tools have specifi cations that support advances in microcomputer hardware (lsi) and can be used extensively. both the hardware and so ftware are supported continuous ly with version updates. the recent advances in cmos lsi production technology have be en phenomenal and microcomputer systems for lsi design are constant ly being improved. the products described in this document may also be revised in the future. be sure to check the latest specific ations before using. toshiba is developing highly integrated, high-perfo rmance microcomputers using advanced mos production technology and especially well proven cmos technology. we are prepared to meet the requests for custom packaging for a variet y of application areas. we are confident that our products can satisfy your application needs now and in the future.


▲Up To Search▲   

 
Price & Availability of TMP86FS23UG

All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022  

[Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy]
Mirror Sites :  [www.datasheet.hk]   [www.maxim4u.com]  [www.ic-on-line.cn] [www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net] [www.alldatasheet.com.cn] [www.gdcy.com]  [www.gdcy.net]


 . . . . .
  We use cookies to deliver the best possible web experience and assist with our advertising efforts. By continuing to use this site, you consent to the use of cookies. For more information on cookies, please take a look at our Privacy Policy. X